Home

Chapter 1

1. The bibliographic formatting template editor 129 We have chosen to express the language in a simple XML format Don t be intimidated by this it s really very simple and there s not much to learn Plus most of the time you will be making small changes to the existing specification if you even need to make changes at all To make your life more pleasant there s a little test facility where you can immediately see the results of your changes and check for errors We think this compares favourably with the way other applications handle this aspect there s a balance between simplicity and expressiveness and it s easy to share formatting templates with other users To learn more about the formatting language please see Appendix D The Bibliographic Formatting Language Exporting to OpenDocument When you export a document containing citations to an ODT file and the configuration option Special bibliography formatting is checked Jutoh will write the full citation information for later editing in OpenOffice or LibreOffice It will also replace the Jutoh generated bibliography section with an ODT bibliography field If the option is cleared Jutoh will generate the citation text and bibliography section without any special ODT fields This allows you to use Jutoh bibliography formatting and more complex citations but if you intend to edit citations within OpenOffice or LibreOffice and change the bibl
2. Accessibility po AAA Info Publisher Anthemion E Web site http www anthemion co 2 Document Subject Non fiction A guide to creating ebooks for Kindle iBooks Sony readers and more using the Jutoh ebook creation software from Anthemion Software Edit Custom Metadata J Camel Hep The metadata panel in Project Properties A metadata field is called an element in XML parlance In most cases there is one value per element You can just type the value into the appropriate text field For example there is only title However in some cases it s possible and desirable to provide multiple values per element for example multiple contributors or to add a special attribute within the element to make the meaning of the value clearer To achieve either of these click on the details button next to a category to show the element editor Let s say we want to add an ISBN identifier Click on the details button next to Identifier and in the element editor dialog click on the first Add button to add a new element value This shows a menu of possible element templates click on ISBN This adds a new element with opf scheme set to ISBN You can type the ISBN number into the Value property and the XML that Jutoh will write to the met
3. Name Short name Default value Important fields Short name Title Author Corporate author Year Month Journal Pages Note Possible values Person name Other fields City State Province Country Region Day Editor Publisher Volume Short title IS Description A unique identifier for the citation Description An artide Reset He Reset The bibliographic database template editor If you make edits to the template that you regret you can click Reset to return the template to the Jutoh defaults which give a reasonable coverage based on fields used by Word LibreOffice and BibTeX Editing bibliography formatting There are many standards and preferences for formatting a bibliography and Jutoh cannot hope to build in all possibilities or make a point and click GUI for it that is flexible enough So Jutoh uses a little language dedicated entirely to this purpose so that any user can tailor the bibliography formatting to his or her taste even if the fields in the database template have been changed To look at this click on the Formatting Templates tab 128 CHAPTER 11 WORKING WITH INDEXES Contents Index Footnotes amp Endnotes Bibliography Formating Template Bibliography formatting templates Current formatting template Default Formatting Template Y Options Fixed Layout Available formatting templates in the project Page Layout Sa OE HTML Help A
4. Double click this profile to associate it with the current configuration In Verbose Speech Profile set the Lexicon tags property to the word verbose a made up tag name In your lexicon or lexicons add the verbose tag in the lexicon properties dialog Now all lexicons matching this tag will be used meaning that the configuration Verbose MP3 will use these lexicons If you have lexicons in PLS format and you don t want to import them into a lexicon document for interactive editing you can add them as media resource documents or source documents A source 206 document allows you to edit the XML in situ although it s more error prone that using a lexicon document which automatically generates the XML You can specify the PLS documents to use in Project Preferences Accessibility Speech This allows you to specify alphabets and languages for the PLS lexicons in a way you can t when simply adding a PLS resource this information can then be used when generating Epub 3 files You can also specify string tables to be used for generating PLS lexicons although this method has been superceded by the lexicon document facility There s yet another way pronunciations can be specified using the global custom pronunciations list Go to Preferences Speech and click Edit Custom Pronunciations Now you can add natural language aliases for words Unlike with normal lexicons you can specify that a word should match a s
5. Maximum image width units units for the maximum image width and height pixels or percentage Maximum image optimization width maximum image width to optimize 1 for no optimization Optimization improves quality for smaller images but takes longer Limit images to viewer size whether to limit images to the maximum width and height of the viewer Epub format only Images smaller than the viewer size will show at their original size 86 The setting works by adding max width 100 and max height 100 styles unless overridden by individual image settings Note that some viewers such as Nook Aldiko and ADE erroneously expand images that have their maximum width or height set The fix is to specify the width and or height in pixels or other units in the image properties For example if the image is 300x500 specify 300px in the Width field Replace absolute widths if enabled absolute widths in cm are replaced with percentage widths more suited to ebook displays This applies to images boxes and tables The current paper size and left and right margins or the parent box dimensions are used to calculate an appropriate percentage Maximum percentage width the maximum permissable percentage width relative to the display when using the Replace absolute widths option Some viewers may not accept 100 without part of the object being off screen Flatten images whether to flatten remove alpha channel from any images containing
6. Speech archive These properties control if and how speech archives should be generated Speech archives allow customers to create speech audio on their own computers Generate speech archive Generates a speech archive sparch file for distributing the speech source files 307 Generate portable archive If checked creates an archive that can be used to generate speech on any platform supported by Jutoh If this option is cleared only the selected speech format will be generated and the speech archive may be platform dependent Speech properties These properties control important aspects of speech output such as the text to speech engine to be used and the initial voice Speech engine The speech engine to use A value of auto uses the value specified in Preferences Speech voice The voice to use A value of auto uses the value specified in Preferences Speech voice variant The voice variant A value of auto uses the value specified in Preferences Speech speed The speech speed expressed as a percentage A value of auto uses the value specified in Preferences Speech volume The speech volume expressed as a percentage A value of auto uses the value specified in Preferences Speech pitch The speech pitch expressed as a percentage A value of auto uses the value specified in Preferences Options These properties control various behaviours such as highlighting text during narration of editor content
7. Alignment Indentation tenths of a mm Spacing tenths of a mm Left Before a paragraph Left first line After a paragraph Right Line spacing none C Page break Qutline level none Y L Avoid page break before paragraph C Avoid page break after paragraph A Duis pharetra consequat dui Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes nascetur ridiculus mus Nullam vitae justo id mauris lobortis interdum Paragraph style dialog Indents amp Spacing The alignment buttons determine whether the paragraph will be left justified only right justified justified straight on both sides centred or indeterminate no alignment specified unless inherited from a base style Note that if you specify justified text Jutoh won t show it in the editor but it will usually be respected by the ebook reader software Indentation and paragraph spacing values are specified in tenths of a millimetre which will be converted either to relative em units or to mm when written to HTML Epub or Mobipocket formats see below for details of the conversion You can specify both the left indent and first line left indent and also the indent for the right hand side In Mobipocket KF7 format the right indent is ignored and a left indent will be shown using a single standard indent size except for the first line indent which can be customised You can specify the before paragraph and after paragraph spacin
8. Generate ODT O The Configurations page in the Project Properties dialog Configuration properties are presented in a scrolling list with names on the left and editable values on the right Click on a property to see its description displayed under the list You can double click on some properties such as Notes to show a larger text editor To make it easier to find properties you can type all or part of the property name in the search box at the bottom of the window use the left and right arrows to cycle through the matches selecting each matching property in turn You can press the Return key to give the keyboard focus back to the property editor You can add a new configuration by clicking on Add you will be given the option of basing the new configuration on an existing one the values will be copied to the new configuration or creating a configuration with defaults appropriate to the selected ebook format You can delete the selected configuration with X Delete and change its name with Rename If you want to apply the same configuration settings to a different project you can H Save selected configurations to a file and then Load them in the other project Use the up and down arrows to reorder configurations in the list Using configurations You can select the current configuration in the control panel to the left of the Jutoh editor This 76 configuration will be used to determine p
9. Highlight text Highlights text as it is being read where supported by the speech engine Note that the editor undo history is cleared before and after narration if highlighting is enabled Highlight background colour The highlight background colour Paragraph pause duration The after paragraph pause duration in milliseconds This is for SAPI only since it does not have a 308 paragraph construct The default is 500 Emulation Specifies which XML tags to emulate by transforming text to work around weaknesses in speech engines Specify all to perform all relevant emulation none to perform no emulation or a comma separated list of keywords Available keywords are say as say as characters say as digits say as telephone Lexicons These properties relate to how lexicons are used during speech output Lexicon tags Comma delimited tags to match lexicons that should be included If no tags are specified all lexicons match Lexicon alphabets Comma delimited alphabet s to use in generated lexicons or inline pronunciations Use wildcards if needed Inline pronunciations Replaces words in the speech source files from lexicons using specified phonemes or aliases sounds like pronunciations This can be done in addition to generating lexicons if necessary Please note that for text to speech currently Jutoh only supports inline pronunciations and does not load generated lexicon files PLS lexicons Saves lexic
10. Now you can t actually edit the XML and XHTML source directly You need to deduce the source of the error such as a missing bookmark and correct it in the Jutoh project before running another check The reason for this is that some information is lost when generating the Epub and it wouldn t be possible for Jutoh to precisely reconstruct that information from the generated and hand edited XML and XHTML But you should be able to get used to tracking down problems by examining the Epub files for the small number of occasions that errors make it into the Epub and weren t identified by earlier Jutoh error messages that lead you directly to the context If you see errors from both Jutoh and EpubCheck look at the Jutoh errors first since they show you where in the text they occur fixing these may also fix the Epub errors 236 These are some of the more common errors that can be flagged up by EpubCheck Bad URL syntax use of non registered URI schema If you find something like lt a href doc 17 gt My Page lt a gt in the Epub it means Jutoh couldn t find the referenced page it might have been deleted So you can go back to the editor and fix this link In fact Jutoh will also give you its own more specific error message about this and will allow you to pinpoint the paragraph containing the bad link so normally you can fix it without reference to the XHTML Fix the earlier bad link error and the XHTML problem will go
11. Quote Attribution Quote Body Title Decoration Em Dash Alt Ctrl Edit Favourites The Favourites menu In this example you can see that we have a command Batch Compile a character style Code Span several paragraph styles and a symbol shortcut Em Dash Any primary shortcuts are displayed next to the item names You can also view and use favourite shortcuts in the Favourites tab of the Formatting Palette 283 Palette x 4 Styles Objects Inspector Favourites gt ai Insert Reference Mark Alt Shift R Ai Inserts reference mark start end objects Insert Citation Alt Shift C Inserts a citation Test Symbol Inserts some text Body Text Alt Ctrl 3 Style for body text with no indented first line Body Text First Indent Alt Ctrl 4 Style for body text with an indented first line Heading 1 Ctrl 1 Style for arbitrary document headings level 1 Heading 2 Ctrl 2 Style for arbitrary document headings level 2 Heading 3 Style for arbitrary document headings level 3 Heading 4 Stvle for arbitrary document headinas level 4 Edit Favourites The Favourites tab in the Formatting Palette Customising toolbars Most of the toolbars in Jutoh can be customised that is tools can be switched on or off and in the case of the main toolbar the text labels can be switched on or off You can use View Customise Toolbars to view the Customise Toolbar di
12. by default Jutoh will warn about the missing links but you can switch the warnings off by checking the configuration option Permit links to absent content a k a I know what I m doing please shut up about it mode You can add multiple media documents with the same or different file names and specify different tags for them which are mentioned in nclude media documents matching tags and or Exclude media documents matching tags The appropriate media files will be written to the book If the files have different names you will also need to create multiple versions of the media object that references the media using the condition object see below 220 Tagging chunks of content To include or exclude parts of a document you can use the condition object Select the relevant text then in the Objects tab in the Formatting Palette double click on condition Type a tag name into the Tags field If you want you can add notes so you can remember why you re making this text conditional Your text will now be bracketed by the opening and closing markers of the condition object This is shown in the screenshot below by hovering over the opening condition object you will see the tag s defined for this condition or you can click on the object to edit the tags Ed e v y w ww 72 uy oO Da Q Searc er Convert Compile Check Launch Previous Next Documents Home Options Help x Title Page Palette n x a 4
13. e Orphan control an orphan is the first line of a paragraph that appears on its own at the bottom of a page This option specifies the minimum number of lines of a paragraph that must appear at the bottom of a page Use Default to use the ebook defaults None to switch off orphan behaviour or a number for the minimum number of lines Namespaces specifies the XHTML namespaces Specify auto to have Jutoh use the namespaces appropriate to the current Epub version e Epub package prefix specifies the value of the prefix attribute for the OPF package element Epub metadata namespaces specifies the Epub metadata namespaces e Table headers and footers check to emit headers and footers if specified in individual tables Most readers cannot make use of this option Emulate boxes using tables check to emulate boxes by using one cell tables for platforms such as Kindle for iOS that do not support boxes e Use minimum size for cells check to use min width and min height instead of width and height in table cells for better ADE compatibility If absolute sizes are used content can overspill cell boundaries in ADE e Maximum table rows for inline block the maximum number of table rows before Jutoh no longer uses the display inline block attribute for the table While this attribute is useful for centering tables in Adobe Digital Editions it stops Adobe Digital Editions rendering long tables Set to zero to neve
14. e text the first chapter of main body of text it should not be used more than once e title page 228 e toc table of contents When Jutoh generates a section without it being present in the project outline for example the cover page and simple table of contents page it will set the appropriate guide type If you use the keyword STARTPAGE for the guide type it will be replaced by the appropriate type for Mobipocket or Epub as specified by the current value of the configuration option Start page guide type However this has become unnecessary since all ereaders now recognise or quietly ignore the text guide type How to format drop caps Jutoh doesn t support drop caps directly but you can use CSS to achieve it at least in Epub with slightly less success on Mobipocket There s some information about the general principles here external link In recent versions of Jutoh a Drop Caps character style is created automatically in the default style sheet which you may wish to adjust to your preferences If Jutoh has not already added a Drop Caps character style go to Project Properties Styles click New Style choose Character Style Enter the name Drop Caps Press OK Still in the Styles panel in the drop down under the styles list choose Character styles Select Drop Caps click Edit go to the Font tab and choose a large font say 20pt and choose Bold under Font weight This is just
15. to specify MyProject_ibooks epub Preview file name this is only used for the HTML format where there may be multiple files generated and indicates which file should be used when previewing launching the generated book Metadata This category contains just one property Identifier Identifier the unique identifier for your book If the Identifier metadata field is left empty the 78 identifier for the current configuration is used Note that initially Jutoh generates a different UUID for each configuration Formats Each configuration should have at least one format checked You can have multiple formats checked but this is not usually desirable The one case where you might like to do that is in your Mobipocket configurations if you also check Epub you will be able to check and view the source for your Mobipocket books These are the supported formats Generate Epub generates Epub 2 output or Epub 3 if Epub version is set to 3 Generate Mobipocket generates Mobipocket output suitable for Amazon Kindle devices and software Generate ODT generates OpenDocument Text a word processor format that can be converted to many other formats such as Word using for example the free OpenOffice org suite Note that Word itself tends to create more compact doc files than does OpenOffice org so you might want to re save the file using Word if file size is an issue Generate text generates a single plain text file
16. Jutoh Support Jutoh Book 1 2 3 4 5 Floating Object Test 6 7 8 9 BirdsFixedAndReflowable BirdsFixedAndReflowableReadium To see this welcome screen again double click on the Welcome icon on the Desktop tab 11 24 February 20 Lena TE Chapter 5 Importing Files E Chapter 17 Adding Narration To Your Book E Chapter 2 Gett The Jutoh Desktop At the top of the document area you ll see the title for the currently selected document You can click on it to edit the title of the section as it appears in the outline and in the generated book contents The editor behaves in most respects like other editors and word processors you will have used with some differences and simplifications Formatting operations can be performed from the Formatting Palette 6 the Format menu and the context menu shown using right click or control click on the Mac Navigation around the document follows the usual pattern for example using the control key combined with the left and right arrows to move a word at a time and holding down shift to select text while navigating Text editing and formatting operations can be undone and redone in the usual way However don t expect the editor to be exactly like ones you have used since it has been written from scratch especially to work on a number of different platforms 20 Log and error windows 5 The log and error windows display messages when com
17. Step 7 choosing a cover Now press Finish and the ODT file will be imported and if possible split into separate sections Your usual word processor may have hidden your use of ad hoc formatting for example it might have reported Normal in its style list when actually you had applied ad hoc styles such centring and paragraph spacing to that basic style In Jutoh yow ll see ad hoc formatting reflected in automatic styles in the style list that is styles containing a symbol such as Normal Centre Alignment You are strongly advised to replace ad hoc formatting with named styles as detailed in Chapter 12 Working With Style Sheets 36 If not all images are imported from your ODT file it may be because they are in a non standard format called SVM Jutoh and most other applications are unable to convert these but if you save your original file as an HTML file from your word processor writing GIF files then when importing from ODT Jutoh will try to substitute any missing SVM image files with the GIF files Another solution is to insert the original images from files instead of pasting from the clipboard or copying and pasting the missing images into Jutoh manually Plain text Plain text can contain no formatting and also generally doesn t contain an indication of what character encoding it has been written in which is the key for an application to interpret how the data is converted to actua
18. To clarify dimensions within text boxes can have different units such as percentage image widths but the actual top level object position and size must be in pixels You can use the configuration options Font size units and Dimension units to specify whether the font sizes and dimensions should be written to HTML as points pixels cm or em The iBooks author s guide recommends using pixels but for Kindle you must use em if you want panel magnification to work for text You can also specify font sizes in pixels in styles 182 and ad hoc formatting Conversion to pixels requires a value for dots per inch by default the current display DPI is used since this corresponds best with what s displayed on your screen However for consistency between platforms you can also specify the DPI value to use in the Options page of Project Properties with Use custom DPI for conversions If using pixel fonts and specifying pixels in Font size units you can use the Font pixel scale configuration option to adjust the text size shown in Jutoh to a value closer to that used in the ebook Different ebook renderers will render fonts in slightly different ways so this value may need to be adjusted separately for different configurations In future Jutoh may convert appropriate units of top level object dimensions to percentages for Kindle configurations as recommended by the Amazon publishing guidelines However pixels currently work fine and all pixel
19. e Jutoh is not an HTML editor You can pass some raw HTML and CSS through to the finished book if you wish but Jutoh is in control of most of the HTML generation and so you can t edit all of the generated HTML from within Jutoh However the publisher s version of Jutoh Jutoh Plus does have an HTML template facility to allow you to take over some or all of the HTML generation and the ability to insert JavaScript files into the book See www jutoh com jutohplus htm for more details e Jutoh is not a full blown page layout program Don t expect to do multiple columns or absolute positioning of images Jutoh is optimized for the relatively simple needs of most ebooks which are generally read on small devices with little space for elaborate formatting Having said that Jutoh does support text boxes tables and objects that float to the left or right of text and some tricks are available if you need to go beyond Jutoh s formatting capabilities Jutoh helps you create a cover page for your book with the simple cover designer which can substitute information from the metadata title author and so on into the design Create a design from scratch or start from one of the templates provided by Jutoh Jutoh has facilities for compiling a table of contents and index and can compile references either at the end of a section or in a separate section You can of course create links between pages and links to external web sites In addition
20. iN B10 ESKE KO Bs Ae CERNE ERR RI PIR RP SR CHAE RCT SOMA RE Ce AP RETR AA AER CLES np 244 EUNET Co cette wanile beans T ET ET 244 mport export BETO A dp 244 IMpOr errora O 244 TX DOME CIE ORS E S E e e e TS 245 NDALA TOIRE n EO A E LS iia 245 Third party troubleshooting too Sinai a a e 246 WHEN a cate enero aii eden E ERE E RAAE ae CaS ha il end alt 247 O ah leatas tudano geese 247 Chapter 26 Understanding Ebook Formats and Platform scsscssccssscsssscsssssssssssscssssosssees 248 A o tour baacamece emaheseatebata E E 248 PUD ay sia as SA A eee 248 Mobipocketss alinan a se ah teases yaa La lage 248 Adobe Portable Document Format PD A o 249 OpenDocument Pext ODT e ci a cdesidevenks AEE E EE eaten 249 A A A E RA snatucteans 250 O o o tl a de 251 O 253 Barnes amp Noble Nok ca a iaa tati 254 1E o A E bse indies actha E A E aa EE 255 Di sel eBook Stores SO i 255 O aa 255 Smas IW OLAS A guste E Aa E T EE aa e 256 YOU OWN WED Sl da ama eda EA aa aa 256 Caveats about using multiple distribution platforImMS ooooonnccnnncnnocononononcconnnconncnonocnnnncconnncnconnos 257 SUMMA AA 257 Chapter 27 Marketing Your B00K eeseessersoesoesoessoesossooesoesoeseoesoesosseoesoesoeesocsoesoessossoessooessooseseosessose 258 Step 1 Describe your DOOK ii SAA 258 Step 2 Be able to talk confidently about Mantidae taa 259 Step 3 Find your Special Subject be an expert or an enthusiast oooocnnccnnncnnocononcconccnnnn
21. 0 Font Times New Roman 12pt Letter spacing 2em Insert Speech Object Alt Shift A insert Pause Object Alt Shift H Paragraph styles xi More Insert Pronunciation Alt Shift v Q 4 gt Showing two tabs simultaneously Previewing speech Using the tools in the Speech palette shown in the screenshots above you can play i e immediately read speech for the cursor position pause stop and preview speech view the source code and generate the audio files Pause is not supported in speech engines that are invoked as an external process such as Cepstral and eSpeak You can use the command View Speech Speak Selection Ctri Alt K as a quick way to start and stop playing speech When playing speech you can check the speech profile option Highlight text to highlight sentences as they are read The text will be scrolled to the current position being read This currently works for SAPI on Windows only Note that if using this option the undo history will be cleared before and after narration although you can still edit the text as it is being spoken Playing and previewing occurs for the selected text or 1f there is no selection from the current text cursor position The preview option generates a WAV file and invokes an external audio player so you can preview a chapter or part of a chapter and navigate to different points using the audio player You can configure the audio player that will be shown by going to Preferences Helpers se
22. 238 Start page not working You can specify the section that the ereader will initially open by setting the guide type to text in the relevant section document properties However on Kindle this can sometimes malfunction If you send a mobi file via email to your Kindle instead of directly via USB or via your own web site and sometimes when you download a sample the start page that you have set may not work The reasons for this are unclear but it may be that Amazon are converting the file to a lowest common denominator format such as KF7 that does not support the text guide type The start page should still work for the full book from the Amazon web site or if you copy the book to the device directly Formatting errors Some formatting problems are merely subjective aesthetic issues and some will cause actual problems in your book Here are some of the issues you might have surrounding formatting Missing paragraph or character styles Jutoh will tell you during book compilation if you have paragraphs or objects that use styles that are not in your style sheet You might have deleted the original styles from your style sheet for example or you may have copied and pasted styles using an earlier version of Jutoh that didn t copy the styles If named styles are missing you can choose another style from the drop down style list in the editor or you can recreate the style in the style sheet in Project Properties If automa
23. ALL nt i TT il w at am HI dl at Editing ESA AAA 1 Objects 0818 0110 oes Font 12pt Y Times New Roman y mM Style Body Text First Indent v 1e The Tools page in the Formatting Palette The tool buttons are equivalent to commands on the Format menu 44 Formatting text If possible text formatting such as font family size colour bold and so on should be defined using named styles see later in the chapter and not on an ad hoc basis sometimes called direct formatting However sometimes it s convenient to change the formatting directly for simple styling You can select a span of text and use toolbar buttons or the Format Character command which gives you size colour weight style and other options as shown below Font Advanced Font Arial Unicode MS 9 Batang 11 BatangChe DFKai SB va v Font style Font weight Underlining C Colour _ Bg colour none none Y none y i m Strikethrough m Capitals m Small capitals m Superscript m Subscript m Right toteft m Suppress hyphenation ABCDEFGabcdefg 12345 Cancel The font dialog If there are currently no formatting attributes defined for the span of text you have selected or there are no common attributes for the whole span you will see that all controls have an undefined appearance as in the screenshot This means that the text will inherit whatever attrib
24. Import basic CSS from HTML Epub Styles to assign text and HTML import only First paragraphs Body Text Subsequent paragraphs Body Text First Indent Section headings Heading 1 New Project Step 4 Import Options page Leave these options as they are and press Next Step 5 Import Method This page lets you specify a file to import 11 CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED Import Method Now choose how you d like to create your project From a folder of existing text or HTML files one file per section Folder to scan C Users Julian Smart Documents Jutoh Documents Browse File C projects WritingTools Jutoh src Samples _ena odt Browse Use this to import a single file containing all content in text DOCX ODT HTML or Epub format Click Help for details Also you can import from RTF LIT or MOBI if Calibre is installed This is not recommended as the results are not ideal Calibre is available from calibre ebook com From scratch an initially empty project New Project Step 5 Import Method page Click on option From an existing file and browse for the file you wish to import Then click Next Step 6 Single File Import This page helps you specify how to split the book into separate sections which you can do by specifying a heading style to identify as the chapter heading style or heading text to match or simply to split at page breaks 12 CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED Single
25. Normal Justified when the book is compiled This can be useful to apply minor tweaks without the need to maintain different style sheets for different configurations Using styles to change ebook content In each configuration there are two properties that let you use styles to include or exclude content In Paragraphs to exclude you can specify the comma separated paragraph styles whose paragraphs should be excluded from the book You can use to mean all characters for example Only will cause all paragraphs with a style name beginning Only to be excluded except for those specified in 144 Paragraphs to include In Paragraphs to include you can specify the comma separated paragraph styles whose paragraphs will be exempt from exclusions You can use to mean all characters For example if this property has the value of Only Epub paragraphs styles with Only Epub will be retained but assuming Only in Paragraphs to exclude all other paragraphs whose style name begins with Only will be removed Thus you can include or exclude paragraphs in your document depending on the configuration When a new project is created Jutoh sets up some paragraph styles for each format prefixed Only for example Only Epub which you can use together with the configuration properties Of course you may need several styles per configuration for different formatting for example Only Epub Centr
26. Short name that ensures the same information is used As we shall see in more detail you can create as many bibliographic databases as you like in Jutoh and have Jutoh take items from these databases The first database called Internal Database is special in that it represents the desired items for the bibliography taken from citations or from other databases Databases are always stored in an individual project not globally but they can be exported and imported into other projects This ensures that a project can be shared without losing the information that is required to edit update and compile it Creating and updating the bibliography To create a bibliography section use the menu command Book Update and check Bibliography or you can click on Generate Bibliography Now from Project Properties Indexes Bibliography This 123 scans through all the citations in your project optionally sorts them and formats them into a Bibliography section which Jutoh will create if there is not one already with the bibliography guide type If there is an existing bibliography section imported from a file you may wish to delete it first assuming you re happy for Jutoh to handle the formatting If you add delete or edit an item or change the bibliography settings you will need to update the bibliography again as above before compiling the book Changing bibliographic settings There are many ways in which you can change how
27. When importing from ODT also export an HTML file using OpenOffice or LibreOffice to the same folder that contains the ODT and with the same root name as the original file For example thing odt should be exported as thing html GIF files will be written to the folder and Jutoh will use these images when importing from ODT Poor list formatting Due to the differences between the way lists are represented in different formats sometimes lists are less than perfect after import for example containing erroneous bullet symbols or inconsistent indenting Try selecting the list and re applying a list style using the toolbar list buttons or Format Bullets and Numbering Also try to ensure that the list items are formatted with a paragraph style with no indent and delete any blank lines between list items Export errors This is not really about Jutoh errors so much as things that can go wrong in a chain of conversion starting with Jutoh output If you generate an ODT and wish to convert to say a Microsoft Word file you can use OpenOffice org or LibreOffice an offshoot of OpenOffice org to convert it However the results can vary in quality depending on which version of the word processor you use and what version of Word you choose to export to If you have a copy of Word you can experiment with what combination works best In particular if there are problems with list bullets you can adjust the bullet font and Unicode symbol used fo
28. and the link and between links With the Only use linked numbers option you can determine whether an item with a single link will have clickable entry text off or a more consistent look using a single linked number on You can specify that the index should be recreated every time the book is compiled check Automatically build index so you don t have to remember to rebuild the index after editing You can edit the index itself in the Entries tab you can change the text of items remove them and reorder them These edits will only be retained if you answer No after clicking the Generate Index Now button If you update the index from the Update Special Book Sections dialog the index will be rebuilt from scratch from the entries in the book content losing any edits in the Entries tab Importing index entries Index entries are imported from ODT and DOCX documents However no special formatting such as italics can be applied to parts of entries or keys they are simple text strings all formatted with the same style 118 Creating footnotes and endnotes A Jutoh book can have either footnotes at the end of each chapter the default or a separate endnotes section Footnotes are always automatically created when the book is compiled but the endnotes section must be explicitly updated or told to update itself automatically before each compilation You can insert footnotes or endnotes using the Format Insert Links Footnote
29. emphasis tag This guide doesn t go into details of how exactly to use individual tags However you can find out quite quickly by searching online for the syntax of particular tags attributes and CSS properties Even if you don t add any tag objects yourself if you use Jutoh s accessibility features Jutoh may be inserting tag objects during code generation and when looking at the generated HTML code it may be helpful to bear in mind this process Inserting tag objects You can insert a tag object either using the Object Palette or by using the command Format Insert Object Shift Ctrl P which shows the Object Selection dialog from which you can select a tag object as well other kinds of object such as text boxes and tables If you have selected content first the tags will be placed around the selection Right click or control click on Mac OS X to show a menu for inserting just a start or end tag Tag objects that relate to a block of content for example the section tag should be placed in their own paragraph if possible The containing paragraph will be ignored when the code is generated Or place the start tag at the start of a paragraph and the end tag at the end of another paragraph You can copy and delete object tags just like ordinary text 164 This is what the Object Palette looks like Palette x 4 Styles Objects Inspector Favo gt aside Es An aside is used for content thatis not in the normal
30. fermentum sollicitudin diam eleifend A comment showing its tooltip If you fill out your user name and initials in Preferences the General page they will be associated with new comments You can choose to include selected comments in your ebook by default comments are not included except when exporting to ODT Comments are imported from DOCX and ODT files For more information see the topic Working with comments in the Jutoh online help The basics of formatting using named styles Jutoh maintains a style sheet for each project containing named style definitions that can be used to change formatting in your project Each style definition or just style for short specifies visual attributes such as italics colour alignment and so on Jutoh supports four kinds of named style e Paragraph style This kind of style applies to an individual paragraph and you can see available paragraph styles in the drop down control above the editor e Character style This kind of style changes the formatting for a span of text within a paragraph You can apply character styles using the context right click menu choosing Styles and then Character Styles e List style This kind of style defines how list items are formatted at each depth the two list buttons on the formatting toolbar simply apply two of the standard list styles bulleted and numbered e Box style This kind of style applies to images and text boxes and defines attributes
31. penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes nascetur ridiculus mus Nullam vitae justo id mauris lobortis interdum The paragraph formatting dialog The paragraph formatting dialog contains a Font page as per the character formatting dialog because a paragraph style specifies a font which character formatting can override The Indents amp Spacing page will be the one most frequently used when formatting paragraphs You can change some of these properties more directly using tools in the Formatting Palette The alignment and spacing values are discussed shortly Special symbols Jutoh supports most left to right languages using Unicode and you can insert special symbols in several ways Use the Format Insert Symbols Symbol Shift Ctrl Y command to show the symbol 46 selector dialog containing all the Unicode symbols see the screenshot below Using View Auto Replace Preferences define symbols that will be inserted when you type a particular piece of text followed by space or paragraph return For example by default typing three dashes followed by a space will cause Jutoh to insert an em dash For more information see Appendix B Configuring Jutoh Define a symbol as a keyboard shortcut and or favourite using View Customise Shortcuts A favourite is a style command or symbol that is defined as a shortcut and also has its Favourite option checked It will then appear on the W
32. rm f r espeak 1 37 rm espeak 1 37 zip Now you can configure Jutoh in Speech Preferences to use the binary file Applications espeak 1 37 speak If you wish to use eSpeak on Linux you can download a zip file from espeak sourceforge net download html and unzip it as above Then configure Jutoh for using eSpeak in the Speech tab of the Jutoh Preferences dialog LAME MP3 Encoder If you wish to encode MP3 files you will also need the LAME MP3 encoder On Windows download it from lame sourceforge net links php Binaries and set the full path of the LAME executable Lame exe in the MP3 tab of the Jutoh Preferences dialog On Mac you can get a package file containing LAME for Mac from the Thalictrum web site at www thalictrum com index php pageid 2 Run the pkg file that appears on the desktop The lame command will now be available and you need to set usr local bin lame as the executable in the Jutoh MP3 Preferences page On Linux you can get and install LAME using your favourite package management software For example sudo apt get install lame Or you can get a binary or the source code from lame sourceforge net After installing the Lame command will now be available and you just need to set lame no full path required as the executable in the Jutoh MP3 Preferences page Customising shortcuts and favourites Shortcuts and favourites give you quick ways to to execute commands apply styles and insert
33. s settings on a mobile drive 4 Fully mobile running Jutoh from the mobile drive and storing your files and applications settings on the mobile drive In scenarios 2 3 and 4 you can use your data on different computers and different types of computer You can be working on a Mac one day a Linux machine the next and Windows the day after that Of course you can still do this with 1 but it will be more awkward to copy files between machines With scenario 4 fully mobile you can store the Jutoh application and its data files on the mobile drive as well as your own projects Jutoh can install itself onto the mobile drive for Windows Linux and Mac operation and no components of Jutoh will need to be stored on the computer s hard drive In the next section we ll see how to use a mobile drive for storing just your data Using a mobile drive for data Jutoh can use the current mobile drive when loading project files To have Jutoh prompt you for a drive name when starting go to the Mobile Preferences dialog select or type a mobile drive name and check Store your data on the external drive If you want the drive name to be stored between sessions check Remember between sessions but it is recommended that you don t check this in case the drive letter or name changes especially when using different computers Jutoh stores documents in the Documents folder on the mobile drive by default You may be wo
34. selling them at events and even donating them to your libraries to raise your profile Consider promotional give aways Giving your book away can be a very effective tool for getting publicity and reviews On Amazon you can give your book away for a few days so long as your book isn t for sale via a different retailer Often a free book will rise to the top of the free book charts for a particular genre giving it visibility that it may never have had before Make a little money from promoting Jutoh You can sign up as an affiliate at www bluesnap com and take a percentage for every copy of Jutoh that is sold as a result of visiting your site Essential reading Marketing Your Book An Author s Guide by Alison Baverstock The Smashwords Book Marketing Guide by Mark Coker This book Chapter 26 Understanding Ebook Formats and Platforms Summary We ve covered some common sense approaches to publicising yourself and your books If you have further ideas do write in and tell us so we can include them in a future edition of this book 262 We ve also come to the end of the book I hope you enjoyed it if so do pass the book around to your friends and colleagues If you don t already have a copy of Jutoh why not visit www jutoh com and give the demo a whirl We support Windows Mac and Linux and one purchase is good for all platforms so you don t have to worry about migrating to another operating system later We re al
35. that value will be used instead of the original name For example in Preferences you could add a global table English then add a string with name Table of Contents with value Contents Then select the English string table for the Global string table property in all your configurations The word Contents will now be used instead of Table of Contents in your generated book Jutoh knows to check the string tables for certain keywords when generating documents or parts of an ebook so the Table of Contents substitution will be done when generating a table of contents title as well as in your own content Other examples include Cover Page Guide Contributions by and Published by Continuing with the example you can also use the keyword Table of Contents in your cover designs and the word Contents will be substituted You can also include keywords in your metadata and if the Replace strings in content configuration property is checked in your book content and they will be expanded before inclusion in your generated ebook Note that string replacement in content only works for strings within the same paragraph formatted in the same character style Here s another example say you wanted the Smashwords edition of your book to contain different information from the other versions of your book In the picture below a string table called Smashword Strings has been ad
36. 156 Editing the template alle A A AS 157 A O CAN 158 Chapter 15 Working With BOX CS sicsssccocsesasdsenkessdssvacesddentdcndaassesubdsabuvadsvesnctonessdoadssnonssdtooanscechsesansvncs 159 HDR OCUIC TION E 159 Creating anid editing DORCS i Ascii cscesiss od oe sue hea elie e E hi ous ued ane E EE RoweS Coe R aes 160 Importni DOCS a a ca E ies 161 Using DOS AAA Suva hou sah des 161 Text box compatibility in CHOOKTCACEES A as 162 SUL a EEEE PENSAS ENA OR Sd EA 163 Chapter 16 Working With Tag Objects cssccscsccscssscssssscsssscssssscsssecsscescsssessscssccssscesssssssesors 164 Intro dC caco a a RN ES Beh Ne Be MI Ee 164 PASErtini Ste ODE CUS nroa yal baited eet c ra a alec np cou eee r es utile a ole faced Seta 164 Anatomy OT a tag OD is a as 165 A Cunn a A i a A ea Maan sdtecanacedinaythoanmeeatbbueats 165 Custom tag ds 166 OV a ete To ut 166 Chapter 17 Adding Narration to Your BOO0Kk cmooomommms 167 A EE E ye soeedaatncdaallictowes ETE 167 Step 1 Mark up your document with spans and identiflerS oooonnccnnnccinnoconccionononcconnnonnnnnnconancnnonos 167 Step 2 Add your narration audio files to JutOh oooooonnccnnocinccnonanincnnonnconononnncnnno nono cnnncnnn cono ncnnnnoos 168 Step 3 Create a ab ta a ici it 169 Step 4 Import tie label track una cis 171 Step 5 Specify a character style for highlighting narrated COMtOMt oooconccnncniccnnccnoncncnnoncnancnncnonannns 172 Step Compile th DOI A A dE
37. 172 A O A 172 Chapter 18 Creating Fixed Layout Boo0ksS oocooooonoooonocooonncnonnconnncnononononononoccnononononocononocononoccncccnnons 173 The fixed Javout sample a A EN AA in 173 Wh at isa fixed layout BOOK ti a didas 173 Starting from an existing file OM eines etasunied snijdusnasliaeeadussicts cis elaine bens ee ca vaso emicewinlatees 174 What are the disadvantages of using fixed layOUt 0 0 eeceesccesseceteceeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeneeeeeteeeenteeeeeaes 174 What formats and features are supported by Jutoh 0 0 cece eccceeeeceseeeseeceeeeeeceseeeeeceseeeseeeeeeees 175 Creating a fixed layout PLOT da 176 BAIT Oa A aa Sete ct aly Seat eae tad auc le dais lean E A Ne wage ages 177 Ia A objects ieira O dette eeepc Oia ot Rea E eased esata delete 179 Clipboard operations n A ae 179 Selectionand keyboard navigati n srci A Ad Ed 180 Alpning ODI CCUG sas sores ten ahs nets a a nas ihoede mas lige P O gs carn wien a 180 INGLE YA A ONE TE MTT AOAC VOR APL NE 182 Pr r dering Ob CCS mortal ida dep il ad id 182 Font Size ANG dim nsion Ut A AA 182 Embedding TOMS a o 183 TAI os sore ao e e o 183 OS 184 Generating and testing your CDOOK pinar dei its is 184 Changing fixed layout configuration Seti GS A ES 184 a 2 6 esatccone teed a a a a a ded E Raesee nie 185 Masnificd TEC IONS in RE o TA A E AATE EE EAEN 186 Recommended settings for KES siii in 187 F rmattinatoribBo0ks KoDO ae ious ses cenit a adri tias 187 Using a regular reflowable proj
38. Alt Ctrl 5 ragraph Styles B Symbols i Em Dash Alt Ctrl Em Dash Alt Ctrl Inserts Matches Batch Compile Compiles the multiple configurations Bulk Bookmark Management Performs bulk bookmark insertion and removal Check Book F8 Checks the book Compile F7 Compiles the selected configuration Design Cover Shows the cover designer Document Cleanup Performs style cleanup on the whole book only show items with shortcuts Match Name and Category Y Q Search The Shortcut Customisation dialog When you edit shortcuts you ll see all the named paragraph and character styles for the currently selected project excluding automatic styles If you make changes to the shortcuts for these styles they will be saved with the project In contrast command and symbol shortcuts are global All available commands and styles whether they have associated shortcuts or not appear in the shortcut customisation dialog so you don t need to add these However you need to add any symbol shortcuts that you need with the Add button By default there are no symbol shortcuts defined When you click on Add or Edit the Edit Shortcut dialog is shown as pictured below 281 Primary shortcut used from the main application window shift v Ctrl Y Alt y _ Secondary shortcut used after a prefix command Shift Ctrl Alt None Name Em Dash Symbol Insert Symbol Favouri
39. Anthemion Software Limited Source format Portable Chapters Speech engine Title Page Microsoft SAPI Table of Contents Paragraph Formatting Voice Character Formatting Microsoft Hazel Desktop English Great Bi v Bookmarks Lists comes Pictures p gt O JO lt gt d Text Boxes E Tables Play Stop Preview Source Generate 4 eRe 0406 imMP3 _ WAV Bitrate 128 v kbs Click Generate to create audio files Configure Speech Configure MP3 Show Folder i The speech archive dialog To use this dialog adjust the engine voice and other parameters as required and press Generate to create MP3 files for all selected book chapters They will be generated in the background if you wish you can close the dialog and watch the status bar to see when file creation has finished The folder containing the generated files will be shown when the file creation has finished 208 Techniques for effective speech markup Here are six techniques you can use to improve speech quality For details of speech properties please see Appendix E Speech Markup Reference Be sure to check out the sample file Patient Advice Speech Sample jutoh which demonstrates all of these techniques 1 Use the Say as property The Say as property gives hints to the speech engine about whether to pronounce enclosed text as individual characters or a telephone number or a date and so on Although speech engines di
40. Double page spread v E Page 2 Pis for PUNY PETREL Page 3 Don t try to fuel your car wath one tried it wath no luck a n E Page 4 ves spitting feathers when called the pideup truck Width 1200 E Scraps Neve about this ted amet lone bleak El Or By the way it does display a strangely crooked beak esources Size Height 800 gt Background Size 600 x 400 A de The image is the same aspect ratio as the page The image is smaller than the page which will affect quality de Bis for BLAND BLACKBIRD _ Mr Blackbird has a happy song he whistles all da y long What F shame his lifeless is beady eye and yellow be orn caked feathers or indeed anything lo cute Snap to grid O Y Show outlines E Title Page B Page 1 El Page 2 x Editing a fixed layout page When you are editing a page the Fixed Layout palette appears on the right with two tabs Page and Objects The Page tab contains controls for editing the page type size and background image among other things The Objects tab contains a list of additional images and text objects that should be shown on top of the background image You can add and delete these and set their properties such as size and colour Under both tabs there are controls for zooming and showing object outlines The Page type control indicates what kind
41. File Import Choose a style from the original document that divides book sections If you choose none the book will be imported in one section Why is it important to divide your book into sections 8 Split by style Heading 1 Split by pattern CHAPTER Split at page breaks This style was used 5 times in the document Preview Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Remove unused styles from the style sheet Imported styles override default Jutoh styles _ Discard imported styles and apply Jutoh styles New Project Discard empty paragraphs Step 6 Single File Import page As you can see from the preview window listing the headings in the story Jutoh has correctly guessed the paragraph style to use for splitting the story into sections so in this case all you need to do is press Next Don t worry if your book is not correctly split at this point you can split it manually using the menu command Edit Split Document Step 7 Cover Design The last page in the wizard lets you choose a cover design 13 Cover Design Choose whether to use an existing file or create a new design for your e book cover You can edit your design further at any time O Use an existing file 6 Create a new design Choose from existing templates Text will be added automatically Design Edit your design in more detail adding text and images Felix Carswell Now press Finish to create the pro
42. Formatting Language ccscccsssscsscsscsscsccssssseessssccsseeessseees 295 A 295 A sod Pag sac ES E aie Re 295 E CS ienen OL aR i inl ais ROG saa ea oa a BS alee a ed elas Oat eat cs 297 Using VD ia da 298 How to edit and use formatting temp lates ia ia adios 299 Appendix E Speech Markup ReferenCe e sesseeseesseesoesoessoesoesosesossoesoeesoesoeseeesossoessoesossooesossosseossosesso 301 Property reference i hin cert a a AI Ia SN cas 301 Uns pported SS MLETSAMES RA ob 305 Appendix F Speech Profile References ciscccscciccecsscescsceccsssccactiacssaeceosssdeessacernsdeccasteasssdnadenacosbacataniscs 307 A ia Sas at cincaslespnedss enuoaialenu tk due gh eeeouaunuensaraateaeu EA 307 Speech ANC NIV a a aiieazebuaeracnars 307 Jl O 308 A 308 LEXICON Senei O age tccas EE a aaah E AE a O E E R E A hae 309 Sperch enhance SAE E A E A EEE EESE 309 Appendix G Alphabet Description Reference 311 Ab t alph bet d scripti S At a davis 311 Alphabet A A 311 A toseduignessiseconecadevnes eusadvenussdseesnaseleeseseeenes 313 From the Horse s Mouth SEDA a We hit the Google trail in search of e book enlightenment If it wasn t for Jutoh we d still be in the dark Australian Financial Review July 27th 2010 Jutoh writes a new chapter in the manual of e publishing Jutoh is a remarkable program In a complex field it offers a simple to use interface with generous options and faultless performance It acc
43. Heading 1 Build options Add at least one entry per section Overwrite existing text _ Use document depth not heading level C Automatically build table 8 Scan whole project O Scan a range of sections Start section End section L The Table of Contents Properties dialog Most of the settings are as per the table of contents wizard but some give additional control for multiple tables see Adding multiple tables below Adding multiple tables Jutoh allows you to add further tables for example tables of figures or the contents for a part of the overall book Click on Add at the top of the Contents tab and give a unique identifier for this table You can change the title used for the table page and setting the Table type field indicates to Jutoh that you would like a table of contents an index of illustrations an index of tables or a custom index Jutoh will change some of the fields to more appropriate defaults when you change the table type but they all 114 work the same way by scanning paragraph styles for items to include in the table For an index of illustrations for example you can get Jutoh to match against caption styles say with the matching style value Picture Caption Set a range to scan if you re interested in a particular set of pages If you already have a section that you want to use for the new table you can click Set next to Table section ID to
44. Jutoh contains tools to help collate research that doesn t belong in your finished book for example text and image scraps and has its own desktop where you can put sticky notes shortcuts to applications and documents and even little image slideshows Jutoh works on Windows Mac OS X and Linux one licence is good for any or all platforms which is handy if you have a variety of machines and it can be run from a USB drive All information for a given Jutoh project is stored within a single file with extension jutoh which makes for easy transfer and backup What kinds of book can be created with Jutoh Jutoh is good for most book types including e novels e short story collections e biography e self help books e articles manuals e photographic books e textbooks with simple layout requirements You can insert images into Jutoh which can be photographic or artistic or could be used for symbols and decorative touches Jutoh s table support can be handy for scientific books mathematic or other formulae aren t supported but can be achieved by inserting pictures As we said earlier don t expect the layout of a complex word processor document to be reproduced exactly as if exporting to PDF Jutoh has experimental support for audio and video but these file types are not yet recognised by a wide variety of reader hardware and software and so should be approached with caution If you are feeling adven
45. Jutoh formats the bibliography Go to Project Properties Indexes and click on the Bibliography tab The Options sub tab is the first to be shown Metadata Contents Index Footnotes amp Endnotes B Cover Styles Options Entries Formatting Templates Indexes Bibliography Configurations z epee EA Section title Bibliography Automatically build bibliography pe Strings V Add all entries in sources Options Title style Bibliography Heading v Fixed Layout Generate Bibliography Now i Year Page Layout Sort by Author Corporate author Year ee HTML Help Accessibility Se Info Entry paragraph style Bibliography Entry Document Bibliography entry options Y List style Numbered List 1 Citation options Citation style Citation y Citation format vw AUTHOR SURNAMES YE vw Person separator and vw Y Merge adjacent citations using separator v Y Use custom citation text where present Remove All The Bibliography Options panel Here you can change the bibliography section title and its style You can specify whether the items are sorted and if so using which fields You can specify that all items should be output and not just the cited ones Jutoh will use any databases specified as sources in the Entries tab You can specify the paragraph style applied to each entry in the bibliography and also whether entries should be forma
46. KF8 still ignores the maximum width and height values instead making sure the pictures don t exceed the display size Most Epub viewers recognise pixel cm and percentage size specification See also the advice below on using the Replace absolute widths configuration option to turn absolute widths into percentages at book compile time not permanently Users sometimes ask what DPI dots per inch a picture should be saved in before inserting it into 98 Jutoh When adding pictures to Jutoh it s more helpful to think in terms of pixels You need to balance the need for an adequate resolution so the image doesn t appear pixelated on high resolution devices versus the need to keep the ebook file size within reasonable limits For a photograph to be displayed full width on the ereader device you might consider inserting images with widths of around 1000 pixels You can always use Maximum image width in your configurations to limit the physical image sizes in the generated ebook perhaps setting different maximum sizes depending on ebook format See also the recommendations on image sizes for individual platforms such as iBooks and Kindle You will only rarely if ever need to change the Position mode and related controls The position mode determines how positioning is specified and currently Jutoh only supports Static the object behaves like a single character and if the object is floating Relative the Left and Top fields
47. Page Numbering after title pages Press OK Choose Format Choose Footer Default Click on the first available footer and choose Insert Fields Page Number Select the page number field and centre it You can also add a header if you wish perhaps containing the title of the book To manually add a table of contents with page numbers and not just links follow these steps in OpenOffice org Writer or LibreOffice Writer l 2 Delete the Jutoh generated table of contents Click on Format Indexes and Tables Indexes and Tables to show the Insert Index Table dialog We need to associate heading styles used in the document with levels in the table of contents similar to how Jutoh works when searching for headings to put in the table of contents Check Additional Styles and click the button Assuming you are using Heading 1 Heading 2 and so on for headings in your document click on each of these in the list and click on the gt gt button to position each at the appropriate point in the table Heading 1 at position 1 Heading 2 at position 2 and so on Press OK but don t dismiss the Insert Index Table dialog yet Now we need to make the entries hyperlinked Click on the Entries tab and in the Structure area click in the box just before the E button then click Hyperlink Click in the box just after the E and click on Hyperlink This creates LS and LE marks Link Start and Link E
48. Recreate contents by scanning documents so it only regenerates the contents page without scanning 115 headings and recreating the NavMap Or you can create the table of contents page entirely by hand by adding a section giving it a Guide Type of toc see the document properties available from the project outline context menu or Document Document Properties and adding links This is laborious so it s likely that you ll want to use one of the automatic or semi automatic methods Creating a table of contents for a fixed layout book Automated table of contents creation doesn t currently work for fixed layout since you may choose to have your contents within an arbitrary text box Instead create your table of contents manually by linking to pages and optionally bookmarks within the pages You can however edit the NavMap entries in Project Properties Indexes Contents and if there is one or more Jutoh will use this to generate the NavMap in the book instead of adding all section titles Epub 3 considerations Epub 3 uses a different kind of NavMap a navigation document It s common to generate the NCX as well for older ereaders and this is the Jutoh default but if you wish to suppress NCX generate clear the configuration option Generate NCX Both kinds of navigation index are created from the entries in Project Properties Indexes Contents Creating an alphabetical index Jutoh can create an alphabetical index if yo
49. With Tag Objects and Chapter 17 Adding Narration To Your Book A convenient way to show all the bookmarks in your current book section is to use the Inspector tab in the Formatting Palette and select Bookmarks from the drop down list You can then click on a bookmark in the list to highlight that bookmark in the editor Links To insert a link within the book use Format Insert Links Link to Page Shift CtrI G You will be shown a document browser select a section document and if you wish a bookmark within that section To edit or remove the link just click on the linked text To insert a URL an external web site address use Format Insert Links URL Shift Ctrl W and type the address When you create a page link or URL the dialog will give you the option of applying a style to the linked text This style is mainly for editing convenience so you can easily see the links ebook readers will provide their own styling for links In order not to clash with the default link styling when generating the ebook Jutoh will remove attributes such as colour and underline if they are also present 49 in the URL character style but you can change this behaviour per configuration Automatic bookmarks have the prefix auto bookmark and may be changed by the Table of Contents Wizard If you want to make sure that a heading retains a constant bookmark that you can link to manually change the bookmark to one without the auto bo
50. Word DOCX HTML text and Epub files DOCX and ODT are recommended for Centre best results If you want to create a project from scratch instead just choose From scratch in Step 5 below Run Jutoh and click the New button on the toolbar or type CtrHN or click on File New Project You will be shown a wizard that will take you through file import Here are the steps for importing it one step per wizard page v LS icai checks auc 4 E Chapter 17 Adding Narration To Your Book E Chapter 2 Getting Started x gt Log Errors There were 2 errors for JutohBook epub at 20 02 2014 11 01 02 Double dick on a i jon Body Text First Indent paragraph style Style for body text with an indented first line subindent 0 ERROR Jutoh bookmark auto bookmark tab contents 6 was not found Ti 7 t n r ERROR Jutoh bookmark auto_bookmark_tal ed Based on Normal Justified Left indent 0 Left Tip The bookmark in this page link was not found Click on the link to choose another bookmark If you are linking to an automatic bookmark a l l Paragraph styles The Jutoh main window Menu bar and toolbar 1 As with most applications Jutoh has a menu bar under the window title containing all the commands you need to make things happen The menus are File Edit Format Tools Document Book View and Help and the groups are fairly self explanatory Run your
51. You ll end up with a much better and more easily edited document if you take the trouble to create and use named styles Also if you use a rational naming scheme for headings you II find it much easier to persuade Jutoh to create an advanced table of contents And finally with named styles Jutoh won t have to generate so many automatic styles in the generated ebook which could reduce its efficiency and increase file size CSS dimensions When exporting to ebook formats other than Epub and Mobipocket paragraph dimensions for indentation left margin right margin line spacing and paragraph spacing are specified in absolute dimensions tenths of a mm When exporting to epub and Mobipocket Jutoh will convert these dimensions to em which is a unit based on the current text size or to mm depending on the value of the Use relative dimensions configuration option You can adjust the scale factor used for the conversion using the Options page in the Project Properties dialog Note that when marking up individual spans of text with either a character style containing a text size or an ad hoc text size the text size will be generated as an absolute point size not in ems This is because if it were in ems the relative size would combine with the paragraph relative text size So please avoid using text size in ad hoc styles define text size in paragraph styles where possible Otherwise you will see inconsistent text size when scaling the
52. a cover from scratch using its built in editor or if you have an existing design then Jutoh can use that This chapter covers everything you need to know about using cover designs in Jutoh Cover design basics The cover design does not appear as a section in your project under the Contents folder instead you edit it in Project Properties A preview of the cover design will appear in the Build tab of the Control Panel To edit the cover design simply click on the cover image in the Control Panel or click on the Edit toolbar button and then on the Cover tab or click on the Cover toolbar button 69 Metadata Cover Styles als Pr e R X Default Cover Indexes Configurations Assets Strings Options Lena Fixed Layout Accessibility Info Document Edit Cover Design Create From Image File Create From Clipboard Anthemion Software Reset Cover Design gt Edit Custom HTML Cancel Help The Cover page in the Project Properties dialog A good size for a cover image is 600 pixels wide by 800 pixels high though on today s pixel packing devices you might like to use a higher resolution You can also look at the recommendations of the particular site or publishing platform you are using Because ebook covers are often shown as a small thumbnail on ebook sites you need to make them readable when reduced to a small size so simplicity is a virtue for ebook covers Using an existing design If
53. a word processor these styles aren t visibly separate but the master page style contains the actual headers and footers while the page layout style contains formatting information If you look at the list of styles in your word processor there are buttons for different kinds of style Click on the page styles icon and you can see the styles that are predefined or generated by Jutoh Default Style is called Standard internally and in Jutoh You can right click over a style and press Modify to change the page style properties To associate a page style with a particular portion of your document in OpenOffice LibreOffice you can insert a page break with an associated page style Insert Manual Break Or you can put the cursor at the first paragraph in a new page right click and select Paragraph then select the Text Flow tab and you will see With page style and a page style name which you can change So you can see from this that a page style is associated with a portion of a document by being associated with the paragraph style of the first paragraph or table after a page break When you edit a header or footer in the word processor you are editing the header or footer for the particular page style that is active at present For example if you associated a Chapter Style page style with the heading for Chapter 1 then Chapter 2 would also have this page style and editing a footnote for Chapter 2 would also change it for
54. and edited in Jutoh as simply a character in a paragraph Typically a large picture will have its own paragraph You can adjust properties by clicking on the picture you can set the relative or absolute picture size or maximum size whether the image will float to the left or right of other content margins alternative text and more We ll go into more detail about images and how Jutoh optimizes them for ebooks in Chapter 10 Working With Pictures Page breaks The ebook reader software will cause page breaks to appear between sections such as chapters so you don t need to insert a break at the start of each section If you need page breaks to appear within a section before a particular a paragraph put the cursor on that paragraph and use Format Insert Page Break Shift CtrI E To remove a page break use the same command again A dotted line will appear before the paragraph indicating the location of the break How page breaks are interpreted visually is up to each ebook reader Non breaking spaces and hyphens You can insert non breaking spaces and hyphens with Format Insert Symbols Non Breaking Space Shift Ctrl Space and Format Insert Symbols Non Breaking Hyphen Shift Ctrl The non breaking space is inserted as a Unicode character 160 but since some fonts can t display the non breaking hyphen character 8209 this is inserted as an object If you enable the configuration option Convert non breaking hyphen to
55. assign the table of contents page the toc guide type in the document properties Unfortunately automatic table of contents creation doesn t work for fixed layout books but you can customise the NavMap by adding entries in Project Properties Indexes Contents A text box containing hyperlinks must have its region properties set so that it doesn t show any magnified panel on Kindle Otherwise nested links are generated and the ereader may crash 183 Cover If you enable the configuration option Generate cover page Jutoh will generate a cover HTML page using the page size given in the configuration Alternatively you can set Cover design to none and create your own cover page as the first page in the project Set the guide type in the document properties to cover As mentioned later specifying a cover can cause duplicate covers to appear on Kindle this is a Kindle rather than a Jutoh issue Generating and testing your ebook As usual you now just need to choose a suitable configuration Epub or Mobipocket and press Compile to create your iBooks Epub or Amazon Kindle book You can test Kindle books with Kindle for PC or the Kindle Previewer some Previewer modes don t currently display all aspects of fixed layout books and in some cases layout is better on the device than the Previewer For example images with a percentage width inside a text box can be shown full size on Previewer and correctly on devices
56. be one of glyphs and characters Say as format Supported for SSML This property is used with Say as The value is specific to the speech synthesizer Sentence 303 Supported for SSML This marks the content as containing a sentence with a suitable pause at the end of the sentence This is not generally needed since punctuation is interpreted as signifying a pause but occasionally you may need to disambiguate content with unusual or missing punctuation To support more platforms you can use a pause instead of marking content as a sentence Speak as Supported for Epub 3 SSML partial SAPI partial Possible values are normal spell out digits literal punctuation and no punctuation For SSML only spell out and digits are supported For SAPI only spell out and digits are supported and they both translate to the spell element Vocal gesture Supported for SSML SAPI This provides gestures such as laughs coughs and hmm sounds The available values are shown in the drop down list when you edit the value There must be content contained within this element which is replaced by the gesture This property is currently only supported by CereVoice Voice emphasis Supported for SSML SAPI Apple Manipulates the strength of emphasis using a combination of pitch and timing changes loudness and other acoustic features The value can be one of normal none reduced moderate and strong Using none prevents the synthesize
57. book is compiled Jutoh will generate a SMIL file and add the timings by matching timing labels to identifiers in the document Timing sets Sample v Add Edit Delete Reimport Timings Timings Label Start End bookmark4 0 00 23 901 0 00 27 860 bookmark1 0 00 29 185 0 00 29 503 bookmark2 0 00 29 503 0 00 29 643 bookmark3 0 00 29 689 0 00 30 483 The media page of the Book Section properties dialog When you add a timing set by clicking on Add next to the drop down list of timing sets you can specify the Audacity label track file name and the associated audio resource within the Jutoh project that you have added or will add to the project Jutoh will import the timings when you create the timing set and also if you edit the timing set You 171 can click the Reimport Timings button to reimport the label files for all the timing sets in the document Currently you can t do this per project only per section document Step 5 Specify a character style for highlighting narrated content Edit your project properties and in the Accessibility page click on the Speech tab In the field for Character style for narration highlighting specify a character style that will be used to highlight the text that is currently being narrated You can leave this blank to use the ereader default Step 6 Compile the book When the ebook is compiled Jutoh will create a SMIL file for each document that reflects both
58. change the encoding of the original file you can specify it in the Import Options section of the New Project Wizard or the Options page of Project Properties if you re importing a file after initial project creation Also if you are importing HTML or Epub and the encoding is missing from one or 227 more HTML files Jutoh will use this setting it will also warn you about the missing encoding so you can go back and specify it For example if the file was created on Windows without specifying UTF 8 you could try the value Windows Western European Guide types Each document in a book can have a guide type which is written to the guide section of the Epub or Mobipocket file and indicates the role of the document You can set the guide type by right clicking on the document in the outline selecting Properties to show the Document Properties dialog and then changing the Guide type selection These are the possible guide types e acknowledgements e bibliography e colophon copyright page e cover e dedication e epigraph e epilogue e foreword e glossary e index e loi list of illustrations e lot list of tables e notes e other back cover e other intro e other ms firstpage the place to start reading Kindle only deprecated in favour of text e other reader start page the place to start reading iBooks only e preface e start the place to start reading Kindle only deprecated in favour of text
59. clarify pronunciations or expand abbrevations Note that different speech engines and voices will pronounce words differently just to make life more interesting If you need to support different phonetic alphabets you can specify multiple alphabets and phonemes for each entry in your lexicon and then select the alphabets that will be used for the current speech profile via the Lexicon alphabets profile property You can also specify pronunciations where difficult words occur by marking up content with Alias and Phoneme properties as described above Specify which lexicons will be used in your speech profile using tags in the lexicon documents and in the speech profile Jutoh will generate the required lexicons as PLS files or if you check nline pronunciations Jutoh will use the lexicons to replace text before the speech is generated so that separate lexicon files are not required Please note that for text to speech currently Jutoh only supports inline pronunciations and does not load generated lexicon files By default all lexicons will be used Let s expand on the ability to specify which lexicons to use for a given configuration For example say you have a lexicon you wish to use in the configuration Verbose MP3 but not in the configuration MP3 Verbose MP3 will expand abbreviations Select your Verbose MP3 configuration and create a new speech profile using the Speech palette called Verbose Speech Profile
60. conditional text within a paragraph You can read more about it in the topic Using styles to change ebook content in Chapter 12 Managing multiple configurations You can have as many configurations as you like even with the same format specified However you 222 will probably want to change the Book file name configuration option to ensure that your ebook file names are unique and don t overwrite each other So you might set the values FILENAME GooglePlay FILENAME Lulu and so on FILENAME will be replaced with the project filename and the correct extension will be appended Summary This chapter has shown you how to make your ebook content adapt to the criteria specified in your configurations The next chapter is a rag bag of advanced topics such as font embedding and setting a background image 223 Chapter 24 Advanced Topics gt IO This chapter describes a variety of advanced topics that the newcomer to Jutoh can most likely ignore Embedding fonts Jutoh lets you embed fonts into Epub books You might wish to do this to ensure that non Western characters are rendered correctly especially for viewing in Adobe Digital Editions which fails to render non European languages without embedding or you may just wish to give your ebook a different look However embedded fonts are not supported by all ebook readers and there may be copyright issues so you should only embed fonts if absolutely necessary An example o
61. dimensions are scaled relative to the overall page size Embedding fonts It s highly likely that if you include text boxes in your project you will want to embed a font in order to maintain the look of your project Embedding fonts is covered in the Advanced Topics chapter but as a quick reminder e Check the configuration options Embed fonts Generate font names Generate generic font names e Add Embedded Font Documents in your project If there are several font files per family for example for italic and bold variants make sure the font name in each font document is the same and adjust the style and weight settings to suitable values The ereader will use this information to render the correct font according to the text formatting If you can add the fonts to your system do so and make sure the font name in your Font Documents match those in the document If for some reason they don t match use the Font substitutions configuration option to map the font names in your project to the names used in your embedded fonts Embedded fonts are supported by all systems that support fixed layout books notably iBooks KF8 and Epub 3 If you don t wish to embed fonts consider pre rendering text objects see the above topic Table of contents If you have a table of contents it will need to be created as a fixed layout document with one or more text boxes manually linked to the other pages in the usual way Don t forget to
62. dimensions refer to the overall box size In HTML they refer to the content part only so when generating HTML Jutoh calculates the content size by subtracting other dimensions if an explicit size has been provided When ebook software calculates the size of an object the object maximum width and or height will be taken into account if set Similarly the minimum width and or height may be taken into account 293 although minimum size is not currently used for layout within the Jutoh editor The ebook layout algorithm may choose to ignore or adjust sizes where necessary so you may see slightly different results on different devices Note that Kindle KF8 currently ignores maximum size 294 Appendix D The Bibliographic Formatting Language gt 9C SN This topic describes the XML based language that Jutoh uses to format bibliographic items Introduction There are many standards for formatting bibliography and reference sections and organisations and publishers may dictate their own house style In addition bibliographic references have differing fields according to the type of reference and formatting must also cope with missing field values and other quirks So a built in style or a simplistic template created by a point and click user interface cannot suffice Instead bibliography formatting in Jutoh is specified using an XML based language called Xi XML Interpreter This simple language is totally dedicated to Jutoh bibl
63. fields rather than expanding citations into text Smashwords ODT requires this to be switched off Special cross reference formatting check to output special cross reference fields rather than expanding cross references into text Smashwords ODT requires this to be switched off Use outline levels check to output outline levels if specified in your heading styles Currently applies to ODT output only where checking this option allows a table of contents to appear in PDF files generated by OpenOffice org Writer or LibreOffice Writer Use page styles check to output page styles if defined ODT only Chapter Separators This category controls the output of textual separators between sections By default there are no separators e Add chapter separators check to output an extra paragraph at the end of each chapter to visually separate one chapter from the next Chapter separator text the text to add at the end of a chapter Chapter separator style the paragraph style of the text to add at the end of a chapter Fonts and Colour This category contains options related to font handling e Embed fonts check to embed any fonts listed under Resources Font substitutions semicolon separated font substitutions for example Times New Roman Deja Vu Serif Times New Roman Arial Deja Vu Sans This allows you to use embedded fonts in place of the font specified in your book and you can use a list of comma separated names
64. find some useful tips in these pages Happy authoring xii Julian Smart October 2015 About the author Dr Julian Smart is technical director of Edinburgh based Anthemion Software He is the founder of the wxWidgets project a popular construction kit for applications that run on a variety of computer platforms Julian is the creator of Jutoh and with his novelist wife Harriet Smart the Writer s Caf toolkit for writers as well as the DialogBlocks and HelpBlocks tools for programmers How this book is structured In Chapter 1 Introduction to Ebooks and Jutoh we start off with a gentle amble around the concept of the ebook and how Jutoh relates to it You ll get an overview of the steps involved in overall ebook creation with reference to those steps that Jutoh helps with In Chapter 2 Getting Started we run through a simple example of creating a project and compiling an ebook We ll keep it very brief so you can see that Jutoh makes the simple things simple to achieve In Chapter 3 The Jutoh User Interface we ll take a look at the main elements of the Jutoh window so youll know your way around We also look at how you can customise the interface for example defining new keyboard shortcuts and a favourites menu In Chapter 4 Working With Projects we describe what a project consists of how to add documents to a project and other aspects of controlling your Jutoh project In Chapter 5 Importing Files we describ
65. flow of the document bookmark Inserts a named bookmark button A button Canvas nvas for drawing graphics using dfn Defines an important term div Sets properties for a potentially large y Q 4 gt The Object Palette You can type in the Search field to find a tag object and press return to insert the selected object into the editor Or just double click on an object or right click control click on Mac and choose Insert Insert Start Tag or Insert End Tag Anatomy of a tag object A tag object consists of a tag name a set of attributes and a set of CSS like advanced properties that are not dealt with via formatting dialogs Like other objects paragraphs and text fragments a tag object can have an identifier Epub type and custom attributes amongst others CSS properties such as Voice family are output inline to the style attribute or you can define regular and advanced properties in a Jutoh style so that they are defined in a CSS style instead of inline Currently only a few extra CSS properties are listed in the Advanced tab These will be added in future releases but meanwhile you can use Custom properties to add arbitrary CSS properties Be aware though that Jutoh will not know which Epub version these custom properties are valid for so will output them to both Epub 2 and Epub 3 files unless the tag object itself is valid for Epub 3 only Code generation Tag objects will only have an effect on the
66. for fallbacks This only works for XHTML based formats and not on all ebook platforms 88 Generate font names clear this to use the reader default font name If checked enables the specified fonts in iBooks specified fonts option in com apple ibooks display options xml e Generate generic font names clear this to avoid generating generic font names for HTML based formats The generic names are serif sans serif cursive fantasy monospace If you disable both this and Generate font names no font family attribute will be written to the CSS e Generate colour clear this to avoid generating any colour style information Mobile This category contains options for tailoring the way HTML pages are displayed in mobile devices e Enable viewport enables viewport meta tag for mobile browsing HTML and Epub formats only e Viewport content the content of the viewport meta tag for mobile browsing HTML and Epub formats only The default value is initial scale 1 0 maximum scale 1 0 user scalable no width device width which keeps the formatting appropriate to the width of the device Fixed Layout This category contains options relating to fixed layout ebooks Currently fixed layout books are supported on iBooks Kindle and Epub 3 For more information see Chapter 18 Creating Fixed Layout Books Enable fixed layout this should always be enabled for fixed layout books Allow reflowable and fixed layout check this i
67. generated book if 165 1 The format is HTML based such as HTML Epub and Mobipocket and 2 the tag and its properties and attributes are compatible with current settings in particular the Epub version setting So unless you use custom attributes and properties that are not checked by Jutoh you don t have to worry about Jutoh generating inappropriate code even if the document is optimized for Epub 3 using HTMLS tags If you use tag objects it is easier to make mistakes than when using straightforward editing and formatting functionality So be sure to use Jutoh s Check functionality to invoke EpubCheck and confirm that the HTML Epub is valid Custom tag objects You can create custom tag objects per project that appear in the object palette and which are aliases for other tag objects potentially with different default attributes and properties For example you might prefer to mark text with a female tag that has a preset Voice family property rather than create a span tag and manually set Voice family to young female To do this right click over a tag object and choose Make Custom Tag from the popup menu If this command is not available it means that the chosen object is not a tag object Say we wanted to create a new tag female with which we will mark up certain content to be spoken in a female voice Customise the span tag enter the name female click on OK and then in the Advanced t
68. generation method for drawing objects where not specified for the drawing object One of inline img object and embed Strip MathML namespace prefixes check to remove namespace prefixes from MathML since some renderers have trouble with them MathJax script specify a MathJax script to include if targeting a renderer that does not implement native MathML support 87 Advanced Formatting This category contains options for controlling the way special formatting is output whether to use special fields for the word processor to use or by generating the content explicitly e Special index formatting check to output index entries as special items if supported by the target format If this option is cleared links and an index page will be output explicitly Smashwords ODT requires this to be switched off Special footnote formatting check to output footnotes and endnotes as special items if supported by the target format If this option is cleared linked footnotes or endnotes will be output explicitly Smashwords ODT requires this to be switched off Special table of contents formatting check to replace the document marked with the toc guide type with a special tableofcontents field in ODT export This will ensure that the ODT table of contents has page numbers and not just links Smashwords ODT requires this to be switched off Special bibliography formatting check to output special citation
69. gov marc relators relaterm html Date Specify the date in the format YY Y Y MM DD or YY Y Y MM or just Y Y YY ISO 8601 standard If not specified the date of generation will be used You can add an optional opf event attribute which can be one of creation publication and modification Contributors You can have zero or more contributors By default Jutoh lists itself as a contributor You can switch this behaviour off in your configurations For descriptions of attributes that give more information about the type of contributor see www loc gov marc relators relaterm html Publisher An optional field with the publisher s name Web site 66 An optional field this doesn t have a direct equivalent in Epub metadata and uses a relation element since the web site is notionally a related publication Subject The subject of the book If this is not specified General Fiction is used There is no standard list of possible subjects though your publisher might have some guidance Description A description of the book Rights An optional statement of the book rights Type The optional book category as defined by a particular publisher Source Optional information about a resource from which the book was derived Coverage An optional description of the extent or scope of the book s coverage Format An optional book media type such as a MIME media type Relation An
70. heading Jutoh can insert section tags based on a mapping from headings that you can edit in the Accessibility page of Project Properties 3 Navigation document The navigation document is a compulsory part of an Epub 3 file containing a table of contents and landmarks section Jutoh generates this automatically from the navigation map and document guide types 4 Speech and narration support Epub 3 defines properties such as epub voice family Voice family in Jutoh to allow passages of text to use a distinct voice Some of these are supported via the advanced properties tab in style definitions paragraphs text spans and objects In order to apply these and other properties to spans or blocks of content Jutoh supports the insertion of tag objects via the Object Palette In addition Jutoh can generate a SMIL file for each section document without media or timings so that TTS systems can help the blind user navigate the content Jutoh supports the synchronisation of speech with the content either by provision of existing SMIL files or by importing Audacity label files which are matched against identifiers in the content to produce a SMIL file with timings 5 Phrase tags You can insert phrase tags such as em and strong as objects around text or you can get Jutoh to automatically insert the tags based on character styles that you use in your document Again this is achieved using the style mapping edited
71. hyphen Jutoh will generate HTML with a regular hyphen and a span that prevents breaking to be compatible with more Epub viewers This is unnecessary for Mobipocket Some Epub viewers do not support a non breaking horizontal bar which is essential punctuation for Spanish So if you are writing Spanish you may wish to enable the configuration option Convert horizontal bar to em dash This converts the horizontal bar Unicode 8213 to an em dash Unicode 8212 and adds a non breaking span For the non breaking behaviour to work the bar and non space character to the left or right of the bar must be formatted in the same or no character style Note that when we talk about conversion we are referring to the final generation of the ebook from the Jutoh content not file import So you can retain the horizontal bar in your Jutoh content and decide at any time whether or not to have it appear as an em dash in your book without any permanent replacement of the original symbol You can also set the configuration option Styles suppressing hyphenation This is a pattern matching all styles that should suppress hyphenation the default value is Heading thus suppressing hyphenation for all headings You can separate multiple patterns with the pipe character 48 Horizontal rules To add a horizontal rule for example to indicate a division between scenes within a narrative use Format Insert Horizontal Rule Shift Ctrl B You wil
72. if you have multiple images or other content in a paragraph Inserting SVG pictures The SVG format is used for scalable vector graphics and in some cases can provide better quality than bitmaps Not all ebook software and hardware support SVG but it s an increasingly popular format There are three ways of getting SVG pictures into your ebooks 1 Add a media document to your project containing an SVG image Insert a reference to the media object with Format Insert Media Object Choose the image you previously added as 101 CHAPTER 10 WORKING WITH PICTURES a media document A placeholder icon is added and you can click on it to change the properties Or 2 Add a media document to your project containing an SVG image Insert a regular image PNG JPEG that duplicates the look of the SVG image In the image properties type the name of the SVG image in the field SVG alternative such as media mypicture svg Now check the configuration property Use SVG images to write SVG images instead of bitmaps You may need to specify the image width and height in image properties for the SVG to be displayed correctly Or 3 For more flexibility add a drawing object which maintains up to three formats bitmap SVG and MathML You can paste drawing objects from other applications that support SVG or MathML and they are created on import if SVG or MathML is present in the original file For more details see the topic Working with drawing ob
73. in one section Why is it important to divide your book into sections 8 Split by style Heading 1 Split by pattern CHAPTER Split at page breaks This style was used 5 times in the document Preview Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Remove unused styles from the style sheet Imported styles override default Jutoh styles _ Discard imported styles and apply Jutoh styles New Project Discard empty paragraphs lt Back Next gt Cancel Step 6 splitting the document Step 7 in the final page you can choose a cover design either one of Jutoh s templates or an existing image file Click on Templates to see the selection of designs available or click Design to edit the design using the cover designer see Chapter 8 Creating Your Cover Design You can of course 35 change your mind about the cover design at any time after you ve created your project so it doesn t matter too much what you choose in this page Cover Design Choose whether to use an existing file or create a new design for your e book cover You can edit your design further at any time O Use an existing file 6 Create a new design Lena Choose from existing templates Text will be added by Felix Carswell automatically Design Edit your design in more detail adding text and images Now press Finish to create the project and press Compile to make the book Help lt Back m Cancel
74. including comments in the compiled book Use wildcards to match against text author and tags Separate alternate values with commas Examples include all notes none include no notes author JS match author JS author JS AB tags todo match where the author is JS or AB and the todo tag is present Comment style the character style to be used for comments Comment content style the character style to be used for marked up content referenced by comments Special comment formatting check to output comments in the native format where supported currently ODT only If this option is cleared comments will be output as for other formats interspered with the text and subject to the Comments to include option General These are the remaining options Notes a place to write notes about this configuration which will be displayed when you click 92 on the configuration e Use as preview configuration if checked this configuration will be used to generate the HTML for Section Preview regardless of the configuration currently selected Summary We ve looked at configurations in some depth and you should now know where to look when you wish to change the way Jutoh generates a particular ebook Next we go into the details of inserting sizing and converting the pictures in your book 93 Chapter 10 Working With Pictures SIC In addition to text Jutoh supports pictures also referred to as images within the Jutoh
75. installed in the desktop environment s menu or by ruming jutoh2 from a terminal 270 You can uninstall Jutoh by running uninstalljutohx yz if you used the tarball installation or dpkg r jutoh2 for the Debian installation or rpm e jutoh2 for the RPM installation If you need to invoke Jutoh directly without using the launcher script either launch them from the appropriate application directory or set the environment variable JUTOHDIR to the respective application directory On rare occasions Jutoh may crash on startup if there is a conflict with the current KDE or Gnome desktop theme Changing the theme should make the problem go away Kindlegen You will need to download and install Amazon s Kindlegen if you wish to create Mobipocket Kindle files In the Jutoh Preferences dialog under Helpers or in the Setup Wizard click on Help Me Install Kindlegen Then as per the instructions for Windows above click on Download and Install to get Jutoh to perform the whole process automatically To install Kindlegen manually download it from www amazon com kindlepublishing at the time of writing it is bundled as a gzipped tar file which you can unarchive to any suitable folder such as Kindlegen For example mkdir Kindlegen cd Kindlegen tar xvfz Downloads kindlegen linux 2 6 1386 v1 2 tar gz Then set the path of the kindlegen program in Jutoh s Preferences dialog under Helpers For example the path might be h
76. is barely scratching the surface of what you can do Often these things don t cost money but they do cost time and imagination Think laterally and be creative Allow time to do the job properly and don t be discouraged if it takes time Overnight best sellers are black swans exceptional events But there is a lot you can do to help your beloved book along the way Further tips Since ebooks don t always have a page count that will be displayed alongside your book description you might like to include one in your description so that people know they will be getting value for money Use the book word count in the Document Properties dialog and divide by a reasonable word per page figure say 600 To avoid separating your book from the description s you write you can store your book description and perhaps a publicity plan in a text document under the Scraps folder in your project This information won t be included in your book You should consider getting an ISBN number for your book this is necessary if you want to get on the premium Smashwords catalogue for example You can buy a block of ISBNs yourself or obtain some from Smashwords or other book distribution site Consider getting a small number of your books printed using low cost print on demand and perhaps a service that will undertake cover design as well as organising printing You can then use it as a sales tool sending them to journalists and bloggers
77. is checked if your book contains large images If you have specified absolute sizes for images in centimetres quite likely after importing from a word processor file you may find the images are too large for small ereader displays or they are not in the proportion originally intended relative to the display width It can be better to use percentages and you can apply this to all images and boxes and table objects too when exporting ebooks by checking the Replace absolute widths configuration option Jutoh will use the paper size and left and right margins defined in the configuration or the parent object s width if it s an absolute value to calculate a percentage width for a given object width If your PNG images contain alpha transparency by default Jutoh will flatten them that is remove the transparency and give the images a white background You can suppress this by clearing the Flatten images configuration option If you do not flatten images they may end up as black boxes in your ebook Note that GIF images cannot be flattened unless converting to JPEG If you find your images look a little blurry particularly if you re using images for symbols or equations switch conversion to JPEG off in your configuration s or use GIFs and set Convert images to JPEG to All except GIF Or you can leave JPEG conversion on but for selected images such as symbols and diagrams check the Preserve original format option in e
78. it contains embedded citations Jutoh will import them as special citation objects You can then click on these objects and edit the individual fields By default if you import a document with a bibliography Jutoh will use the imported citation and bibliography text without any special processing The imported citation text such as Smart 2005 will be imported into the Custom citation field for each citation object and will be output as is The bibliography section will also be imported and compiled as is This allows you to reproduce as exactly as possible the imported document Alternatively you can use Jutoh s facilities to format citations and also replace the bibliography section Let s look at this in more detail Creating citations and a bibliography You can create a new citation by using the command Format Insert Links Citation or by double clicking on the bibliographical reference object in the Objects palette You will then see the Insert Citation dialog 121 CHAPTER 11 WORKING WITH INDEXES Create a new citation or use an existing one 8 New citation O From a database of entries Internal Database Entries Short name HESSO2 ANTH2000 JACSO1 SMART2015 Fre13 WOLF2001 The Insert Citation dialog You can choose to create a brand new entry for the citation or browse the existing databases and items already in the project if any When you press OK you will be shown a property ed
79. lt p class P TOC Entry i gt lt a href section Chapter 21 Advanced Topics lt a gt lt p gt contents_12 gt How the style contents _13 gt Using speech in contents _15 gt Further reading contents 16 gt Summary lt a gt lt p gt 0025 html advancedtopics gt lt p class P TOC Entry 2 gt lt a href section 0025 htmlfembedding fonts gt ai Q Search section 0019 html search GoTo Line 254 Tidy xM Tips agment identifier is not def bookmark table of contents 14 fragment identifier The bookmark was not found or EpubCheck stopped parsing the file containing the bookmark producing a spurious missing identifier message For example a duplicate identifier within the came XHTMI fila can cause aute The Jutoh Book Viewer This is a separate window but still part of the Jutoh application that displays the hierarchy of files inside your Epub with a viewer for the XHTML and other files The errors and tips are displayed at the bottom and by clicking on each error you can see the context of the problem and the relevant tip Incidentally you don t have to have errors in your book to examine your Epub file At any time so long as the Epub file exists you can use the Book Examine menu command F6 to browse the Epub file You can also use the File Examine Epub command to examine an arbitrary Epub file that s on your disk even if it wasn t created by Jutoh
80. magnification panels for text and images What is a fixed layout book This is a book with a fixed number of pages whose content doesn t reflow It s a format suited to magazines children s picture books comics coffee table books amongst others In contrast most novels biographies and other books with mostly text content should usually not be fixed layout books Much of the content will be pre rendered in bitmap images but text should if possible be specified as actual text rendered by the ebook reader and not as images to increase quality and reduce file size In some cases fixed layout books will be interactive via the provision of custom JavaScript code and dynamic content modification Reflowable books can easily match the different orientation of ebook readers with little or no effort on the book author s part but a few more choices must be made by the author in the case of fixed layout books Here are some of the questions to be answered e What will my page size be Should I create individual left and right pages or single double page spreads e Will the user be able to change the device orientation to read in either portrait or landscape or will the book be fixed to either portrait or landscape e Can my separate left and right pages be joined together synthesized to form a seamless double page spread Some of these questions must be answered before work starts for example page size but others c
81. maximum image size style sheet to use cover design to use and so on Initially Jutoh has one configuration per format however you can create as many configurations as you wish For example you might have a general Epub configuration and also an iBooks Epub configuration which contains iBooks specific copyright information and cover design Context menu A menu that is shown by right clicking over a window Windows and Linux or control clicking on the Mac A context menu can also be shown by pressing the context key if available on your keyboard Notable context menus are those associated with the project outline the content editor and the formatting palette Dialog A dialog is a window that appears after invoking a particular command for example the Project Properties dialog or the Preferences dialog Most but not all dialogs have to be dismissed before you can work with your project Document A Jutoh project is comprised of documents mostly you will be working with book section documents perhaps one per chapter one for the title page another for acknowledgements and so on There are other kinds of document such as the embedded font document text document image document URL document and more but most users will only create book section documents If you have imported an existing file Jutoh may have created all the documents you need Otherwise you can add more with the Documents toolbar button or
82. may be wrong To avoid this edit the bookmark and rename it to something without the auto prefix Jutoh will now use this bookmark instead of an automatic bookmark next time it regenerates the table of contents Missing or displaced cover If the cover for your Epub appears as an icon but not within the book consider clearing the configuration option Exclude cover from reading order The option suppresses the cover from appearing within the book content to avoid the cover appearing twice but on some platforms you may wish the cover to appear first instead of the title page Note that Calibre has an unusual interpretation of exclusion from reading order and shows such sections at the end of the book again clearing the Exclude cover from reading order option will prevent this from happening If your cover is still missing it may be that the Cover design configuration option is not set to the correct cover design name Missing Table of Contents See whether the configuration property Use guide is checked in your configuration if it s not checked some of the Goto commands in a Kindle book won t work Section too long Jutoh may complain about a section being more than 300Kb in length this means that some Epub readers will fail to display the book correctly because they can t cope with large sections You will need to break this section up perhaps by creating a hierarchy of subsections under one chapter Unresolved URL Jutoh c
83. meat of a drama is a question Will the prince be able to save the princess Will the heroine be able to overcome the obstacles and find the man of her dreams Make sure you draw attention to the sexiest shiniest parts of your novel the glamorous setting the dreadful things at stake or the potential for deep emotional involvement Non fiction descriptions are a little more utilitarian but they are still in the business of making an offer the reader can t refuse They emphasise the authority of the writer and the unique angle that the book offers on a topic that is of general importance and interest Notice how words like offers or reveals are used to suggest that the book is treasure chest of useful and and authentic information One way to look at such descriptions is to imagine them as a slice from the beautiful cake that is your book You are not telling them all the ingredients or how you laboured to mix them up but merely presenting the overall effect You want them to eat the whole cake of course so give them a slice that makes them hungry for more in no more than 200 words Step 2 Be able to talk confidently about it Writing your book description and studying other book descriptions is a very good way to see what it is that makes people interested in books what excites them You will have a much clearer idea of what your book is and who might be interested and indeed what is special about your book The next thing to do i
84. mind in case the Style sheet property is changed accidentally When you re starting a project think about what styles you re likely to need and if necessary create them A bit of foresight here will save you time later compared with simply applying ad hoc styles Using the formatting palette to apply styles The formatting palette provides a convenient way to understand apply and modify the styles in your project The palette shows a list of styles to the right of your document similar to the Styles and Formatting pane in Microsoft Word In this picture below the Heading 1 style is being shown and there s a description of the details of the style at the bottom 53 7 Next Documents ig Content oks one of its major re creating the m how to edit and 3ks in general are page a table of ctions rather than reason for this is ory simply can t n when loading and is easy to compile a though Jutoh can ection properties contents or other aside one huge e and edit a book er 6 Editing and Form gt ay v LEME Home Options Help Palette x A Tools Styles Objects Inspector Favourites v a H Edit Style Heading 1 H Clear Formatting New gt x Describe Style Manage Styles Help Index Entry 2 Index Entry 3 Index Group Heading Index Heading Item Body Item Y Heading 4 paragraph style Based kon Horna ed Space DORE 60 Space
85. mouse along the menu bar and explore these commands as you hover over a command a summary will be displayed in the status bar at the 17 bottom of the window Under the menu bar the toolbar contains a selection of these commands for convenience You can change the commands on this toolbar by by right clicking on it and selecting Customise or selecting View Customise Toolbars These are the buttons available by default New creates a new project showing the New Project Wizard for importing content or creating an empty project 2 Open opens an existing project Save saves any changes in the current project Edit edits the Project Properties including metadata styles covers and configurations We ll come to this later N Cover edits the ebook cover design O 3 Compile compiles the ebook using the currently selected configuration Y Check checks an Epub using EpubCheck listing any errors it finds in the ebook b Launch launches the ebook in the application that your operating system associates with it or a custom application that you define see Appendix B Configuring Jutoh Q Previous goes to the previous document in your book O Next goes to the next document in your book R Documents shows a menu of document types to add to the project Normally you ll just add Book Section documents for example for each chapter and the title page A Home goes to the Jutoh desktop containing shortcuts to various f
86. openoffice org It s useful for converting Word and other word processor files to DOCX or ODT for import into Jutoh If you plan to create ODT files with Jutoh as well you can use OpenOffice org to convert your books to PDF Word and other files And of course you may grow to enjoy it as a regular word processor instead of using one that costs a lot of money Summary We have learned a little about ebook formats what Jutoh is the steps involved in getting a book to the point of distribution what files Jutoh can import and what other tools can be used alongside Jutoh Next we dive into an example of creating a project and creating an ebook Chapter 2 Getting Started gt ONT In this chapter we ll demonstrate how easy it is to go from an existing file to a new Jutoh project and a generated ebook We ll assume that you ve installed Jutoh see Appendix A Installing Jutoh for details Creating a new project In this tutorial we ll be importing an ODT file called Lena odt you can substitute it with your own file Jutoh will accept OpenDocument ODT Word DOCX HTML text and Epub files DOCX and ODT are recommended for best results If you want to create a project from scratch instead just choose From scratch in Step 5 below Run Jutoh and click the New button on the toolbar or type Ctrl N or click on File New Project You will be shown a wizard that will take you through file import Here are the steps fo
87. or no money in my bookmark1 Call me Ishmael Some years ago never mind how long precisely having little or no money in my bookmark2 me Ishmael Some years ago never mind how long precisely having little or no money in my purse bookmark3 Ishmael Some years ago never mind how long precisely having little or no money in my purse and n bookmarks Same veare ann never mind how Inna ES Q Search 4 gt Marked up content and the Inspector showing bookmarks Step 2 Add your narration audio files to Jutoh For each audio file you can have several per document if you wish create a media document from the Documents toolbar button and specify the audio file Typically the file will be in MP4 format Note that if the audio file changes you will need to import the file again Jutoh doesn t automatically use the changed file An example media document within Jutoh is shown below 168 mobydick_001_002_melville Media File V Embed File name media mobydick_001_002_melville mp4 Import File Media type audio mp4 se Export File Tags Help Description 4 E mobydick_001_002_melville X E An audio file as a media document in Jutoh Step 3 Create a label file Audacity is a widely used audio editor program available for Windows Linux and Mac Fun fact Audacity uses the wxWidgets GUI library also used for Jutoh wxWidgets was created by Jutoh s author Audacity is recom
88. or in If custom width and height are both specified the values will override the Paper size selection Custom paper height the custom paper height for ODT output only Specify mm the default cm or in If custom width and height are both specified the values will override the Paper size selection Mirror margins check to mirror page margins for example when creating a gutter for print on demand For ODT output only Dots per inch the assumed number of dots per inch for images used if no absolute dimensions are specified For ODT output only The default is 96 Add blank paragraphs for Word if checked Jutoh will add blank paragraphs before page breaks for Microsoft Word compatibility Without it justification is poor before page breaks For ODT output only Images and Media This category contains options allowing you to control various aspects of image picture output For more about images see Chapter 10 Working With Pictures e Maximum image width the maximum image width to use in your book Specify 1 for no scaling Note that this physically scales the image before it is written to the ebook rather than simply setting the max width CSS property In contrast Limit images to viewer size sets the max width and max height properties so scaling is done dynamically Maximum image height the maximum image height to use in your book Specify 1 for no scaling As with Maximum image width this physically scales the image
89. out the device name and mount point the first two entries in this file insert your drive and when automounted type mount in a terminal window You should see an entry for the external drive The exec option causes all files on the drive to be seen as executable and auto causes the drive to be mounted automatically when the device is inserted Launching Jutoh on Mac On Mac there is no alias so you need to navigate to the Applications Jutoh Mac Jutoh x yz folder and launch it from there 273 Appendix B Configuring Jutoh IO There are many ways to configure Jutoh to suit your use of it whether it s telling Jutoh how to launch helper applications or changing behaviour such as automatically checking Epub files after creation We ll describe the most important configuration options here and you can find more by exploring the pages of the Preferences dialog Viewer applications A viewer application is simply third party software that can display an ebook file that Jutoh creates Examples include Adobe Digital Editions Kindle for PC and Kindle Previewer If an application knows how to open a file that s passed to it then Jutoh can run the application passing it the ebook file name and the file will be shown in the helper application You can set Jutoh up to know about as many viewer applications per file type such as Epub as you like If you do this Jutoh will show you a menu of available applications when you click o
90. probably stick with one style sheet If your document appearance isn t as you wish instead of editing the formatting within the editor first try editing the style sheet since this will affect the whole document if named styles have been applied consistently For example suppose that the first paragraph in each section uses the style Body Text which is not indented You may wish the first paragraph of each section to be indented so you could either change the style for each such paragraph or you could adjust the definition for Body Text to match the indentation of Body Text First Indent For Epub and Mobipocket formats Jutoh generates a Cascading Style Sheet CSS that contains equivalent definitions for the Jutoh style sheets Kinds of style Jutoh supports four kinds of named style e Paragraph style This kind of style applies to an individual paragraph and you can see available paragraph styles in the drop down control above the editor e Character style This kind of style changes the formatting for a span of text within a paragraph You can apply character styles using the context right click menu choosing Styles and then Character Styles There s no drop down control for character styles but to see the named style at the current text position you can use the Formatting Palette e List style This kind of style defines how list items are formatted at each depth the two list buttons on the formatting toolb
91. readers KF7 may also omit inter paragraph spacing if there is a left indent Lists in Mobipocket KF7 doesn t support list type specification so ordered lists can only have arabic numbering Also paragraph style specification will only work for the outer list level due to the paragraph tag not honouring paragraph margins To work around this Jutoh places the vertical margins before and after paragraph spacing on the list item tags for the first level only Specifying the margins for nested items would cause space to be accumulated after closing list item tags Mobipocket lists don t honour custom indentation specification so the defaults will be used Setting the start page By default the Kindle reader will choose a suitable page to associate with the Beginning menu item or button in the reader However you can change this by changing the document guide type to text To do this right click on a document in the project outline to show the Book Section Properties dialog Select text from the Guide type dropdown list You can also use the keyword STARTPAGE in which case Jutoh will substitute the value of the property Start page guide type in the current configuration This allows you to use a start page appropriate to the target device depending on configuration Press OK and compile the book again Indenting table of contents items You may find that the table of contents page isn t indenting items as you expect when v
92. same format is used You may also wish to tailor Jutoh s output for your own reasons Jutoh s configuration feature lets you change the way that ebooks are generated so that you can tweak the output for one format or ebook platform without affecting others You may not need to worry about configurations for a bit but once in a while you may come across the need to change configurations or even add new ones so it s worth at least scanning this chapter so you know where to look Configuration basics At first glance configuration seems like a fancy name for format In the Build tab of the Control Panel before compiling you select the appropriate configuration such as Epub or Mobipocket each of which is generally named after the format it targets However configurations are much more than that They contain a whole host of user editable options that will be used for that configuration and you can add as many configurations as you like So for example you might like to have two Epub configurations called Books Epub and Barnes amp Noble Epub with slightly different behaviour for each A configuration can specify which cover design or style sheet to use so you can have alternate versions of your book with different cover designs or formatting without having to maintain different versions of the book Or you could have different configurations for generating images with different sizes tailore
93. same indent or margin show different dimensions in the ebook If the font sizes of the paragraph styles differ because Jutoh uses relative units em to define margins the same margin or other size can show up differently in the Epub or Mobipocket Ems are relative to the paragraph style font even if overridden by a character style You can solve the problem by either applying a consistent paragraph style or styles with the same underlying font size or in your Epub configuration clearing the option Use relative dimensions and recompiling e Invisible text on a black background If text disappears when you select white on black in your ebook reader it means your text colour has been hard coded to black You can eliminate all of these occurrences using Document Cleanup see below Images are blurry If you need most images to be compressed JPEGs but you need some of them to be uncompressed to eliminate JPEG artefacts for example in line drawings or symbols then insert GIFs from files and change Convert images to JPEG to All except GIF Also blurriness can be caused by scaling up from a small image especially on a high resolution device such as an iPad You can improve matters by pasting a higher resolution image into Jutoh and specifying an absolute or percentage width in the image properties Jutoh has a way to help clean up project formatting documents it s the menu command Book Document Cleanup which will show you the fo
94. see the help Also you can use the F1 key to get help on the control that currently has the focus on Windows you will often see a little question mark icon at the top of a dialog You can click that and then on a control to see a tip explaining the purpose of the control 23 CHAPTER 3 THE JUTOH USER INTERFACE On the main window only you can use the Help Describe Window command and then click on a window to show a tip with explanation about the window with a link to click for more information Project properties dialog You ll be using this dialog a lot because it allows you to edit all sorts of project information including metadata the description of the book formatting styles the cover design and using configurations behaviour specific to each format that you wish to generate You can show this dialog using the Edit button on the toolbar or the View Project Properties menu command or the Alt Enter keyboard shortcut Contents Index Footnotes 8 Endnotes Table of Contents v X These entries are used if you are maintaining a Table of Contents page and NavMap yourself Normally Jutoh handles these itself To change between simple and advanced ToC mode run the wizard from here or using the Build Table of Contents command on the Book menu Entries ite Page Table of Contents From the Horse s Mouth Preface Bring on the revolution About the author How this book is structured C
95. separate areas of selection are not supported In addition to the toolbar buttons and menu commands you can use Ctrl C to copy text and Ctrl V to paste text To move text you can use CtrI X to cut and Ctrl V to paste Use Edit Paste Unformatted Text to strip formatting out of the text you are pasting useful if the original formatting is not applicable to the current context 43 Use Ctrl Z to undo an operation and Ctrl Y to redo it e Use the drop down style control on the editor toolbar to apply paragraph styles more on that later e Click on objects such as images to edit their properties or use the properties command such as Image Box or Table on the context right click menu Some editing commands are also available on the context menu which appears when you right click over the editor control click on a Mac You can change the size of the text for editing purposes not the actual book text size by clicking on the A tool on the toolbar and then selecting Larger or Smaller or you can go to the Appearance panel in the Preferences dialog and change the text size in Font for text documents In this panel you can also change the default text foreground and background colours and the maximum size of the editor window You can use the tools in the Formatting Palette for applying styling and inserting objects o Palette x A Tools Styles Objects Inspector Favourites Formatting a B zj ul Aj XX AB AB ab
96. space with Colour rs Restore Original Settings Fonts Font for text documents abcdeABCDE Colour _ Custom text editor foreground colour _ Custom text editor background colour C Custom panel colour Other Editor margin 20 2 pixels _ _ Keep edit ine centred The Appearance Preferences page Here you can set the maximum width of the editing window set the colour of the editor surrounding background set the text size for the editing this will not affect the generated ebook text size set the text editor text and background colours set the margins around the text editor to give you more breathing space opt to centre the text cursor vertically as you move around the text These settings are global so they apply to all styled text editors in Jutoh in all projects on this machine 288 APPENDIX B CONFIGURING JUTOH Desktop options The Jutoh desktop accessed via the Desktop tab near the bottom of the Jutoh window is a handy place to store third party tool shortcuts links to documents and sticky notes You might not use it all but if you do you can tailor various aspects about it from the Desktop page in the Preferences dialog Appearance Tools Desktop style Logo Default font abcdeABCDE Icon caption font abcdeABCDE Initial note size 200 E pixels wide by 200 Fe pixels hig
97. specify the document to use Switch between tables with the drop down list at the top of the Contents tab When you click on Run Table of Contents Wizard it will use the currently selected table If you haven t specified a document to use for the table one will be created which you can move to the desired place in the project later To edit properties of your table such as the title the range of pages and styles click on Edit How tables are output to OpenDocument In most formats tables are output as they appear in the Jutoh project For OpenDocument ODT output however Jutoh tries to output a special index that gathers items from the document dynamically This means that if you edit the ODT document updating the document fields ensures your indexes are updated as intended It also means that you get proper page numbers in the indexes in your ODT or exported PDF document and not just links Jutoh will look for the guide types toc table of contents loi list of illustrations and lot list of tables If it finds one of these it generates a table of contents field that refers to the relevant table and ignores the actual text in that document The table of contents field in turn generates the appropriate code in the ODT file You won t see this field since it s generated as an intermediate step If you are creating a custom index and therefore don t set a guide type the value of Table section ID will b
98. such as margins padding border and background colour You can edit these styles and add new ones using the Styles page in the Project Properties dialog or 51 you can use Format Edit Styles Style changes will be applied to any open documents as soon as you close the dialog Whatever the formatting you apply Jutoh must always be able to relate it to a named style So if you use ad hoc styling such as applying centred alignment using the toolbar Jutoh will create a new automatic style or find a suitable existing one for example Normal Centre Alignment These automatic styles are maintained with each book section document and you can t edit or delete them manually I cannot emphasize enough how important it is to use named styles not ad hoc styles or automatic styles wherever possible This will make it far easier to maintain a consistent format for your book since then when you need to change the presentation you may only need to change the named styles and not every relevant paragraph Also it makes it easier Jutoh to perform tasks such as table of contents creation because it can search for specific paragraph styles Having said that it s probably not worth maintaining and applying separate styles for occasional use of bold or italics When Jutoh creates a new project for you it creates a default style sheet with such styles as Body Text First Indent Heading 1 and TOC Entry 1 Some of these sty
99. symbols This can save you from a lot of tedious mousing and clicking especially when tidying up formatting in a long document Shortcuts Jutoh allows you to customise the keyboard shortcuts used for 1 applying commands that you can find in the menubar 2 applying named paragraph and character styles to the current paragraph or selection and 3 inserting symbols or text into the active editor 219 Jutoh defines two kinds of shorcut primary and secondary A primary shortcut is a shortcut that you type directly such as Ctrl O to open a project file Because primary shortcuts are in short supply you can also define secondary shortcuts that are prefixed with a primary shortcut Jutoh defines Ctrl Period to be the prefix for secondary shortcuts So for example if you defined the secondary style shortcut Ctrl 1 for Heading 1 you would type Ctrl Period Ctrl 1 to apply that style When you type the prefix shortcut Jutoh shows a little window called the Secondary Shortcut Window The Secondary Shortcut Window Now you can type a secondary shortcut and the window will disappear after the command is executed or you can click on Edit Shortcuts to customise shortcuts This will show the Shortcut Customisation dialog from which you can view existing shortcuts edit individual ones or reset all shortcuts to their default values 280 APPENDIX B CONFIGURING JUTOH Commands Styles i Es Character Styles Code Span
100. text to speech can be useful for creating accessible documents and for proof reading Spoken documents are preferred by the majority of blind people over the more time consuming Braille alternative Jutoh has facilities for marking up text to improve pronunciation insert pauses switch voices and more and it can use a variety of text to speech engines For how to create accesible Epub 3 files which have the potential for speech output see Chapter 21 Making Your Books Accessible The following will describe direct speech output using Jutoh rather than Epub 3 output although there is some overlap in features such as lexicons and some aspects of markup Do take a look at the sample project Patient Advice Speech Sample jutoh since it may help you understand concepts covered here How does Jutoh support text to speech If you edit Jutoh s preferences click Options in the toolbar and choose the Speech page there is a drop down list of speech engines that are supported by Jutoh These differ according to the operating system you are using 199 E General Speech preferences Appearance bo Highlighting 3 Desktop Projects Es Import Description Help This engine uses the Microsoft Speech API Spelling Privacy Capabilities SSML no pause yes highlighting yes Speech engine Speech engine web site Helpers Media Types Speech MP3 Voice Speed Strings Code Editor Device Profiles Voice va
101. the Styles page on the Project Properties dialog and click on Edit Properties at the top of the dialog Check Use custom CSS and paste in the CSS code Let s say we want to make the link colour red and remove underlining You can use the following code a link color red text decoration none a visited color red text decoration none a hover color red text decoration none a active color red text decoration none Alternatively if you want the colour to be the same as the surrounding text but keep underlining you could use a link color inherit text decoration underline a visited color inherit text decoration underline a hover color inherit text decoration underline a active color inherit text decoration underline To apply CSS to an individual section only right click over a section in the project outline select Properties and then check Extra CSS Paste in the above page and press OK You might notice that when you look at the HTML generated by Jutoh for links the style you applied 231 to the link has been removed This is because if the configuration property option URL attribute removal style has a style value the attributes in the style will be removed from the link before it is written to the HTML file This avoids clashes between the styles specified in the editor and defaults used by the ereader such clashes can make links look untidy especially if th
102. the most popular Bananas Unlike apples bananas are long bendy and squishy They have their own convenient wrapper utilising a zip like mechanism and all too soon they turn black For more on list styles see Chapter 12 Working With Style Sheets Adding keywords You can add keywords to your text and if the configuration property Replace strings in content is enabled keywords will be replaced by values in the compiled book Keywords can come from string tables that you create and also from your project metadata The following metadata keywords are predefined YA TITLE ID LANGUAGE AUTHOR CONTRIBUTORS PUBLISHER URL SUBJECT DESCRIPTION DATE RIGHTS COVERAGE TYPE YFORMAT SOURCE RELATION This can be a useful facility if you wish to provide different editions with only slightly differing content or to allow quick editing of text used throughout the book or to abbreviate a long piece of text such as an HTML fragment Keyword names are case sensitive and each keyword must be formatted with a single or no style You can read more about string tables in Chapter 13 Working With String Tables Editing document properties Although this isn t directly related to formatting it s important to know how to edit properties associated with each book section document To show the Book Section Properties dialog you can do any one of these 1 Right click or control click on Mac over the tit
103. the name optional description any custom CSS and a style to use as a template Note that the value of Copy from in this dialog will only be used to set up initial attributes for the new style and will not be the value of the base parent style in the new style Applying named styles There are various methods for applying named paragraph styles to text in your document e Select a paragraph and choose a style from the drop down style control in the editor toolbar e select a paragraph click Format Styles choose a style and click OK e right click or control click on Mac choose Styles in the context menu and click on a style name e use custom keyboard shortcuts and Favourites as explained in Appendix B Configuring Jutoh You can also apply named character styles to ranges of text e Select some text click Format Styles choose Character Styles choose a style and click OK e right click or control click on Mac choose Styles Character Styles in the context menu and click on a style name use custom keyboard shortcuts and Favourites as explained in Appendix B Configuring Jutoh 140 Note that when a character style is applied via the context menu it is merged with the attributes in the selected text forming a new automatic style see below unless there are no attributes in the selected text in which case the original character style name will be retained So if it s important that the specific character s
104. the other fonts You can also change or disable the table that Jutoh uses via the setting Preferences Advanced Font substitution table 55 If you re using Linux you can get the standard Microsoft fonts so that your project files are compatible when switching between operating systems On Ubuntu you can find the Restricted extras package in the Software Centre or use this command in a terminal window sudo apt get install ubuntu restricted extras Keep your main content apart from headings footnotes captions etc at 12pt this is the point size that Jutoh regards as the default size and which can therefore be left unspecified in the generated ebook The reader software and user will choose the best size Any font above or below 12pt will be sized relative to the default font using the HTML em unit The scaling factor to convert a point size in Jutoh to an em size in HTML can be adjusted in the Options panel in Project Properties should you wish to tweak the way text size is calculated Line and paragraph spacing Line spacing is the space between lines within a paragraph paragraph spacing comes in two parts spacing before a paragraph and spacing after a paragraph To edit spacing for a named style go to the Styles page in Project Properties Edit on the main toolbar Select a style click Edit and then click on Indents amp Spacing Paragraph spacing is specified in tenths of a millimetre which is conve
105. user interface Jutoh has a variety of methods to convert and resize pictures this chapter tells you all you need to know Inserting and editing pictures To show pictures in your book you can paste them into a page or choose Format Insert Picture Shift Ctrl C Inserting the picture will show a browser that displays thumbnails of all the pictures in a folder e des Graphics e E Camera Nikon 1 a Camera Panasonic The picture browser dialog If the inserted or pasted image width is larger than the one specified in Resize images to max in 94 Import Preferences the image will be resized before insertion into the project You can use these formats in Jutoh e PNG good for high quality artwork that should not be compressed PNGs tend to take up a bit more space than JPEGs sometimes a lot more space depending on how the image was saved e JPEG a lossy format good for keeping file size down and best for photographs Not so good for diagrams or images containing text since compression artefacts can be visible GIF an older format similar to PNG Jutoh cannot flatten this format remove transparency except by converting to JPEG TIFF a popular general purpose file format that usually produces larger files than JPEG By default Jutoh will convert non JPEG image files to JPEG when compiling an ebook see Image export to ebooks below for more details In the case of TIFF images you
106. will still use the found entries to create the NavMap To revert to simple mode again run the wizard and the entries will be deleted telling Jutoh to generate a basic contents page if specified If an explicit table of contents page is found in the project by searching for the title Table of Contents or by finding a document whose Guide Type is set to toc in its document properties then Jutoh will suppress the basic contents page to avoid duplication Note that if you are using basic contents creation the entries are formatted with TOC Entry 1 if available and the contents heading is formatted in TOC Heading if available Editing table of contents properties To edit the detailed properties of your table of contents when you re not using the table of contents wizard show the Project Properties dialog click on Indexes then click on Contents Now click on Edit on the top row of buttons and you will see the Table of Contents Properties dialog 113 CHAPTER 11 WORKING WITH INDEXES Table name Table of Contents Table type Table of contents Y Table section ID 1 Set Guide type toc v Table tite Table of Contents Table title style TOC Heading Link style URL Editing level 1 E Max heading level 1 5 3 m Style for formatting this level TOC Entry 1 Matching style for this level
107. word processor works customising shortcuts can help a bit there but Jutoh is a specialist ebook creation tool and inevitably it works slightly differently than other applications Your expectations background and the kind of book you will be creating with Jutoh can lead to quite different experiences with Jutoh but with a little use you should soon find it intuitive Third party troubleshooting tools We ve mentioned the Epub checker which will give you the assurance that you don t have syntax errors in your books For previewing your Epub and Mobipocket files you can download Adobe Digital Editions and Kindle for PC or Mac They will become the default viewers when you click on Launch in Jutoh If you re going to be creating Mobipocket books another essential tool in your armoury is Kindle Previewer which you can download for Windows and Mac from Amazon s site On Windows you can get Jutoh to download and install Previewer automatically using Jutoh s Setup Wizard available from the View menu Previewer shows your book in an emulator for Kindle devices and also for the Kindle app running on the iPhone and iPad There can be small differences in the display and navigation behaviour compared with Kindle for PC or Mac plus you get to see what your book will look like on a much smaller screen which might influence formatting decisions On Windows you can configure Kindle Previewer as a helper application see Appendix B Configuring J
108. you can change them in the Import and Style wizard page see Step 3 above If you have a number of text files one per chapter you can select the folder instead of a single file and you will be presented with the File Conversion Options page 39 CHAPTER 5 IMPORTING FILES File Conversion Options Choose whether to find text or HTML files in the location you previously specified You can import individual files later Please note that not all styling in HTML files will be preserved Add any plain text files found txt extension only Take title from first line of each file Import encoding Unicode 8 bit UTF 8 C Also find files in folders under the scanned folder recursively New Project Multiple file conversion options You can specify whether to take the title from the first line of each file and the file encoding You don t have to tell Jutoh how to split the content because it 11 simply create one section per found file HTML Jutoh can import from a single HTML file or a folder of several As with plain text import Jutoh will allocate a section per HTML file if importing from a folder if importing from a single file the same options will be presented as per DOCX or ODT import allowing you to specify a pattern to use for recognising individual sections As already mentioned HTML does not preserve all formatting because it can only do a basic job of converting CSS HTML styles to Ju
109. 313 e Added a subsection on automating heading numbering to the styles chapter e Added topics Using a regular reflowable project as a fixed layout book and Faking fixed layout using a reflowable project in the fixed layout chapter Updated the reference to fixed layout projects not being exportable to ODT since now this is possible e Added configuration options Upload book Device profiles Special cross reference formatting Permit links to absent content Version 2 6 January 31st 2014 e Added a description of the bibliography tools to Chapter 11 and added Appendix D on the bibliographic formatting language e Added the new configuration option Special bibliography formatting Version 2 5 December 24th 2014 e Added the new configuration option Omit box height and referenced it in the Working With Boxes chapter Added the new configuration Relaxed HTML e Added a note about the lack of portrait landscape adaptation in Kindle Version 2 4 October 3rd 2014 e Added new configuration options Add blank paragraphs for Word Show binding Include content matching tags Exclude content matching tags e Added new Chapter 21 Conditional Formatting and renamed the chapters following this Version 2 3 June 24th 2014 e Added new configuration options Drawing object formats SVG drawing method Strip MathML namespace prefixes MathJax script Use as preview configuration Version 2 2 May 26th 2014 e Added new configuration o
110. 9 Editing document properties cs ese id 59 IARAA TANAN YOU WOT KE css ees E dit 6l SA E E E E E A S 61 Chapter 7 Editing Your Book s Metadata ccscccsssscssssscssssccssscccscsecsscsecsscceecsssccccessesssscssseeeees 63 Th mi tadata Panel ccticcc sis as cet Cra ctaea coulc A Neck omiaec A nts 63 Metadata Clements A A lan 65 Viewing the generated mad A A Ar 67 Specifying metadata daa A A AS A A 68 o e e Lea bs o ds Aa e albo 68 Chapter 8 Creating Your Cover DesiOO cisnes ia 69 A Ee Pe Pe OTA OEE TY POT NE Pr Pe oa 69 Using Ai SX IS HD dis 70 Usinge the COVER CES TOMET ason sear a seth A e Ad 71 Object size and position BAe me ne ARC tne PT Ene Panne sella llo and 72 Objectibacksromida a ate T2 MCR EEE A E dieu ne alec taat 72 Exporting YOU din oido 12 Spe ifyimg a COVER TOR KING a A A AS A DA 73 THE COVER page versus the COVER Ma cis dl ill ita ets 13 Specifying ThE COVER image AO A A A 74 Using multiple Cover AE An ii taa 74 ita A A O 74 A AN 74 Chapter 9 Understanding Configurations c scccsssscssssscccsscsssscscssscsscescssssssscsssescsssssssssescossees 75 CONTCUPANON DasiO ia A A is 75 a e erae A SE RETRO WOE CEM OE Oe PER ra et ROP 75 Using config rationS i ay a AR ta sa a A ele ETR E RT A ER es ety lett ees 76 Configuration EEES it 78 E A E 78 A A calas eeedi a tan Sen dens ta teeta a Dati nck Dare Uh as ola ae DE ea deed Nt ale cele aes 79 LO fi aa Deis A E IN GIA DUES SN EN ATE Ra LAO 79 A duna
111. Append C Understanding Ebook Formats Kindle Previewer showing the NCX View NavMap When creating an Epub file Jutoh always creates a NavMap by default from the titles of your book sections Jutoh can also create a basic table of contents page simply by checking the Generate table of contents property in the current configuration Project Properties Configurations The extra page will appear in your book but will not be visible in your Jutoh project Jutoh supports an additional advanced method of building a NavMap and table of contents In this mode you maintain an explicit list of contents entries with help from Jutoh The entries appear in the Contents page of the Project Properties dialog under Indexes Contents and are also editable in the Table of Contents Wizard Use this wizard with the command Book Build Table of Contents to switch to advanced mode and specify how contents entries will be gathered from headings in your documents Why would you want to use this advanced method instead of the default table of contents generated by Jutoh Well you get more control of styling and of which entries will appear in the contents and you can generate a table of contents that s several levels deep the default method only gives you one level So for most projects it s worth the extra effort Here s how the contents entries appear in Project Properties after running the Table of Contents Wizard at least once 107 CHA
112. August 22nd 2012 e e Added notes about using SVG images to Working with Pictures Added references to DOCX import where ODT import is mentioned Added a troubleshooting tip for black text on a black background Added a description of the font dialog in Editing and Formatting Content Added a description of continuation list paragraphs in Editing and Formatting Content Added iBooks section to Troubleshooting Your Book Added a description for the new configuration option Cover image format Version 1 3 July 18th 2012 Documented the Insert Non Breaking Hyphen and Insert Non Breaking Space commands in the Editing and Formatting Content chapter Documented the new configuration options Convert non breaking hyphen to hyphen Enable fixed layout Page width Page height Add thin spaces around punctuation and Thin space entity Extended the section on fonts in Editing and Formatting Content documenting the Font Substitution string table Enhanced the section on embedding fonts in Advanced Topics Added a section Creating fixed layout ebooks in Advanced Topics Mentioned the new template facility in the Getting Started and Importing Files chapters Fixed an incorrect reference to the View menu when mentioning Check for Updates in Appendix A Version 1 2 March 15th 2012 e Documented the Import basic CSS from HTML Epub option in the New Project Wizard Updated the mentions of KF8 Added a description of the new Type a
113. Books errors When you submit your Epub for iBooks to the iTunes site you may find the book is rejected even though the file doesn t cause problems with other retailers See also Chapter 16 Understanding Ebook Formats and Platforms Images break across one or more pages Make sure your images never exceed the size of the device display by checking the configuration option Limit images to viewer size e EpubCheck failure Most errors that cause rejection from iTunes will be identified by running EpubCheck which you can do by clicking on Check within Jutoh Lulu errors e Contains unmanifested files error If you check Optimize for iBooks in your Epub configuration the default setting it includes the file com apple ibooks display options xml in the folder META INF inside the Epub So try clearing this setting in your configuration to remove this file Also check that iTunesMetadata plist hasn t been added by Tunes if so compile the file again e Errors similar to ERROR Unable to locate element with id auto_bookmark_table_of_contents_1 in OPS toc nex Check Force simple NavMap in your configuration to generate a NavMap with no bookmarks that Lulu can cope with Import export errors Import errors You may sometimes get unexpected results when importing into Jutoh Here are some potential issues e Imperfect styles Jutoh does its best to convert CSS HTML styles to Jutoh styles but the two systems are ve
114. Cancel Help The Insert Table dialog From here you can choose the number of rows and columns in your table and also choose from a gallery of table templates if you wish by clicking on the Gallery button or using the drop down list of templates If you selected text before adding a table the text will be assumed to be data that you wish to add to the table cells separated by commas or other separator that you specify You can also enter the data yourself in the Insert Table dialog Jutoh provides a standard set of templates from you to choose from but you can add your own if you wish This is what the Table Template dialog looks like when you press Gallery in the Insert Table dialog 151 CHAPTER 14 WORKING WITH TABLES Gallery Default Gallery Grey stripes and no borders Customise Regions to customise y Borders i Region Box Formatting LV Margins V Cell colour Region Paragraph Formatting Size Paragraph style Table Box Formatting Help The Table Template dialog If you press Customise as has been done in the example the dialog will show the regions that comprise the table template which can be edited by adjusting colour spacing and so on Click Region Box Formatting to adjust box attributes such as size line colour and spacing for the selected region and click on Region Paragraph Formatting to choose font and paragraph formatting attributes for that region Clic
115. Chapter 1 215 Importing from ODT and DOCX If you import from an ODT or DOCX document page styles will be created for your sections If you have multiple page styles in your original document select splitting by page break when you import to be sure that Jutoh will set the page styles for the right sections Importing from DOCX will always create a page style for the first section as the default style whereas importing from ODT will create a Standard page style that provides defaults but is not explicitly associated with a section Both import methods should create similar results when exporting to ODT Summary This chapter has shown how you can author print documents with Jutoh as well as ebooks Next we see how you can use Jutoh s facilities for conditional formatting creating different ebook content that changes according to criteria in different configurations 216 Chapter 23 Conditional Formatting gt 9C SNE This chapter describes how you can use Jutoh s facilities for creating different ebook output depending on format distributor or other criteria without needing to maintain different versions of your project Introduction It s common to want to create different versions of your book for different distributors formats or purposes You may need different book identifiers or different text describing where to buy the book or perhaps you d like to create a small sample for your web site that can be easily
116. Chapter 3 Added chapters on text to speech and print plus the appendix Speech Markup Reference the appendix Speech Profile Reference and the appendix Alphabet Description Reference Replaced the decoration under headings and made second level headings blue Removed speech configuration information from the installation appendix and added it to the configuration appendix Added information about configuring for CereVoice Version 2 8 June 10th 2015 for Jutoh 2 33 2 34 Updated the documentation for adding a configuration to reflect the new Add Configuration dialog Added description of a couple of Kindle Paperwhite problems in the Fixed Layout chapter under Formatting for Kindle Documented configuration options Generate page list Generate Adobe page map Generate cross reference page numbers Preserve spacing after page break Removed this out of date comment from the description of Use relative dimensions description However Mobipocket doesn t allow precise specification of dimensions when using em so it s recommended to clear this option for Mobipocket and enable it for Epub and HTML formats Removed this out of date comment from the CSS section in the style chapter Since Mobipocket KF7 doesn t handle em units very well it s recommended that you clear Use relative dimensions in your Mobipocket configuration it is disabled by default for new projects Version 2 7 April 16th 2015 for Jutoh 2 29
117. Condition objects contain a list of tags that are matched against these options to include or exclude the content Include sections matching tags enter a comma delimited set of tags which match against tags specified in the Properties dialog for each section For a given section if any of the tags specified here are mentioned in its own tags or this property is empty the section will be included in the book Exclude sections matching tags enter a comma delimited set of tags which match against tags specified in the Properties dialog for each section For a given section if any of the tags specified here are mentioned in its own tags the section will be excluded from the book Include media documents matching tags comma delimited tags matching tags of media documents that should be included If no tags are specified all media documents match Exclude media documents matching tags comma delimited tags matching tags of media documents that should not be included If no tags are specified all media documents match Include content matching tags comma delimited tags matching conditional content that should be included If no tags are specified all conditional content matches Exclude content matching tags comma delimited tags matching conditional content that should 91 not be included If no tags are specified all conditional content matches Permit links to absent content check to silently remove links to absent conditional cont
118. Creating Great Ebooks Using Jutoh UDPATED FOR JUTOH 2 Dr Julian Smart e SZ ANTHEMION ae CREATING GREAT EBOOKS USING JUTOH A complete guide to making ebooks for Kindle iPad Nook Kobo and more from new project to publication by Julian Smart Published by Anthemion Julian Smart 2015 Edition 2 10 mm e 4 gm Jaton SZ Anthemion All rights reserved You are welcome to redistribute this book in its original form The author acknowledges the trademarked status and trademark owners of various products referenced in this work This book was created using Jutoh The author acknowledges the trademarked status and trademark owners of various products referenced in this work which have been used without permission The publication use of these trademarks is not authorized associated with or sponsored by the trademark owners Table of Contents From the Horses Motta a ie o o ans xi PECES iS xii Bring on ELSA A oanee AE xii About the authors ori A xiii FIG WTS book Is stuctird a a a e r E E EE null xiii Conventions and terms used in this DOOK ta i da XV Chapter 1 Introduction to Ebooks and Jutoh ooooooocoonccnonnococnncooccncnonacononanononnnononononoccncccconocccccccons 1 EDO oda 1 What is HE A os anes a aSa a O aA 2 What kinds of book can be created With Jutoh 0 0 cece cecccessceeeceneesseeceseeeeeceseceeeenseeseeeeseneeeesaeeees 3 TRG DOO a A A E E T AA A A Oak takausasei uae ae Nas a
119. Currently Adobe Digital Editions doesn t handle fixed layout ebooks You can try the Azardi viewer or Readium an app for the Chrome browser You can also preview a fixed layout page in a web browser with Book Preview Section Changing fixed layout configuration settings While the book style that you chose in the New Project Wizard or changed in Project Properties is a rough indicator of the layout of your book it is only used as a hint when creating new pages or new configurations When Jutoh generates a book it actually looks at the configuration settings to determine how it will create the necessary HTML and other files The relevant settings are listed below Remember you can search for settings using the search box at the bottom of the configuration page click on the box or use Ctrl F and start typing Enable fixed layout this should always be enabled for fixed layout books Allow reflowable and fixed layout check this if your book contains reflowable and fixed layout content The mainstream platforms iBooks Kobo Kindle don t allow mixing types of content but Epub 3 allows it e Orientation lock whether the book will be locked in portrait or landscape mode This doesn t refer to the actual aspect ratio of an individual page this is entirely up to you e Pages per spread how many pages HTML files will be created per double page spread This may differ from the way you created your pages Jutoh will s
120. Favourites toolbar button If this button is switched off you will need to enable it using toolbar customisation For more information see Appendix B Configuring Jutoh Font Normal text Subset Basic Latin Character code 2A hex 42 dec From Unicode Help The symbol selector dialog Note that not all ebook readers support non English Unicode character sets using their default fonts To show say Romanian diacritics in Adobe Digital Editions you need to embed a suitable Unicode font for example DejaVuSans and specify a font substitution in your configuration the embedded font is used For more on embedding fonts see Chapter 24 Advanced Topics Pictures You can insert pictures into your document with Format Insert Picture Shift Ctrl C or simply by pasting a picture from the clipboard If you use the insert method the picture will be stored in the original file format if you paste from the clipboard the picture is stored as a PNG By default Jutoh will convert pictures to JPEG when you actually generate the ebook so you don t generally need to 47 worry about inserting a format that s compatible with Epub or Mobipocket at time of insertion If you insert a picture that s very large in dimensions not file size Jutoh will resize it at the time of insertion You can switch this off and change the maximum size using the Resize images to max setting in Import Preferences A picture is normally shown
121. Format menu and toolbar commands You can choose left alignment or 56 justification for the majority of your content but note that that Kindle is the only major platform that respects the alignment as specified in the book other ereaders have a global justification setting that affects all books For list items it can be better to force left alignment since a short list item looks terrible when justified Note that if you justify text it won t show as justified in the Jutoh editor However it will be justified when viewed in an ebook reader where supported Headings If you use heading styles of the form Heading 1 then Jutoh will output the styles with the HTML heading tag such as h1 To use a different prefix or to stop Jutoh from emitting h tags edit the Heading style prefix configuration property For finer control of how heading styles map to HTML levels see Chapter 20 Making Your Books Accessible Lists List styles are the only way to achieve bulleted or numbered paragraphs you shouldn t try to apply bullets to an individual paragraph although the Bullets page of the paragraph style editor is retained in case you imported a bulleted paragraph and need to reset the attributes List styles work on the principle that lists can potentially be nested with different bullet or numbering styles depending on the level depth of the list When you are editing a list pressing the Tab or Shift Tab keys wi
122. G using the image properties Note that Jutoh normally saves images in full color so it is best to use the compressed JPEG format for large images JPEG images are saved at 90 quality but try not to load and save JPEG images repeatedly or the image will degrade Web link document A web link document contains a web address or URL and an optional description These won t form part of the book Shortcut document A shortcut document contains the location of a document or application on your computer Again these won t form part of the book they are for your reference only Font document A font document contains a TTF or OTF font for embedding in an ebook The font data is stored within 29 the project file and copied to the book when compiling Embedding fonts is beyond the scope of this document but you can find details in the Jutoh manual It is recommended that you don t embed fonts and that you only use basic fonts such as Times New Roman which is guaranteed to be supported on all ebook readers Media document A media document contains an audio video or image file for use in a media object Embedding media objects is beyond the scope of this document not least because few ebook platforms support embedded media If you are determined to embed media for example if only targeting iBooks Epub books you can find details in the Jutoh manual and also a brief description in Chapter 24 Advanced Topics Source cod
123. HTML left margin sets a global left margin for Epub and HTML formats not Mobipocket Examples 3 10mm 0 2in 20px To remove the margin clear the value HTML right margin sets a global right margin for Epub and HTML formats not Mobipocket Examples 3 10mm 0 2in 20px To remove the margin clear the value HTML top margin sets a global top margin for Epub and HTML formats not Mobipocket Examples 3 10mm 0 2in 20px To remove the margin clear the value HTML bottom margin sets a global bottom margin for Epub and HTML formats not Mobipocket Examples 3 10mm 0 2in 20px To remove the margin clear the value Styles for indent fix specifies the styles whose left indent should be converted to a first line indent to fix the lack of full left indent support on Mobipocket only By default this is TOC To stop any such conversion clear this setting You can use star to match multiple characters in the style name Use relative dimensions Jutoh can use the relative unit em to specify dimensions such as indentation and paragraph spacing or it can use mm If this option is checked em is used and this allows better scaling when the text size is changed by your book audience Dimension units choose the units to use for non font dimensions such as margin and size Some platforms require pixel units for fixed layout books If you specify Default Jutoh will decide what units to use Font size units choos
124. Metafile format These pictures should be pasted or inserted by hand after import Or export an HTML file using OpenOffice or LibreOffice to the same folder that contains the ODT and with the same root name as the original file For example thing odt should be exported as thing html GIF files will be written to the folder and Jutoh will use these images when importing from ODT Pictures pasted from the clipboard into a DOCX file are stored as Windows Metafiles These can be imported by Jutoh on Windows although picture size may be slightly different from the original On Linux and Mac OS X metafiles are ignored so you have several options 1 perform the document import on a Windows machine and copy the jutoh file afterwards to your Linux or Mac machine 2 in your original DOCX file replace pasted images with images inserted from PNG or JPEG files and then perform the import or 3 paste or insert the missing images into your Jutoh project Image export to ebooks By default Jutoh will convert non JPEG images to the more space efficient JPEG format You can switch this off via the Convert images to JPEG configuration setting You can also choose the compression ratio when converting using the Image quality configuration property the higher the value the better the quality 80 is usually a good value You can also control the maximum image width and height using the Maximum image width and Maximum image height properties If
125. Microsoft Word XML DOCX this has been Microsoft Word s native file format for some years but older versions of Word can still be made to open and save DOCX see the Introduction for more information OpenDocument Text ODT this is the native file format of the free OpenDocument org Writer and LibreOffice Writer word processors e Plain text Jutoh can import from a plain text file or folder full of text files though there will be no fancy formatting initially since there is none in the original text HTML Jutoh can import in a limited way from HTML some formatting will be lost although of course most can be put back by applying styles within Jutoh e Epub Jutoh can import from an existing Epub file with the same HTML restrictions as mentioned above Although Jutoh can import from these formats after a blank project has been created it s usually best to import within the New Project Wizard because the wizard helps you split the file into sections Because Jutoh s representation is different from each of the native file formats it s inevitable that some information will be lost in translation for example fancy Word table borders but you should rarely find that this is a problem Let s look at the input formats in more detail and how to import from each format in the Jutoh New Project Wizard Microsoft Word XML DOCX and OpenDocument Text ODT The majority of users especially on Windows and Mac will pro
126. PTER 11 WORKING WITH INDEXES Contents Index Footnotes amp Endnotes Table of Contents J x These entries are used if you are maintaining a Table of Contents page and NavMap yourself Normally Jutoh handles these itself To change between simple and advanced ToC mode run the wizard from here or using the Build Table of Contents command on the Book menu Entries Table of Contents From the Horse s Mouth Preface Bring on the revolution About the author How this book is structured Conventions and terms used in this book Chapter 1 Introduction to Ebooks and Jutoh Chaal Enemmmtn Title Title Page Level Document id Bookmark la 1 El 27 auto_bookmark_table_of_contents_1 Run Table of Contents Wizard The Table of Contents page of the Project Properties dialog Let s have a look at the Table of Contents Wizard invoked by pressing Run Table of Contents Wizard in the Project Properties dialog or from Book Build Table of Contents Here s the first page 108 CHAPTER 11 WORKING WITH INDEXES Table of Contents Wizard Jutoh can help you create a table of contents page for your book The same information can be used to create the mandatory NavMap in your Epub or Mobipocket book which is the list of sections that a typical ebook reader uses to help you navigate the book You can leave all of this to J
127. Special Subject be an expert or an enthusiast The next question to ask yourself is what is your area of unique knowledge and how is it connected to the book you have written Why is a special subject important It gives you a voice it is an excuse to speak be it on an online forum a blog in the local newsletter even to the person at the bus stop You are no longer just someone with a book to sell You are instead an interesting person who happens to have written a book which might be equally interesting How do you find your special subject If you have written a collection of gluten free bread recipes because you have a gluten allergy then it is easy to see you are well qualified to take gluten free cooking as your special subject Historical novelists have a head start here as they are usually deeply involved in historical research and have a burning interest in the past that s what drove them become historical novelist in the first place They are often de facto experts However sometimes it can be difficult to find your specialist subject Perhaps you are writing contemporary fiction or a memoir and it doesn t seem at all clear Your subject seems too general Don t despair ask yourself some more questions and try to tease out your special subject For example look at the setting does your work have a regional flavour Is your romance set in France Why did you choose France Is it because you live there and know it
128. TFILE FIRSTTITLE LASTFILE LASTTITLE THISFILE THISTITLE They will be 90 replaced by the associated HTML file names and section titles e Enable HTML header enables navigation controls at the top of each HTML page Enable HTML footer enables navigation controls at the bottom of each HTML page HTML header first page template specifies the HTML to be placed in the header for the first page in the book HTML header middle pages template specifies the HTML to be placed in the header for all but the first and last pages in the book HTML header last page template specifies the HTML to be placed in the header for the last page in the book HTML footer first page template specifies the HTML to be placed in the footer for the first page in the book HTML footer middle pages template specifies the HTML to be placed in the footer for all but the first and last pages in the book HTML footer last page template specifies the HTML to be placed in the footer for the last page in the book Conditional Sections This category lets you include or exclude sections from the final ebook Note that if you use these properties to change the way sections are included in your book you will need to regenerate the table of contents alphabetical index and endnotes for each configuration since these will also change according to configuration The last two options act on condition objects that bracket conditional content
129. To preview your Epub book you can install Adobe Digital Editions www adobe com products digitaleditions or other Epub viewer Jutoh will launch the default application associated with the epub extension when you click on Launch If you need to use several viewers and choose between them you can add viewers in the Helpers page of the Jutoh Preferences dialog by clicking on Configure then Add Type the name of the helper application and browse for the command to use Now when you click on the Launch button Jutoh will offer you a menu of applications to use Similarly to preview Mobipocket books you can use Amazon s Kindle for PC and Kindle for Mac www amazon com gp kindle pc www amazon com gp kindle mac Formatting on this software can be different from on other devices such as the Kindle device and iPhone iPod Touch Instead or as well you can use Kindle Previewer for Windows or Mac This lets you select a number of different Kindle devices to test However don t rely on it always do some testing on hardware if you can Also Kindle Previewer only responds to command line arguments on Windows so cannot be used as a Jutoh helper application on Mac you need to open the file from the Previewer application Hopefully that will be fixed in future release On Windows you can use the Setup Wizard available from the View menu to download and install Kindle Previewer as well as Kindlegen OpenOffice org is a free download from www
130. Tools Styles Objects Inspecto gt a incidents are either the product of the author s imagination or are used oes A fictitiously The author acknowledges the trademarked status and A canvas for drawing graphics using trademark owners of various products referenced in this work of A fiction which have been used without permission The publication use chapter of these trademarks is not authorized associated with or sponsored by DERE TARE eee ees owners code smashwords Defines a piece of computer code P Smashwords Edition License Notes comment a zoria 8 P Inserts a note or comment for the selected This ebook is licensed for your personal enjoyment only This ebook content 3 may not be re sold or given away to other people If you would like to poration share this book with another person please purchase an additional Inserts an object with tags that determine copy for each recipient If yow re reading this book and did not ene aie reed A x S gt output for a given configuration based on S purchase it or it was not purchased for your use only then please Indude exdude content matching tags return to Smashwords com and purchase your own copy Thank you for options respecting the hard work of this author l dfn y Defines an important term gt License Notes This ebook is licensed for your personal enjoyment only This ebook div E ESE z S z rs 5 Sets properties for a potentially large block may not be re sold or given away to othe
131. ZARDI is software for Windows and Mac that can read Epub 3 files However at present it does not 197 have accessibility features Gitden Reader is available for Android and iOS and is a highly conformant Epub 2 and Epub 3 reader The Readium Chrome extension supports Epub 2 and 3 Further reading Epub 3 Accessibility Guidelines from IDPF http www idpf org accessibility guidelines Accessible Epub 3 http shop oreilly com product 0636920025283 do Summary This chapter has taken a brief look at how your documents can be made more accessible for future deployment even if the required Epub 3 support in ereaders is quite rare at the moment Next we see how you can use Jutoh s facilities for creating high quality text to speech documents an alternative way to make your documents accessible 198 Chapter 21 Working With Text To Speech gt 9C SNE This chapter describes how you can use various features to improve the quality of text to speech output in Jutoh whether played immediately to help with proof reading or with the goal of creating audio files We will also describe how to create speech archives so your customers can generate their own audio files Introduction Artificial speech generation has come on a long way since the early robotic sounding voices and technologies such as CereVoice come close to producing natural sounding speech So while text to speech doesn t threaten the conventional audio book
132. a lot about proper formatting for eBooks taking into consideration the various formats from ePub to ODT and even plain text I dreaded the thought of manually going through each one only to have to wade through the inevitable feedback in order to fix everything by trial and error In a single evening I was able to submit to both B amp N and Smashwords with flying colors no less Thank you for putting such a wonderful product together Dallas T Thanks again for all the help Jutoh is by far the best epublishing tool I ve used so far Blaise M Simply put Jutoh is the best conversion tool out there The user interface is very friendly there are many extras built in and the documentation is thorough Jutoh can take a very large book with many images and successfully convert to multiple ebook formats that pass the epub validation checks Anyone who has a book in MS Word can save it to OpenOffice which is free and has a built in PDF capability amongst other features and import it to Jutoh I have found the Jutoh developer to be extremely accessible responsive and eager to receive feedback This is a high end professional piece of software that is practically a give away Kathy M I wanted to thank you so much for the Jutoh tool It s been wonderful I was so pleased with how it worked in creating a mobipocket Kindle edition of a book I ve been writing Joshua D Thank you for another quick thorough re
133. a whole lot less painful than it used to be These are the big three e www wordpress com www blogger com e www tumblr com The secret to successful blogging is to have frequently updated quality content It is hard work and it takes some time to pay off but it is also good writing practice Preparation helps a lot so focus on your special subject and brainstorm out a list of topics for future blog posts If there is something in the news that links to your special subject seize the moment and blog about it Make sure each post you create is well tagged so that people can find it easily And keep everything as fresh and interesting as possible post videos pictures and make podcasts just to keep everything lively Have a blog roll of other blogs that connect to your special subject and engage and comment on those blogs You will find this drives people back to your blog if your comments are relevant and not overly self promotional Make sure you have clear links to your books on the site so that if you have written a good piece people can find out more about you and your writing easily but again the key is to make the blog more about the content than the promotion You can also create an author s page on Facebook and invite your friends to become fans There it is all about engagement with users Now you have a blog Where do you find readers One place to look is on the book lover forums for example Kindle Boards Amazon read
134. ab of the Object Properties dialog enter young female into the Voice family property Now click on OK The female tag now appears in the object palette Select some text in your document and double click on the female object Tags will appear around the selected text If you click on the start tag you can confirm that in the Advanced tab of the properties dialog the Voice family property contains the value you entered as a default value When writing to an Epub 3 file the custom tag will be written as a span tag with appropriate properties Note that custom tag definitions are associated with the project so you will need to use a template containing the definitions if you wish to create multiple files with the same custom tag definitions This ensures that custom tag definitions do not get lost when projects are transferred to other computers Summary Now you have an idea of how to manipulate tag objects you can use this knowledge when marking up a document for narration synchronisation the subject of the next chapter 166 Chapter 17 Adding Narration to Your Book SIC This chapter describes how Jutoh can help you add audio narration to one or more documents in your book using Epub 3 media overlay SMIL files Introduction Synchronised audio narration where content is highlighted as the audio track progresses is appropriate for some kinds of books in particular young children s picture books An a
135. ach image s properties As mentioned above if you have multiple instances of the same image in your project you can indicate to Jutoh which images should only be exported once by choosing a unique name for the Name field in the image properties dialog the first image with a given name will be exported and subsequent occurrences will use the same image The name will also be used as the root of the image file name Don t use non ASCII characters such as Chinese characters for file names or EpubCheck and or Kindlegen will fail Exporting images to files If you need to extract all images from your book in their original format and size you can use the File Export Images command It will prompt you for a folder that will contain the files If you need to get hold of the files that have been converted to JPEGs and resized as part of the book compilation process then you can unzip the Epub file using an archive tool renaming the extension to zip first if necessary 104 Working with large images If your project contains a lot of large images that slow Jutoh down and cause extreme computer resource usage you can switch images off temporarily or you can tell Jutoh to load images on demand These options are in Project Preferences Advanced and are Enable images and Load images on demand You need to change these options before you load the relevant project Using media objects to insert images Instead of inserting images directly y
136. ackground colour margins and more by clicking on Properties next to the object list or by using the Properties command on the context menu or by alt left clicking on the object Reposition the box by dragging it or editing its properties and resize it by dragging the bottom right corner or again editing its properties You can also set the position and size directly using the controls in the Objects tab If you have light coloured text you can change the editing background colour to a more suitable one with the Editor bg control in the Page tab This can be changed per page Clipboard operations You can paste text and image objects from text and bitmaps on the clipboard by using the Paste command or Ctrl V When an image is pasted or inserted from a file the box that surrounds the image is scaled proportionately to how much extra resolution there is in the background image compared with the actual page size This means that if you are working with a background image at a certain resolution and cutting out images to paste onto your page they will appear at the correct relative size 179 You can paste background images from the clipboard using Paste Background Image from the context tool menu The original resolution will be retained and the image will be scaled to fit the page Images pasted from the clipboard are always saved in PNG format internally and not JPEG so that they don t lose any detail You can paste the back
137. adata will be shown in the preview In the following example of the element editor in action we ve deleted the original element so there s only one kind of identifier in this book the ISBN 64 CHAPTER 7 EDITING YOUR BOOK S METADATA Identifier 1 Attributes 1234567891012 opf scheme ISBN id BookId Preview lt dc identifier opf scheme ISBN id BookId gt 123456789 1012 lt dc identifier gt x cme The Element Editor dialog Some attributes have a convenient list of options at present these are opf scheme in the Identifier element e opf role in the Author element e Value in the Language element Metadata elements These are the most common metadata elements Only the title is obligatory in Jutoh other fields that are mandatory for Epub and Mobipocket and that are not filled in will be generated Book title The book title Language The language the book is written in such as en for English or fr for French If left unspecified the 65 default value is en You can select from a list of languages if you click on the details button and click on the Value attribute It is important to specify the correct language as otherwise ebooks can be rejected by some distributors and the wrong dictionary may be used on the ebook reader Identifier The identifier for the book which can be arbitrary if the opf s
138. added AE E to the end of book chapters so you don t have to remember to update them Endnotes O Generate endnotes in a separate section Section title Endnotes Title style Endnotes Heading Group style Endnotes Group Numbering Global Automatically build endnotes Add tags for Epub 3 Generate Endnotes No Footnote and endnotes options In the footnotes and endnotes properties page you can choose whether the citations will be represented by superscript numbers or numbers in square brackets You can influence how the citation numbers are styled by changing the Base reference style by default Citation or editing the Citation style definition in the style sheet editor By default the Citation style applies no extra formatting Footnotes In footnotes mode the default your footnotes will not show within Jutoh unless edited but if there are any footnotes in a chapter they will be appended to the chapter when the book is compiled after a horizontal rule divider Footnotes are always added so if you were to import footnotes from an ODT file and then compile it without altering any settings they will show up For Epub books you can change the horizontal rule properties from the footnotes and endnotes properties page For example you can set it to be coloured red and occupy 30 of the page width For ODT files Jutoh will insert an image reflecting some of the configured properties Endnotes If y
139. after 20 Level 1 Font Times New Roman 16pt Bold Bookmark editing Paragraph styles v More The formatting palette and context More menu You can show or hide the formatting palette using the command Format Formatting Palette or Alt P then click on the Styles tab There are four other tabs in the palette The Tools tab shows all the available tools that are also shown on the horizontal toolbar Objects lists the objects that can be inserted such as bookmarks tag objects and tables Inspector shows selected kinds of content in the current document such as bookmarks and images and Favourites shows any styles commands or symbols that you may have marked as favourites in the shortcut editor see the next topic The formatting palette will only be presented when a document of the appropriate type is being edited it will also disappear temporarily if you are using the built in help window to reduce clutter The style that s highlighted in the list is either the one where your cursor is currently positioned or the 54 style you have selected in the list with the mouse or keyboard You can single click on the styles without worrying about changing your project accidentally this lets you browse the styles and read descriptions of them in the pane under the list To apply a style double click on the style name A menu appears when you click on More or right click over the style list or press the context menu button on you
140. age Backups and the description in the manual but this is not automated If you find your project file getting a bit big especially after a lot of editing and deletions you can try compacting it In Preferences click on Project then on Project Maintenance Click on the Records tab then Delete Orphans Click on the Project tab and then on Compact Project All Jutoh data is kept in database tables and as data is changed added and deleted the database can become fragmented so occasional compacting is necessary like defragmenting a hard disk Where is my project If you have opened the project using a method that didn t require you to specify the whole file for example File Recent Projects you might not know the location of your project To find out just click on the Edit button Book Project Properties and then click on the Info tab This tells you the name of the project the folder and what version of Jutoh was used to last save it You can click on Show Folder to show the containing folder using your operating system s file explorer Document types The following document types may be created in Jutoh Only create book section or fixed layout page documents under the special Content folder but you can create any kind of document elsewhere in 28 your project Book section document A book section document represents a part of an ebook for example a chapter a title page or a table of contents A book section documen
141. age count 2 The layout choice page of the new project wizard If you choose Fixed layout book you will not be able to import from an existing document but Jutoh will create some empty pages for the new book Select the kind of layout you will be using from the Book style dropdown as follows Portrait and landscape your book will be viewable in both orientations showing a single page portrait mode and showing two pages at a time in landscape mode e Portrait only only the portrait orientation will be allowed 176 e Landscape only two pages per spread only landscape orientation will be allowed but each Jutoh document will be half of the final landscape page Landscape only double page spread only landscape orientation will be allowed and each Jutoh document will show as the full landscape page For books that have independent left and right pages the first option is recommended The choice you make here can be changed later in the Options page of the Project Properties dialog The main effect of the book style choice is to allow Jutoh to do two things firstly to set the Orientation lock configuration property whenever a configuration is created and secondly to initialize the page type for each Jutoh fixed layout document The page type will be used to determine whether the page is on the left or right amongst other things as we shall see later The page size can be any size you want but you may wish to choose a si
142. agraphs to exclude the comma separated paragraph styles whose paragraphs should be excluded from the book You can use to mean all characters for example Only will cause all paragraphs with a style name beginning Only to be excluded except for those specified in Paragraphs to include For examples see Chapter 12 Working With Style Sheets Paragraphs to include the comma separated paragraph styles whose paragraphs will be exempt from exclusions You can use to mean all characters For example if this property has the value of Only Epub paragraphs styles with Only Epub will be retained but assuming Only in Paragraphs to exclude all other paragraphs whose style name begins with Only will be removed Thus you can include or exclude paragraphs in your document depending on the configuration For examples see Chapter 12 Working With Style Sheets First paragraph style the style to use for first paragraphs after a heading when importing into an existing project from plain text HTML or Epub Normal paragraph style the style to use for normal paragraphs when importing into an existing 81 project from plain text HTML or Epub Chapter heading paragraph style the style to use for chapter headings when importing into an existing project from plain text Only relevant if you have Take title from first line of text files switched on in Project Properties Options Character style substitutions semicol
143. aightforward However for best results you will need to do some reading around the subject to understand the principles of accessibility At present a reasonable level of accessibility as illustrated by the features listed in this topic is only supported by Epub 3 the DAISY digital talking book DTB standard and annotated PDF Of these formats only Epub 3 is supported by Jutoh Epub 3 is taking longer to become mainstream than expected but Books supports an Epub 3 subset and some countries have adopted Epub 3 rapidly due to its support for their languages and many large publishers are using Epub 3 internally As a replacement for the DAISY DTB standard Epub 3 is in a transitional period and DTB is likely to be around for a long time to come Despite these caveats it seems highly likely that Epub 3 will be adopted more widely in future Plus some of the features that promote accessibility such as sections figures and asides are in fact HTML5 constructs a standard in wide use today Note that Jutoh doesn t currently cover all conceivable aspects of accessibility But we hope that the current functionality is a big step in the right direction and we will be listening to feedback in order to improve it Some accessibility features can still be useful for Epub 2 and Mobipocket generation the caption detection will insert non breaking div tags around the object and caption in Epub 2 mode so that they stay together not cur
144. alking Book solution 1 The user cannot navigate an audio file in a flexible manner compared with Epub 3 or DTB 2 Jutoh is required to generate the audio file and so a speech archive can t be used directly on a mobile device but after speech generation the files can of course be transferred to a portable device In the absence of greater availability of hardware and software that reads a digital book directly the advantages of the speech archive may outweigh the disadvantages You can of course also generate an Epub 2 or Epub 3 file which can be read directly by some hardware and software A speech archive can contain one of the following formats binary document SSML SAPI Apple Speech Manager text or plain text Binary or portable documents give the most flexibility since any 207 of the other formats or speech engines can be used to generate speech whereas with engine specific formats the user is restricted to using a compatible operating system and engine By default Jutoh generates portable speech archives To generate a speech archive check Generate speech archive in your speech profile To test the speech archive you have just generated go to the Files tab of the Jutoh Control Panel find the SPARCH entry and double click it You can also open the sparch file via File Open The Speech Archive dialog will be shown as shown below Formatting Sample by Julian Smart Identifier Formatting Sample Publisher
145. alog 284 Toolbar Text Section C Show this toolbar Show labels Tools M Properties Overall text appearance Favourites Check spelling Cut Copy Paste The Customise Toolbars dialog Select the toolbar to customise using the drop down Toolbar control Then click on the checkbox next to each tool name to enable or disable that tool You can t change the ordering of tools separators will be removed automatically if a whole group of tools is disabled Another way of showing the Customise Toolbars dialog is to right click on a toolbar and select Customise from the context menu It will select the appropriate toolbar Customising auto replace Auto replace allows you to type text and have it replaced by a different symbol or sequence of symbols To edit auto replace items use the View Auto Replace Preferences command The Auto Replace Preferences dialog has two tabs one called Replace with general textual replacement options and one called Custom Quotes 285 APPENDIX B CONFIGURING JUTOH Replace Custom Quotes Auto replace replaces text as you type Enable auto replace Auto replace items Y becomes Y becomes Y r becomes Y euro becomes iV tm becomes The Auto Replace Preferences dialog To add an auto replace item click Add and enter the Replace and With text Click on the button to use a symbol selection dial
146. alpha transparency Convert images to JPEG whether to convert non JPEG images to JPEG for reduced file size Specify None to leave the images in their original format All to convert all non JPEG images and All except GIF to leave GIF files alone but convert the others You can override conversion per image by checking Preserve original format in the Image Properties dialog Image quality the image quality when converting to JPEG expressed as a percentage Higher quality means larger file size a good value for general use is 80 Generate media objects if enabled any video and audio media files and the tags that reference them will be written to the book XHTML formats only Use specified image names if enabled names entered in the Image Properties dialog will be used to form image file names It will be up to the user to specify unique filenames except where the same image is being used Epub and Mobipocket only Use SVG images check to use SVG vector image alternatives where specified for each image The SVG image should be added as a media object and Generate media objects should be enabled XHTML formats only Drawing object formats choose which formats will be used for drawing objects in this configuration You can specify the formats to be used for all drawing objects or you can specify by object tag for example math bitmap mathml drawing svg default bitmap SVG drawing method choose the SVG code
147. am is the son of a prominent ex prime minister He s also brilliant at magic but he s stuck at military school At least he has his best friend George there to back him up George would follow Aubrey anywhere and with Aubrey s talent for thinking up daring schemes that will get them both in trouble that s no easy thing to do At a royal hunting party the boys discover a golem a magical creature built to perform one task to kill Prince Albert Aubrey and George are hailed as heroes for foiling the murder attempt but who sent the golem and why Aubrey is far too curious to let the authorities handle this one and he and George start investigating Here is one for Phil Rickman s latest novel The Bones of Avalon Tt is 1560 and Elizabeth Tudor has been on the throne for a year Dr John Dee at 32 already acclaimed throughout Europe is her astrologer and consultant in the hidden arts a controversial appointment in these days of superstition and religious strife Now the mild bookish Dee has been sent to Glastonbury to find the missing bones of King Arthur whose legacy was always so important to the Tudor line With him hardly the safest companion is his friend and former student Robert Dudley a risk taker a wild card and possibly the Queen s secret lover The famously mystical town is still mourning the gruesome execution of its Abbot Richard Whiting But why was the Abbot really killed What is the secret
148. an be changed in your configurations with different settings in different configurations to suit the target device or publishing platform Jutoh will apply the current configuration settings with reference to the 173 individual page settings and compensate where necessary and possible Note that there is no fixed page size or aspect ratio that an ereader requires If you have the luxury of targeting the aspect ratio width and height of a particular device great but displays come in so many shapes and sizes that you shouldn t worry about it too much choose the aspect ratio that suits your book and the device will do the best it can Also since pages are scaled by the device the physical page size you choose isn t critical However the larger the page size you work with the greater the accuracy and the less chance there is for imprecise conversions for example conversion of font point sizes to pixels You can still provide page background and other images that have more detail than the physical size shown in Jutoh Extra resolution can be used for zooming but also be aware of size and performance constraints when using large images You cannot mix fixed layout documents and reflowable book section documents a project must contain one or the other or the result will be unpredictable Typically because fixed layout books tend to be more graphical than reflowable books you will need other tools in addition to Jutoh at m
149. and click on the button next to the Identifier field Click Add to add a new value to this element and choose Add ISBN Enter the ISBN just the number including dashes into the Value field Now delete the original value Element 1 OK so you have different ISBNs for different ebook editions but you want to publish your ebook to different platforms with different ISBNs without having to edit separate Jutoh files for each edition The way to accomplish this is via string tables String tables allow you to set up substitution tables since we can specify a different table for each configuration Mobipocket Epub and so on we can put a variable called say ISBN into the ISBN value field and substitute a different ISBN value from the different tables depending on the current configuration Let s assume that you are using two configurations Mobipocket and Epub The Mobipocket book is going to the Kindle store and the Epub book is going to the Tunes store 1 Click Edit on the toolbar then the Strings tab Click the button to add a new string table and call it Kindle Click Add and enter ISBN to add a new string whose name is ISBN Click on the value field second column and enter the ISBN for the Kindle store Repeat the above adding a new string table called iBooks and adding the second ISBN value Click OK to dismiss the Project Properties nH nA A W N Click Edit on the toolbar again
150. and the project assets via the Assets page in the Project Properties dialog Most users will not need to edit assets See the Jutoh Plus guide for more details Automatic style An automatic style is a named character or paragraph style that Jutoh imports or generates when ad hoc styling is applied to a span of text or a paragraph An automatic style contains one or more symbols These styles are not usually shown in the style sheet because they are quietly maintained with each document in the project You should minimize your use of automatic styles because it makes maintaining document consistency harder Character style Named character styles are applied to spans of text within a paragraph For example the URL style is defined by default and applies blue and underlining to text You can view and edit character styles using Project Properties Edit and clicking on Styles Then click on Character styles in the drop down box under the list of styles 264 You can apply character styles by right clicking on selected text then choosing Styles Character Styles in the context popup menu You can also use keyboard shortcuts and the Favourites menu see Customising the user interface Compiling The process of creating generating building an ebook from a Jutoh project Configuration A configuration in Jutoh terminology is a group of properties that together determine how an ebook will be generated including file format
151. ar simply apply two of the standard list styles bulleted and numbered e Box style This kind of style defines size border margin and other attributes that used by box like objects such as text boxes and images 131 CHAPTER 12 WORKING WITH STYLE SHEETS There is always a named paragraph style for any given paragraph but a given span of text may not necessarily have any named character style If more than one named style applies to text their attributes are combined in the order paragraph list and character with each style overriding the previous You can remove the character style from a span of text and choosing Format Text Reset Text Formatting Editing style sheets You edit style sheets in the Project Properties dialog as shown here Style sheet Default Style Sheet x El 8 B The default style sheet Configurations Formatting styles i gt Assets Strings Options paneer Duis pharetra consequat dui Cum sociis ETT natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient Document montes nascetur ridiculus mus Nullam vitae justo id mauris lobortis interdum Center Spacing After Centred Picture No Caption Centred Picture Centre Code First Line L Style for body text with an indented first line praeh es New Style Edit Delete The Styles page in the Project Properties dialog A default style sheet i
152. ashwords If you want to make your books commercially available you could use a service such as Plimus which will serve files up to your users after payment The files won t be encrypted but you can add a paragraph to the title page to request that people do not redistribute the file this should discourage some piracy A little bit of piracy may actually be a good thing in spreading the word about your books and in my opinion there will always be a majority of law abiding citizens prepared to pay Besides determined pirates will crack encryption or scan or retype books And offering unencrypted books can be a selling point since customers generally hate encryption and Digital Rights Management since it restricts how the product can be read and stored If you re determined to encrypt your books simply use a store such as Kindle Smashwords or iBooks Caveats about using multiple distribution platforms You might think it was obvious that the more platforms you sell to the better However there are some wrinkles If one platform sells your book at a lower price than another then you can find the other platform price matching so you effectively trigger a price war with yourself hurting your margins On the other hand if you want to sell a book for the smallest possible price on Amazon you might use this to your advantage have it available for free on other platforms so Amazon price matches Also if you use Smashwords to target Kind
153. assisted in splitting up your imported file you will need to do it manually for example with Edit Split Document except for Epub files which will use the found structure and will give you the option to import the whole Epub under a new folder useful for merging several volumes into one book Reimporting Jutoh makes it easy to duplicate an initial import operation for example if you changed the original file or decided to use different settings Use the File Reimport Project command to show the New Project Wizard using the same default settings as you used originally deleting the current project content before importing the file again Summary In this chapter you have learned how to import your existing work Next we delve into the details of editing and formatting content 41 Chapter 6 Editing and Formatting Content IO Jutoh is not just a way of converting existing files to ebooks one of its major strengths is the ability to edit and tweak your book before creating the ebook in the desired format s In this chapter we ll learn how to edit and format your book s text and graphics Why divide a book into sections First a quick word about why Jutoh projects and ebooks in general are divided into sections A section can be a chapter a title page a table of contents and so on Most ebooks are comprised of sections rather than being one enormous chunk like a Word document One reason for this is because some ebo
154. at things about supporting the Kindle platform is that your books can be read on most smartphones tablets PCs and Macs as well as on Amazon s Kindle hardware To create files suitable for processing by Kindlegen Jutoh generates HTML CSS and other files that are nearly identical to the ones used for Epub creation However the original Mobipocket format KF7 is not quite as flexible as Epub and there are restrictions as well as features unique to Mobipocket Jutoh proves the configuration option Optimize for Mobipocket which does the following e Within lists there are no paragraph classes only list item classes since adding paragraph tags in lists breaks KF7 rendering e Multiple paragraphs in a list item are faked using line breaks e Link anchors are inserted before paragraphs not within them because a Mobipocket bug can cause styling loss if navigation causes only part of the paragraph to be visible Jutoh optimizes code so the book will look as good as possible on both older KF7 devices and newer devices supporting KF8 Where generated CSS code is different for each platform Jutoh uses media queries so the appropriate code is used on each platform Jutoh may perform other tweaks in future releases The Optimize for Mobipocket option is switched on by default for the initial Mobipocket configuration Although Jutoh takes care of most of the low level Mobipocket Kindle technical details you may also wish to read Amazon s
155. at could represent anything A standard ASCII file only represent the basic symbols whereas files encoded in Unicode can represent most symbols in use on the planet Jutoh s favoured Unicode encoding is UTF 8 in which plain text is encoded with one character per symbol and so is readable in any text editor and more complex symbols are represented by two or more characters When you save text from a word processor you need to make sure it s going to write using the encoding that you ve specified in the New Project Wizard or Project Properties For example when saving a document as plain text from Microsoft Word Word will show you a further dialog Click on Other encoding and select Unicode UTF 8 Don t check Insert line breaks since you want each paragraph to be one line If you forget to save in the right encoding you may be able to fix it as follows When you get an Jutoh error indicating an encoding problem or the file doesn t show properly in the finished book or the editor open the file in an encoding savvy application such as Programmer s Notepad It should auto detect the encoding which you can check by typing Alt Enter to see the document s properties Now select the whole document and copy it to the clipboard Create a new file change the encoding to UTF 8 in the document s properties and paste the text into it Save this over the original file it s now in the correct encoding If you can t
156. ate a new configuration 217 CHAPTER 23 CONDITIONAL FORMATTING called Epub Sample using the button on the Configurations panel in Project Properties To get there press Edit next to the configuration drop down in the Jutoh Control Panel bottom left of the Jutoh window Type Epub Sample for the new configuration name and select a configuration to base this one on or just press OK to be prompted for a format which will be used to create appropriate configuration defaults gt Project Properties ae Configurations Smashwords Epub Smashwords OpenDocument Epub Sample Description This configuration will create a sample containing chapters 1 to 5 Creating a new configuration Once the configuration has been created search for Exclude sections matching tags in the search field at the bottom of the dialog Type notsample as the value for this option to indicate that chapters that are not part of the sample should be excluded from this version of the book Press OK to close the Project Properties dialog 218 CHAPTER 23 CONDITIONAL FORMATTING Indude a tags OOOO Exclude media documents matching tags Indude content matching tags Exclude content matching tags Pre compile command Post compile command ee ee tags of sections that should not be included If no tags are specifie
157. aths and other settings for Compile Check and Launch commands To compile a book using the current configuration click on the Compile button on the Control Panel or click on the 1 Compile button on the toolbar or use Book Compile menu command or use the F7 keyboard shortcut If you prefer you can compile using multiple configurations in one go using the Book Batch Compile command a choice of configurations to use is presented as shown below Configurations Compile Google Play Epub Smashwords Epub Mobipocket Select All OpenDocument Text HTB MP3 Select None Clear log before compiling Batch Compile dialog Note that if you use the File Export menu command to quickly export your book to a specified format any formats specified in the currently selected configuration are temporarily overridden All the other settings in the current configuration will be used for the export so normally it s best to select the best configuration for the job and press Compile While we re talking about compiling it s worth pointing out that you can use the Update Special Book Sections dialog instead of updating the table of contents index or endnotes individually from their respective dialogs 77 Table of Contents Jutoh is currently managing the table of contents and checking this option will gather information for the Contents page and NavMap Run the Table of Contents wizard or edit project prefere
158. atic heading numbering to appear in OpenDocument ODT files or if you simply want to tell the ODT file where to find chapter headings when you re using the chapter field in headers and footers you can clear Enable automatic heading numbering You can remove heading numbering by clearing Enable automatic heading numbering and updating the headings again via Book Update Summary In this chapter you have learnt a lot about styles and how to edit and apply them Next we ll look at Jutoh s string table feature which gives you another way of customising your books 146 Chapter 13 Working With String Tables 9C S NE The string table feature gives you extra flexibility in customising your book by defining how keywords will be replaced by text at compile time for all versions of your book or per configuration Introduction Sometimes you may wish to change text that Jutoh generates for example the heading Table of Contents if generating a table of contents You may also wish to define strings that can be used as keywords in cover designs or change the way metadata is presented This is where string tables come in You can define several global string tables independent of any project and you can also define one or more project specific string tables Then in your configuration you can select the global string table and or project string table that should be used and if there is a value corresponding to the string name
159. ation to Landscape then Pages per spread must be One If you ve created each left and page individually then this may seem to be a problem but Jutoh will merge the left and right pages if your configuration settings are consistent with each other and will warn you if they aren t The only wrinkle is that you don t have the option to show the pages separately they will be immediately adjacent to each other However if you want there to be a gap just choose none for Orientation lock and then the individual page types will indicate whether the pages are synthesized joined or not 185 It is possible to have a Kindle book presented in single pages when in portrait orientation and presented in paired double page spread format when rotated to landscape orientation To achieve this don t set the orientation lock and specify two pages per spread But for this to work the configuration option Auto region magnification must be off or Kindle will only ever display a single page in portrait and landscape modes You can have different settings for different configurations so you can make Jutoh split or merge pages when using one configuration and do something different for another configuration You can also add new configurations for the same format for example to create several styles of Kindle layout If you do this don t forget to change the Book file name setting for each configuration or files for different config
160. away Bad date date value is not valid If you enter a date in the metadata that is not in the correct format EpubCheck will warn you giving details of what s allowed e Unfinished element This can happen if you miss out important metadata such as the book title e File name contains non ascii characters Don t put Unicode characters for example Chinese characters in an image file name as specified in the Image Properties dialog You can apply Epub checking to Mobipocket configurations since Jutoh generates Epub like files before converting them to Mobipocket but you will need to check Generate Epub in your Mobipocket configurations Note that the generated Epub will initially have the same file name as that generated by your Epub configuration so to avoid a clash you may want to change the Book file name property in your Mobipocket configuration to perhaps FILENAME Mobipocket Note that checking a Mobipocket file can result in a lot of spurious a tag bookmark errors because Jutoh optimizes the location of bookmarks in Mobipocket configurations in a way that EpubCheck doesn t like You can ignore these spurious errors To labour the point if both Epub and Mobipocket options are enabled within a configuration then the Epub file generated by this configuration will be Mobipocket oriented and therefore should only be used for checking purposes and not delivered to customers The chances are hig
161. ax height Position Position mode left 0 Cancel Editing picture size properties The first control in this page is Floating mode Normally a picture takes up a character position and will flow with the rest of the content However if you set Floating mode to Left or Right the picture will be shown next to other content This behaviour can be shown within the Jutoh editor it can be disabled to make it easier to see where in the content the image has actually been inserted Use View Preview Floating Objects Alt F10 to toggle this mode on and off The screenshot below shows a picture with a border and background colour floating to the right of other text It impinges on both the paragraph it s associated with and the next paragraph depending on the size of display The picture has been set to have a width of 50 of the display width set a 97 proportional width for a floating object to be sure that there will be sufficient space for it to float Floating turpis tempus enim eget elementum eros lacus eget ligula Cras cursus molestie leo id aliquam velit rhoncus eget Nullam elementum dapibus libero Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetur adipiscing elit Aliquam felis odio ultricies at est et faucibus rutrum nisi Ut id tempor risus Fusce et laoreet odio vel cursus lorem Nulla ut diam vel dolor mattis cursus condimentum et quam Sed sit amet imperdiet justo a auctor elit Mauris adipisc
162. bably have their manuscript in Microsoft Word format If you re using Linux you re more likely to have an ODT file ODT format originally started as SX W the native format of StarOffice which became OpenOffice org Now it s a recognised international standard and supported in other word processors including recent versions of 31 Microsoft Word If your word processor doesn t support ODT then you can download a copy of OpenOffice org for free and use it to convert from what your word processor outputs to ODT You might save from your word processor in RTF for example before loading it into OpenOffice org and saving as ODT Jutoh recognises the styles footnotes index entries and bookmarks in an ODT or DOCX file and therefore these are the best formats to use for getting your existing book into Jutoh These are the steps to take when importing a DOCX or ODT file First use File New Project or the New toolbar button to create a new project Steps 1 3 enter metadata a project location and layout choice as per Chapter 2 Getting Started Step 4 you can leave the import and style options as they are However you may wish to adjust the Resize images to max option if you want pictures to be resized differently than the default or not resized at all resizing can be done at book generation time Also page breaks will be removed from the imported file by default since book sections imply page breaks Change Remove any page brea
163. bar or from under the help window itself Here s a screenshot of the help facility showing a help topic a list of matching topics and the controls to limit the topics that Jutoh searches You can close any of these windows to see more of the help topic 22 s wales mob et maya ran ment buttons og and not in the n Windows you will n on a control to d then click on a e information nation including configurations using the Edit Enter keyboard L J Help oax naj E oo ATL Fe 6 a t y Home Upalevel Previous Next Working with pictures Inserting and editing pictures To show pictures in your book you can paste them into a page or choose Format Insert Picture If the image width is larger than the one specified in Resize images to max in Import Preferences the image will be resized J Search Help oax Q picture size Search lt lt Working with pictures if Jutoh manual KBO102 How can I crop or resize images before importing them into Jutoh Knowledge Base Creating fixed layout ebooks Jutoh manual Editing text Jutoh manual C Commands C Configurations Manuals kay Jutoh manual b Knowledge Base v E Tips 1 Introduction to Ebooks _ Match case Jutoh help search controls Most Jutoh dialogs have a Help button which shows the relevant help in a further dialog and not in the main help window so you don t have to return from the dialog to
164. be shown as part of the book for example in iBooks the cover will only appear on the bookshelf If you want the reader to be presented with the cover page first instead of the title page clear this option Don t clear this for Mobipocket files however Note that Calibre has an unusual interpretation of exclusion from reading order and shows such sections at the end of the book Cover image format specifies the image format for the cover design If Original is specified and the cover design has only one image object for example it was created from an existing cover image file then the original file is used without change Cover image width specifies the cover image width in pixels or 1 to use the default cover design width Options This category contains miscellaneous options controlling how Jutoh generates ebook output Generate title page check to generate a title page for the book It s usually better to create your own by hand Generate table of contents check to generate a table of contents page for the book either automatically it will not be visible in the project or manually whenever you run the TOC wizard it will be visible in the project Generate NCX check to generate a NavMap NCX This should only be disabled for Epub 3 files where it is optional Force simple NavMap check to force Jutoh to generate a simple NavMap based on section titles regardless of other settings Any custom HTML table
165. bedding a PDF into your book works in iBooks only 1 Add the PDF and PNG files to the project as media objects Document Add Media Document 2 Add this to your content in its own paragraph lt p gt lt a href media subwaymap pdf gt lt img src media map png alt img gt lt a gt lt p gt substituting your own file names 226 3 Apply the HTML style to the above paragraph EpubCheck will complain about the syntax which you can ignore Setting a background image The following method works for some Epub viewers including Adobe Digital Editions 1 Insert a new image into the Resources section of your Jutoh project using Document Add Media Document and selecting an image 2 Ensure that Generate media objects is enabled in your configuration 3 Right click on the section s you want to have a background image select Properties and insert the following into the Extra CSS field body background image url media image png background repeat repeat margin 0 0 0 0 where media image png is the path specified in the media object Alternatively if you want it on all pages you could add this once to the the style sheet click on the Edit button at the top of the Styles page in Project Properties check Custom CSS and paste the code Understanding encodings When importing text files Jutoh needs to know what the encoding of your files is since otherwise the files are just streams of bits th
166. ble in the editor The screenshot below shows marked up content for the first few paragraphs of Moby Dick with the 167 identifiers and their context listed in the Inspector To show span tag identifiers next to each tag as in the screenshot right click over span in the Object Palette click on Edit Object in the menu and set the Display mode setting to Show all valid properties Sample i Chapter 1 Loomings span id bookmark1 gt Call lt span span id bookmark2 gt me lt span sven id bookmar Ishmael lt an span id bookmark8 gt Some years ago never mind how long precisely having little or no money in my purse and nothing particular to interest me on shore thought I would sail about a little and see the watery part of the world lt span span id bookmark5 gt It is a way I have of driving off the spleen and regulating the circulation lt span Whenever I find myself growing grim about the mouth whenever it is a damp drizzly November in my soul whenever I find myself involuntarily pausing before coffin warehouses and bringing up the rear of every funeral I Qe oho Dd wee oe gee so as rs eons bc Se ek Palette x al 4 Styles Objects Inspector Favo gt Y F EE Desktop gt j Epub 3 Narration Sample f Bookmarks v Refresh bookmark4 Es Chapter 1 Loomings bookmark6 Call me Ishmael Some years ago never mind how long precisely having little
167. ccessibility Info The Formatting Templates tab There can be many formatting templates in the project but only one is active at a time as specified by Current formatting template Selecting a formatting template and clicking Edit shows a dialog with two tabs for editing and testing Editor Test This Template Sample bibliography item Type Book excerpt Shortname ANTH2000 lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 2 gt A aan j lt xi version 1 0 0 0 gt Corporate oulhan Anthemion Software lt Use the new variable Id so we can change it easily lt set name Id value of Number gt lt set name PersonSeparator value and gt lt A catch all formatting clause gt lt write if variable neq FormatAsList value 1 gt lt variable name Id gt lt text value gt Show all properties lt write gt Output lt write if variable set Title attributes emphasis gt lt variable name Title gt 1 My Excerpt Anthemion Software 2000 Edinburgh lt write gt lt write if variable set Book gt lt text value gt lt variable name Book gt lt write gt lt write if variable set Author gt lt text value gt lt variable name Author surnamesfirst attributes strong gt Test Reset to Default Go to Line OK
168. ce A B Preface Chapter 3 The Jutoh User Interf E Chapter 1 Introduction to Ebooks and Jutc A E Chapter 2 Getting Started Chapter 3 The Jutoh User Interface Chapter 3 The Jutoh User Interface E Chapter 4 Working With Project r de 2 ao es Files daii In the last chapter you learned how to import a file a Chapter 6 Editing and Formatting Content compile it without getting bogged down too much in E Chapter 7 Editing Your Book s Metadata details of the Jutoh tools Now we re going to take a In the last chapter you learned how to import a file and compile it without getting bogged down too much E Chapter 8 Creating Your Cover Design look at the Jutoh main window where you will do mos in the details of the Jutoh tools Now we re going to take a closer look at the Jutoh main window where Chapter 9 Understanding Configurations your ebook work you will do most of your ebook work El Chapter 10 Workina With Pictures Y gt Configuration Epub v Edit The Jutoh main window Menu bar and toolbar 1 Compie Check Launch 4 E Chapter 13 Working With String Tables E Chapter 3 Tt The Jutoh main window Menu bar and toolbar 1 Previewing a Jutoh book section using Chrome For further previewing and testing suggestions search for KB0118 How can I test my Epub and Kindle books in Jutoh help Summary Now you ll have a good idea of what s possible with content editing a
169. ch page you can choose and test the voice to use CereVoice CereVoice is a high quality TTS system from CereProc in Edinburgh coincidentally also Jutoh s home city On Windows and Mac you can use SAPI or the Apple Speech Manager to access CereVoice On Linux and on Windows and Mac as an optional alternative you will need to download the CereVoice command line program for Jutoh to use Download one of the CereVoice archives on the Jutoh download page and unpack it to a convenient location on your hard drive Now go to the Jutoh Preferences dialog click Speech and choose the CereVoice speech engine Click Properties and specify the location of the cerevoice executable on your system When using the external CereVoice program Jutoh should automatically find any installed SAPI or Apple Speech Manager voices when you click the Properties button Or you can manually add voices and their licences from the CereVoice properties dialog To use CereVoice on Linux you will need to have access to a Windows or Mac box to purchase and install the voices and then copy them to your Linux box On Windows you might find CereVoice files in a location such as c Program Files x86 CereProc CereVoic Heather 332 0 On Mac they may be in Library Speech Voices CereVoice xyz Contents Resources voice If you need a version of Jutoh with CereVoice SDK integration as an alternative to the SAPI Apple Speech Manager command line CereVoice methods please
170. cheme attribute is not specified or it can be an ISBN other kinds of identifier can also be used Use the element editor to add different kinds of identifier If left unspecified the default value will be the title of the book You can use a keyword intead of an actual identifier such as IBSN Then use string tables to fill in the value according to the current configuration This is described further in Chapter 24 Advanced Topics Another way to achieve per configuration ISBNs is simply to leave the Identifier field blank in the project metadata and use the Identifier configuration option instead By default this configuration option is filled in with a different UUID globally unique identifier for each configuration It s prefixed with urn uuid so that the identifier scheme is known You can also enter an ISBN instead prefixed with urn isbn However this technique isn t quite as flexible as the string table method because you can t use a keyword in the actual content such as the front matter Author Type your name here you can specify multiple authors via the element editor This becomes the creator element in the metadata and you can specify the creator roles using the element editor if you want to add creators other than author If not specified there will be no creator element in the metadata For descriptions of attributes that give more information about the type of author see www loc
171. ciently large not to have significant quality problems Text cannot reflow between pages or boxes All text will be restricted to its own box so certain kinds of book may be difficult to implement It s harder work to create a fixed layout book not only because each page requires precision but because there are several different fixed layout standards and you have to make sure that your 174 book is optimized for each one this can usually be accomplished via Jutoh configuration settings but it s definitely more time consuming to keep all requirements in mind and test on different devices How good a fixed layout book looks on a particular device is much more variable than for a reflowable book given the different device sizes aspect ratios and resolutions With a reflowable book the user can crank up the text size or change the font but with fixed layout parts of pages must be zoomed on small devices and for some devices there isn t an automatic zoom facility anyway Some ereaders can zoom images in reflowable books to full screen an advantage that may be lost with fixed layout books You are restricting your audience since not all devices can cope with fixed layout However this may not be a problem if you re targeting a particular device or class of devices Note that Barnes amp Nobles Nook fixed layout format is not supported by Jutoh and in fact is a proprietary format that cannot be used without a non dis
172. closure agreement with Barnes amp Noble This will probably be replaced by Epub 3 soon but meanwhile if you wish to allow Nook users to read your books you will need to make a reflowable version for them Kobo uses the iBooks format but not all ebook redistributors will allow you to upload fixed layout Epubs Check first Using specific fonts isn t so important in a reflowable book but in a fixed layout book you are likely to want to embed specific fonts both for aesthetic reasons and also to preserve the layout as much as possible Since embedding fonts in an ebook requires legal rights to do so this may require a rethink about what fonts you can use compared with an existing print book Fixed layout books may have a large file size especially if you pre render text in large background images If you have a lot of pages you may hit file size restrictions sooner than for a reflowable book Fixed layout books cannot be imported from an existing file format such as ODT or DOCX They can be exported to ODT with some restrictions please see the help topic Creating fixed layout books in the Jutoh application help for details Consider whether you really need fixed layout will it benefit the readers For example a guide book may look snazzy in fixed layout format but a tourist trying to zoom in on areas of text on a phone or small tablet may get frustrated What formats and features are supported by Jutoh These features are supporte
173. cnnnonnnnnoo 260 Step 4 Build a platforms A A A Ger 260 Further tips A A E A OA AE Sida 262 Essential read od A o 262 SU O O SS Ai oh coe A 262 CIO SS AD A NN 264 Appendix As Installing Jutoiniscsiicccscscsecsvcssusscnscscocsnsannassuedadeaadesssessessasdseessseauscdcsasseanteaeonsaseaswaceseowee 268 Estalla on WW OWS res oases co o ea 268 staal AT oa Mac OSX de if 269 Installing Oda AE RARAS E A dae eda 270 How to use Jutoh with an external TA ds 271 A A ORN oi ea 271 Using a mobile diver dd ai 272 Using a mobile drive for SEUA td a dE E oe i 212 Running Jutoh from a mobile ii A A a 273 Launching Jutoh on Wind WS ninia ad 273 Launching Jutoh OA UA A Sia 273 Esunchiny Jutoh on Mac e ara hraat 273 Appendix B Configuring Jato ido 274 AE ACA dodo 274 Conversion and checking App ICAO do 276 T xt t sp ch CON PUN a tn A AN AE E A T A 277 CAU dato int 278 A RN 278 ESP NE es a PO eee ieee Maia ua aia 278 LAME MIPS Encoders niia nanoen oa todas i a Seiad tele e Aa E 279 Customising shortcuts and Tavo ai AAA 279 O alae ede 282 CUSTOMIIS o A A A A SA A E E E coments eile sahara Sides 284 Cu stomising Auto Ttepl C ap isinin aaen cada 285 App arance Options menier A E EEE A E a dt 287 ix DENNIS a Del E 289 PLENO PI A EE e hea en in hte 289 Miscellaneous OPUS aaa 291 Appendix C The Jutoh Box Model iauc ccscictsasesnssceonscsesanscesocesoadsceeswsesodesssesesesscesscepestueegssocseceonsueosencsie 293 Appendix D The Bibliographic
174. commands on the Document menu All documents in a project are stored in the same Jutoh project file Epub file This is the industry standard open file format for flowable ebooks it uses XHTML for the content EPUB is defined in detail at idpf org Version 2 of the standard is currently the most used but version 3 is gradually being implemented Jutoh can generate Epub 2 and some features of Epub 3 All ebook readers apart from Amazon s Kindle can read Epub 2 files Epub readers usually have quirks of their own and so some optimization of Epub can be required for each platform Favourite There are two kinds of favourite in Jutoh the dominant meaning used in the documentation is 265 favourite style command or symbol that can appear on the Favourites Y toolbar button or in the Favourites tab of the Formatting Palette These are defined using the command View Customize Shortcuts The other less used meaning is a favourite project file as listed on the Favourites tab on the Organizer palette When you open a project it is added to these favourites for quick access later Keyboard shortcut A key combination for applying a command or style or inserting a symbol There are two kinds of shortcut in Jutoh primary shortcut such as Ctrl B and secondary shortcut such as Ctrl Ctrl T A secondary shortcut allows a greater number of shortcuts to be defined by using the Ctrl prefix Fixed layout ebook A fixed layo
175. configuration to use the new style sheet via the Style 209 sheet configuration option Another example say you have a character style that you use for telephone numbers Edit this character style and set Say as to telephone Now all telephone numbers marked with this style will be spoken with individual digits and pauses between number groups 4 Use Pause objects and punctuation Punctuation affects how content is read and adding commas and semicolons can break phrases into more manageable chunks Parentheses can also result in a change of intonation Punctuation can be added in the Alias property as well as regular content If you don t want to change the content s punctuation you can add pause objects for example to give more breathing space after a heading As described above you can add the pause to a paragraph style rather than an actual object and the paragraphs will automatically gain a pause after the heading before or both depending on the Pause property value 5 Use conditional formatting You can bracket pieces of content in condition objects as described in Chapter 23 Conditional Formatting so that content will appear in one format and not another You could use this to add extra spoken content or remove some content for a particular configuration that is intended to be a more brief version of the document Since audio files are harder to navigate and you can t instantly grasp the document structure using vis
176. convenience You can Rename or Delete the selected object and change the selected object s order in the list with the up and down arrows You can save the current design as a template file to use for subsequent designs using Save and you can browse and apply other templates by clicking on Templates Click on Reset to clear all objects apart from the background and Preview shows the design at the actual pixel size The following topics describe the three tabbed editor pages which are used to specify how the selected object is displayed 71 Object size and position In this page adjust the size and position of an object using the up down controls or by entering values manually The X and Y positions can be absolute relative to a parent object specified in the Relative to field or a percentage of the parent or centred with respect to the parent The width and height can be absolute or a percentage of the parent If no parent is specified the object dimensions are relative to the background object where applicable Object background The object background page determines how the background texture is drawn The Style field takes one of a number of values e Transparent the object is not drawn This can be useful if the object is meant as a place holder to be the parent object for other objects for example if the object represents the label area of the book containing text e Colour the object is drawn as a solid c
177. converted from ODT do not support an extra overall border so if word processor compatibility is required you will need to form the table border using individual cell borders The Table Properties dialog helps you do this since the Borders page applies only cell borders Editing the template gallery AS we ve seen inserting a table or using Format Table Apply Template lets you choose from a gallery of templates using the Table Gallery dialog Jutoh adds a standard set of templates by default you can add your own or delete existing ones using the advanced menu options in the gallery dialog click on the lt button 137 The default table gallery is stored in a file in the standard application data area but you can open and save gallery files in arbitrary locations if you wish This could be useful for sharing templates with other users A template is defined as a series of formatting commands each command dealing with a range of cells You can t add an existing table from your document to a gallery but it s not too hard to use the Table Template Editor dialog to define new templates and it s more flexible than a simple reproduction of an existing table Having defined the formatting commands the user will be able to customise them as regions in the gallery dialog for example choosing a different colour for a Header region For more information on creating templates click on Help in the Table Template Editor dialo
178. copy of your cover design for example to upload to iTunes you can export it to one of several popular image formats via File Export Cover Design using the Cover Design Export dialog 72 Width 600 pixels Height 800 pixels File C projects WritingTools Jutoh UserGuideV2 CreatingEbooks Browse Type JPEG v Quality 80 Copy To Clipboard el Cancel Export Cover Design dialog This will use the cover design indicated by the current configuration You can select a different width and height from the values used in the book and your design will be scaled to this size You can also use Copy To Clipboard to paste the image into another application Specifying a cover for Kindle When uploading your ebook to Amazon you don t actually need to have the cover in your mobi file because you also upload a separate cover higher resolution cover to the KDP site So if you wish you can set the Cover design configuration option to none and ignore the Kindlegen warning about the lack of a cover The cover page versus the cover image If a design is specified the image will always be included in the book However Jutoh can also generate an XHTML page that embeds the image This is controlled by the configuration property Generate cover page It is recommended that you enable this in your Epub configuration unless uploading the Epub to Amazon without first converting to Mobipocket and disable this in your Mobip
179. cter Styles suppressing page break after a pattern matching all styles that should suppress a following page break Multiple patterns containing wildcards and can be separated by the pipe character String Tables Jutoh s string tables feature allows customisation of metadata cover design text and book content per configuration by substituting one string for another This category controls how the configuration uses existing string tables For more information see Chapter 13 Working With String Tables e Project string table specifies the project string table to be used in this configuration if any Project strings override global strings Global string table specifies the global string table to be used in this configuration Project strings override global strings Replace strings in content check to replace strings in book content as well as metadata and cover designs HTML Formatting This category contains various options used for HTML based formats 82 HTML version specifies how HTML code will be generated If this value is auto the value will be deduced from other settings Use XHTML specifies whether XHTML or HTML will be generated If this value is auto the value will be deduced from other settings Relaxed HTML if checked some HTML 5 Epub 3 tags will be permitted in HTML 4 Epub 2 such as wbr Note that this is likely to cause EpubCheck to fail
180. ctures and even picture slideshows Click on the Jutoh logo button at the bottom left for available Desktop commands File Edit Format Tools Document Book View Help 6 BIA 35 4 y Open Save Edit Cover Compile Check Projects Favourites Explorer iE Preface A i E Chapter 1 Introduction to Ebooks and Jut E Chapter 2 Getting Started Chapter 3 The Jutoh User Interface Chapter 4 Working With Projects Chapter 5 Importing Files E Chapter 6 Editing and Formatting Conten Chapter 7 Editing Your Book s Metadata i Chapter 8 Creating Your Cover Design Chapter 9 Understanding Configurations Chapter 10 Working With Pictures Chapter 11 Working With Indexes EA eua din tars MAA ee oe O R Documents Launch Previous wos Pl Jaton Create a new project Open a project Open the sample project Recent files CreatingEbooksUsingJutoh A trip to Perito Moreno glacier Formatting Sample Epub 3 Test Lena Ss 2 mM Home Options Help Welcome to Jutoh Welcome and thank you for choosing Jutoh You can use it to create books in Epub Kindle HTML and ODT formats You can import existing books in Word HTML and ODT formats The links below will help you get started We hope you enjoy using Jutoh If you have any problems search the help system or contact us via the support link below Search Help Help Contents Quick Start
181. cument you could start off using Microsoft Hazel then switch to CereVoice Heather for a paragraph 200 Strictly speaking although SAPI and Apple Speech Manager are listed as speech engines they just offer a general way to access underlying speech engines When you select a voice in SAPI you re really selecting an engine plus voice whether it s Microsoft s engine or the CereVoice engine or the Cepstral engine Voice data can sometimes be shared between methods of accessing speech engines For example if you buy CereVoice voices for use with SAPI you can also use them for the proprietary SSML based CereVoice engine When you configure CereVoice properties via the speech preferences page it will search for installed SAPI voices and their licences and add them to its list of known voices For more information on setting up Jutoh for text to speech generation please see Appendix B Configuring Jutoh Next let s look at the concepts of configurations and speech profiles which control various aspects of speech creation Configurations and speech profiles As we ve seen elsewhere in this book configurations determine what formats to generate and much else besides Audio files are created by a configuration whose option Generate MP3 is checked By default Jutoh creates a configuration called MP3 but you can create one or more yourself from the Project Properties Configurations panel A speech profile is similar t
182. cut direct or secondary shortcut prefixed with Ctrl You can also check Favourite to have it appear in the Favourites menu as described above under Special symbols For more about this see Appendix B Configuring Jutoh Using fonts Ebook readers tend to have a limited range of fonts so if possible use as few fonts as possible You re on safe ground if you use Times New Roman Arial or Helvetica and Courier New If you must use different fonts specify them in the named paragraph style and not on an ad hoc basis You cannot use fonts that happen to be on your system and expect them to turn up on someone s ebook reader If you have unusual font requirements the only thing you can do is embed a font For this you need to have a copyright free font such as fonts from the DejaVu family Embed it by adding an Embedded Font Document and specify a font substitution in your Epub configuration such as Times New Roman DejaVuSans For more details see Chapter 24 Advanced Topics If your system doesn t have a particular font that s used in the project then when the project is opened Jutoh will use a special global string table called Font Substitutions to try to find an equivalent font that is available If you use fonts not specified in this table you can add more substitutions go to Preferences click Strings select the Font Substitutions table and add more strings or edit existing ones to add references to
183. d iBooks Epub output also used by Kobo Kindle KF8 output Epub 3 text and image objects positioned using absolute coordinates automatic generation of magnification panels in KF8 for text objects image objects and background images 175 e the option of pre rendering text and images to support transparency and other requirements These features are not supported HTML templates e the ability to show magnified objects that are different from the source objects for example showing a hidden object in response to touching an area in the page the read aloud feature sometimes used in children s books e percentage units for Kindle e relative positioning of images and boxes In addition the usual limitations of Jutoh formatting apply to text boxes such as no columns tables and further text boxes without resorting to raw HTML Creating a fixed layout project When you run the New Project Wizard in Jutoh 2 you will see a new layout choice page offering a choice between a regular reflowable book as before and a fixed layout book Layout Choice Choose whether to create a normal reflowable book such as a novel or self help book or a fixedtayout book such as a children s picture book You can import from an existing document into a reflowable book but not into a fixed4ayout book O Normal reflowable book Book style Portrait and landscape v Page size 512 WxH 800 Browse Initial p
184. d all sections match y Qa di o cae o Specifving sections to exclude in the new configuration Next for each section document you want to omit from the sample open the document properties dialog using right click or control click over the project outline or using the menu command Document Document Properties Shift Alt Enter Type notsample into the Tags field 219 General Notes CSS JavaScript Media Page Advanced General properties Tite Chapter Six File name Tags notsample Guide type none y Uses JavaScript _ SvG _ MathML _ Remote resources Show in Table of Contents NavMap Spine Word count 2693 Compute Include this section for these formats v EPUB MOBI ODT Entering a tag into the book section properties Now when you compile the Epub Sample configuration only the desired sections those not matching notsample will be included The other configurations will still compile the whole book because if the Include Exclude sections matching tags options are left blank all sections are included Your table of contents will still work in the sample despite the absence of some documents because Jutoh won t complain about broken links to documents that are deliberately excluded and will simply omit the page links so the reader will be able to see the list of chapters in the full book Actually this 1s not quite true
185. d you can double click in the list of Favourites a tab next to the Projects tab Or you can browse for the required project using the Explorer tool next to Favourites You can also use the File Recent Projects menu Yet another method is to double click on the file in your operating system s file manager and more techie users might want to invoke Jutoh from the command line passing the project file name If you make a project edit such as adding a new document or editing project properties an asterisk will appear next to the project name in the title bar until the project is saved If you edit an actual document such as a book section an asterisk will appear next to the document title in the title bar To save both document changes and any project changes use the Save button File Save command or type CtrI S By default Jutoh will create a backup file a file with jutohbak appended to the name before opening the file so if there is a problem you can revert to the backup Jutoh also regularly auto saves any data that hasn t yet been manually saved so if there is a computer crash it can restore the data the next time you open the project This auto save data is stored within the original project file However computer software and hardware can and does go wrong so don t forget to back up your files frequently preferably to multiple locations You can use Jutoh s own simple archiving and backup facility if you wish see File Man
186. d for use on different kinds of reader device When you create a Jutoh project Jutoh s New Project Wizard presents you with the option to create an initial set of configurations one per format supported Generally you can leave the defaults as they are unless you know you definitely won t need some of them Later you can add change and delete configurations Important note although you can enable different formats in the same configuration don t be tempted to do this for generating say Epub and Mobipocket files from the configuration Jutoh optimizes these formats differently so you need to use independent configurations Editing configurations To edit a configuration you can click on Edit on the toolbar to show the Project Properties and then click on Configurations Or you can click on the Edit button next to the drop down list of configurations in the Control Panel this will show you the currently selected configuration 3 CHAPTER 9 UNDERSTANDING CONFIGURATIONS Metadata Configurations i Cover Styles x El Bile Indexes Configurations i Pen OpenDocument i Text Strings LTR v Options Fixed Layout Configuration for building Epub files Accessibility Locations Info Book folder i Document gt Book file name Preview file name Metadata Identifier urn uuid 548f6341 7b22 4f23 96 5d 08ae6cc127ab Formats Generate Epub Generate Mobipocket O
187. d your own alphabet descriptions place the XML files in the Alphabets folder under the Jutoh application data folder where Jutoh keeps its other settings On Windows this might be in c Users lt user name gt AppData Roaming Jutoh 2 Alphabets Alphabets are read when first editing a lexicon in the current Jutoh session To add alphabets for selection in the user interface without adding a whole XML description file edit the setting Preferences Advanced Lexicon alphabets Please note that this an experimental feature and there are few and incomplete alphabet descriptions as yet Please contact us if you would like to help improve this feature Alphabet syntax An alphabet file consists of an alphabet top level element containing phone elements that describe each phone of an alphabet This is an example of part of an alphabet file lt xml version 1 0 encoding utf 8 gt lt alphabet version 1 0 xml lang en GB name Microsoft SAPI American English abbreviation x microsoft sapi description vendor Microsoft phone separator syllable separator word separator samp supports equivalents gt lt phone value example word example pronunciation description Phone separator equivalents gt lt phone value example word example pronunciation description Syllable separator equivalents gt lt alphabet gt The attributes are defined as follows version is the al
188. ded to the project properties to be used to tailor the content of the book according to the Smashwords publishing platform 147 CHAPTER 13 WORKING WITH STRING TABLES String tables Smashwords Strings v Copyright Copyright c Felix Carswell 2012 Edition Smashwords Edition Tite Lena or The Girl in the Caf The Strings page of the Project Properties dialog The Project string table property of the Smashwords configuration will be set to Smashwords Strings and the keywords Copyright Edition and Title can be used in the book text so that the Smashwords edition of the book contains the appropriate strings A string table would be defined for each configuration or perhaps one fallback table General Strings would be used for non Smashwords editions Troubleshooting string tables If keywords are not being substituted check that these requirements are met Each keyword name in the content must be formatted with either no style or a single style e Keyword names are case sensitive Each keyword must be enclosed in symbols You must set the project and or global table names in your configuration 148 You must check the configuration property Replace strings in content Summary You may never use string tables but now you know the feature is there and what it s for you have an extra tool in case you need to do global or per configuratio
189. definitions entered above will be written to the CSS file Style Sheet Properties dialog Add any CSS definitions you like in the field and they will be added to the beginning of the CSS file that Jutoh generates as well as the individual style definitions generated by Jutoh or specified explicitly by the user 142 Special style names In some cases Jutoh will use the name of a style to influence the e book output e Heading 1 Heading 2 and so on are output to HTML as h1 h2 etc You can change the value of the Heading style prefix configuration property to a different prefix or clear it to prevent Jutoh generating HTML heading styles Since the ebook reader will apply its default heading styling to paragraphs marked as headings you may find precise control of heading appearance easier to achieve if you switch this off in your configuration e The HTML paragraph style outputs the content of the paragraph directly to the HTML file without processing e The HTML Text character style outputs the spanned text directly to the HTML file without processing The word Preformatted in a style indicates that HTML should use the pre tag Importing and exporting style sheets When creating a new project or editing an existing one you can import style sheets that were previously saved with a stylesheet extension In the Styles page of the project properties dialog import style styles with Import and sa
190. determine the offset from the regular floating position Only the Top offset affects the display within the editor DOCX import supports these offsets Editing margin border background and advanced properties The Margins page shows fields for margins the space outside any border and padding the space between any border and the object Picture Size Margins Left Right 10 Top Bottom 10 Padding JLeft 0 Right 0 Drop 0 Bottom 0 Editing picture margins 99 To visualise the difference between margins and padding see Appendix C The Jutoh Box Model In the Borders page you can specify the border width in pixels cm or points The style of the border is restricted to solid dotted or dashed within the editor but other selections may show in the ereader Picture Size Margins Borders Background Advanced Left Solid Right Solid v Top Solid vi Bottom Solid Synchronize values Editing the picture border You can specify a rounded corner although this is only supported on some ereaders You can also specify an extra border called the outline but this is not recommended as it is not supported in all export formats The Background page simply allows specification of the background colour which will only show for a picture if you also specify some padding Finally the Advanced page lets you enter an identifier CSS class name Epub type JavaScript event handlers a
191. dle platform doesn t yet allow arbitrary JavaScript but is sure to in the future Jutoh Plus users can also edit multiple JavaScript files within Jutoh and control the HTML for a document more fully Form objects Via the Object Palette Jutoh supports the following objects that you can use to input or display data button a button you can use to submit form data or take some other action e canvas an area for drawing graphics e form wrap your form objects in a form tag in order to submit data to a JavaScript event handler or remote server if permitted Using a form is not necessary for interactivity e input this implements many types of input field depending on the value of its Input type attribute e meter a gauge control for representing an amount 190 output a place for output where you can specify which input objects contribute to the output e progress a progress bar e select a control that gives the user a choice of values e textarea a text field The screenshot below shows some of the available controls taken from the Epub 3 sample project This is a button inserted as a button tag My This is a button inserted as an input tag This is a text area Default text This is a checkbox Checkbox This is a radio button Radio This is a select control Three four five This is an input image gt This is a meter 1 This is a progress control HE This is an output tag that will s
192. do The optional third party Epub checker can highlight syntax and structural errors while Jutoh itself checks for some structural errors during book compilation Let s deal with each of these categories in turn Syntax errors Let s focus on the Epub format to begin with When you click on Compile in Jutoh and you have an Epub configuration selected an Epub file is created that contains a variety of XML and XHTML files Jutoh takes great care that the files are well formed but occasionally errors may be introduced For example you might delete a bookmark needed for a link or you might enter bad metadata such a date in the wrong format Or if you have inserted verbatim XHTML into your book using the special HTML style the error could be badly formed XHTML syntax such as a missing angled bracket 233 This is where Epub checking comes in You can use the Check button in the Control Panel or the Book Check menu command or the F8 key or the Check toolbar button VY Pp ompile Check Lauri The Check toolbar button Click 1t to run the third party EpubCheck tool written by Adobe in the Java language which is bundled with Jutoh It s recommended that you enable automatic checking after each Epub compile by going to Preferences and in the General Preferences page enable the Check Epub after compiling option This will save you from forgetting to check the file and will also combine the Epub errors together wi
193. due to failing EpubCheck For any given paragraph in a list both the paragraph style and list style are used Since the current paragraph indent is added to the list style indent choose a non indented paragraph style for your lists to avoid a double indentation Jutoh will warn you if you have used a paragraph style with indentation within a list If you need to create a special non indented paragraph style for use within lists You can have multiple paragraphs per list by placing the editor cursor just behind the bullet or number and hitting the backspace key This will turn the item into a continuation paragraph without a bullet or number but with the same indentation as a regular list item Note that for Mobipocket output this is simulated by putting line breaks between list paragraphs since genuine multiple list item paragraphs are not possible in KF7 format Jutoh will make an attempt to convert indented paragraphs in DOCX documents to continuation paragraphs according to the context but if this is tripped up by complex formatting you will need to correct it within Jutoh by applying a list style and then deleting the bullets Another way of creating list like formatting but without using list styles is to use an indented paragraph style with a non indented heading for the item heading For example 58 Apples Apples are roundish in shape and crunchy They come in a variety of well varieties with Granny Smith being one of
194. e Unsupported SSML features The following SSML 1 1 elements are not currently supported by Jutoh audio desc lookup token w In addition not all of the finer details of SSML elements are supported Please ask if you need further 305 SSML support 306 Appendix F Speech Profile Reference gt C SE A speech profile is a collection of properties related to generating speech audio via a text to speech engine there is always one default profile and you can create further profiles and associate them with configurations via the Speech profile configuration option Speech profiles determine the operation of immediate narration previewing of editor content and creation of audio files Formats These properties specify the output and intermediate source formats to be used Generate speech WAV files Enables or disables WAV audio file generation for speech output Generate speech MP3 files Enables or disables MP3 audio file generation for speech output Speech MP3 bit rate The MP3 bit rate in kbs 128kbs is the default bit rate but for speech audio you can reduce it to 48kbs without significant loss of quality and your files will be smaller A value of auto uses the value specified in Preferences Speech source format The format that Jutoh submits to the text to speech system A value of auto uses the best method for the chosen speech engine Keep source files Keeps the generated source files after audio file generation
195. e used to indicate that the document is a special index You can suppress this special index generation by clearing the Special table of contents formatting configuration option Specifying and stripping link styling Links from the contents page will be formatted using the character style specified by Link style in the Table of Contents Wizard Preferences page By default this is the style called URL that Jutoh adds to your style sheet by default This makes the links look good in Jutoh but if your book reader uses different colours for links by default you may have a colour clash So you can have Jutoh strip out the URL styling when generating the ebooks by specifying the value of URL attribute removal style in your configuration It ll only strip out attributes that are the same in the style to you specify in the configuration and the actual link which means you can have specific colours and other attributes in your content without them also being removed The same logic applies to indexes and footnotes Creating a table of contents manually If Jutoh s automatic contents building facility isn t for you you can construct the NavMap and table of contents page manually Build your NavMap in Project Preferences under Indexes Contents by creating individual entries and linking them to bookmarks or overall sections Now you have a choice of how to create the table of contents page You can run the Table of Contents Wizard clearing
196. e HTML in the default web browser Or you can use the command Book Preview Section which will show only the current section in the web browser this is good for quickly testing changes You can search online for Epub 3 JavaScript examples and tutorials The supplied project Epub 3 Sample has very simple JavaScript code that outputs the identifier of the clicked form object using the onclick event handler Summary We ve seen how advanced properties in Jutoh objects plus the ability to include JavaScript files and code can let you make pages interactive for those platforms that support it In the next chapter we describe how you can add extra structure to make your Epub 3 books easier for disabled readers to navigate 192 Chapter 20 Making Your Books Accessible IO In this chapter we discuss how your books can be made more accessible to disabled readers by targeting the Epub 3 format Since the most commonly used ereader hardware and software do not support accessibility features this chapter may not yet be relevant to you For an alternative way to make your documents accessible see Chapter 21 Working With Text To Speech Introduction If you intend to create books that are accessible to disabled readers you need to understand how to use Jutoh to add extra information to your book Jutoh has features that can help automate the insertion of accessibility information and the remaining manual settings are quite str
197. e Jutoh and ereader URL colours are slightly different It s better that the ereader shows links in the default syle than in a mixture You can reapply the intended attributes using CSS properties as above Jutoh and Epub 3 There is support for some Epub 3 features you can switch Epub 3 support on by setting the Epub version configuration property to 3 The adaptations to Epub 3 are currently as follows e The new style table of contents file is generated while the old NCX file is included for backwards compatibility e Epub 2 guide types are converted to Epub 3 equivalents where possible e if documents contain guide types a landmarks table of contents is generated e metadata is generated using the new Epub 3 syntax with mandatory date metadata e XHTML files have the correct preamble e JavaScript code can be embedded also in Epub 2 5 i e iBooks Eub 3 document structure can be added see Chapter 20 Making Your Books Accessible e narration audio files can be synchronised with content See Chapter 17 Adding Narration To Your Book Jutoh is distributed with EpubCheck 3 which means it can check both Epub 2 and Epub 3 files if you have Java installed Summary This chapter has described a variety of features that advanced books might need For other miscellaneous topics you may also find it useful to search Jutoh s help by typing into the Search Help field in the Jutoh toolbar Next we look at var
198. e com apple ibooks display options xml when necessary Optimize for Mobipocket anchors are inserted before paragraphs to prevent style loss on navigation as recommended by Amazon guidelines and no paragraph tags are used within a list item Mobipocket anchor optimization if cleared and Optimize for Mobipocket is checked anchors are no longer inserted before paragraphs You might want to clear this if you have long paragraphs containing footnotes for example and want to achieve accurate navigation regardless of any styling side effects that can be caused by bookmarks within paragraphs on the Kindle platform Credit Jutoh adds Jutoh as a book producer in the Epub Mobipocket metadata Start page guide type specifies the guide type that will be substituted for XY ySTARTPAGE in a section s guide type to indicate the first reading page For iBooks it is other reader start page and for Mobipocket it is text Visible URLs specifies whether the URL will be added to the text for printable documents If None no URLs will be added If Always the URL will always be added If Intelligent Jutoh will check whether the URL is already in the linked text Epub version Specifies the Epub version to generate This category controls style related options More about styles can be found in Chapter 12 Working With Style Sheets e Style sheet specifies the style sheet to be used in this configuration Par
199. e document A source code document stores HTML JavaScript or CSS code The file is stored within the project file and copied to the book when compiling Most users won t need this kind of document since Jutoh generates code from sections in your book but sometimes it s helpful to include additional code for example to update documents dynamically via JavaScript to implement a built in quiz At the time of writing only iBooks allows this but it will become more prevalent with the widespread adoption of Epub 3 So that most users are not exposed to more complexity than necessary source code documents can only be created and edited in Jutoh Plus Standard Jutoh can still open save and compile projects containing source code documents For more information please see the Jutoh Plus guide at www jutoh com jutohplus htm Summary In this chapter you have learned how projects and documents work It was probably filed in the boring but important drawer in your brain Next we look at how you can get your existing work into Jutoh 30 Chapter 5 Importing Files gt ONT In Chapter 2 Getting Started we briefly showed how to import an existing file into Jutoh In this chapter we will cover this aspect in more detail including what the best import format is and why What can Jutoh import Jutoh can import from several different kinds of file but with varying quality depending on the format These are the supported formats e
200. e for a box to Right or Left make sure that the text box will fit on small displays Otherwise the ereader may choose not to make it float You could specify a percentage width such as 50 to ensure that the box will fit Importing boxes Text boxes will be imported from DOCX ODT and HTML files In DOCX import in addition to import of true text boxes any paragraph that has a border will be interpreted as a text box For text box import to work in HTML the box must have a border Using box styles You can create box styles just as you would create paragraph and other styles but with a different set of pages for editing box attributes Box styles can be used with text boxes and images but not tables If you select a box style in the box properties dialog or apply one using the Formatting Palette the box will reflect any changes in the box style For example if you defined a Warning box style and applied 161 it several times in your project you could decide to change the border and background colour in the box style and it would automatically be reflected in the boxes that use the style assuming that the changed attributes weren t overidden by the individual boxes Images that have box styles are similarly updated Currently you can t specify within a box style what paragraph styles should be applied to box content To apply a box style to a text box or image using the Formatting Palette show the available box
201. e in detail the types of file that can be imported and how to tell Jutoh to split it into sections In Chapter 6 Editing and Formatting Content you will learn all about the Jutoh editor and how to use it to edit and format text and pictures In Chapter 7 Editing Your Book s Metadata we look at metadata the information that describes your book to the ebook reader In Chapter 8 Editing Your Cover Design we put Jutoh s built in cover designer under the microscope If you will only be using previously prepared artwork for your book s you can skip this chapter In Chapter 9 Understanding Configurations the important concept of configuration is explained and each configuration property is explained in detail In Chapter 10 Working With Pictures we describe various aspects of importing pictures and specifying how they will appear in the generated book In Chapter 11 Working With Indexes we explain how Jutoh can help you build a table of contents and also an alphabetical index footnotes or endnotes and a bibliography In Chapter 12 Working With Style Sheets you ll learn all about styles and style sheets which are important in formatting your document consistently In Chapter 13 Working With String Tables we describe a trick for customising your books by using keywords in your content that are substituted by values that can depend on the current configuration xiii In Chapter 14 Working With Table
202. e more advanced Epub 3 format does not have wide adoption yet but there is software such as AZARDI and Readium that can read Epub 3 Jutoh supports a number of Epub 3 features such as narration and interactivity via JavaScript Amazon bought and adopted the Mobipocket format for their Kindle devices Mobipocket is like a cut down version of Epub in fact the Kindlegen application used to compile a Mobipocket book uses all the same files that you see in an Epub 2 book distilling them to a proprietary format However the way a Mobipocket reader interprets the book is different from an Epub reader with limitations on formatting that have to be borne in mind by the author or worked around by the authoring software Amazon s new KF8 format eliminates many of these limitations and Jutoh smooths over most of the differences between the two formats PDF has always had a strong showing in ebooks on the desktop because it can faithfully render the layout you see in publications such as brochures with a direct translation from a conventional word processor file However it is less satisfactory on mobile devices because PDFs cannot generally be reflowed to take advantage of small screens and requests for different type size So on a small screen you end up having to zoom in and out and pan around the document Clearly this is not a good general solution for reading books unless you have a device with a particularly large screen and even the
203. e names The Box style field can be used to assign a named style for specifying borders margins and other box attributes without having to redo individual attributes for each image If you specify a box style and also change attributes individually an automatic style will be generated based on the original style Alternative text is used to provide brief descriptive text that can be used in the absence of the ability to see the image SVG alternative is used to provide an SVG vector image instead of the bitmap image and is discussed further below If you check Preserve original format Jutoh will ignore configuration settings and always write the picture in the original format This can be useful for making exceptions when most pictures are fine as compressed JPEGs but some pictures don t look good when compressed such as line art or charts 96 The controls under File operations allow you to export import paste and edit pictures without changing other properties Edit will launch an external editor that has been set up using Configure Editors in Preferences Helpers Undo will undo import and paste operations performed within the dialog but you cannot undo these operations once you close the dialog Editing size properties Clicking on the Size tab shows this page Picture Size Margins Borders Background Advanced Floating Floating mode Size _ Width 9 _ Height _ Min width _ Min height Max width w _ M
204. e native ODT format But sometimes ebook distributors can t handle the special formatting so you can switch these off with the configuration options Special index formatting Special footnote formatting and Special table of contents formatting In addition you can clear the option Use outline levels to remove references to outline levels in heading styles Normally outline levels are useful as hints for ereaders such as Adobe Digital Editions to display headings as a table of contents but again this can confuse some distributors such as Smashwords Special formatting and outline levels are all disabled by default for the Smashwords OpenDocument configuration to prevent errors when submitting documents to their Meatgrinder conversion software When exporting to ODT and opening in LibreOffice or OpenOffice you may find that there are some extra blank paragraphs which may also result in blank pages If this happens and you don t intend to open the file in Microsoft Word clear the configuration option Add blank paragraphs for Word The reason for this option being on by default is that Word messes up formatting if you don t have a blank paragraph before a page break This can manifest itself in erroneous justification in the last line of a paragraph If you only intend to open the document in LibreOffice or OpenOffice for example for PDF output then it s safe to clear the option Specifying page layout Setting the paper size and
205. e of the reference object Same Height give an object the same height as the reference object Same Size give an object the same size as the reference object In addition to snapping to margins you can snap positions to a notional grid Snap to grid whose granularity you can control with the Size field You can also check Show grid to show the gridlines 181 Adding borders You can add borders when editing the properties of each object These borders will be created using HTML and CSS if you wish to add a border permanently to an image you can right click on an image and choose Add Border A dialog will be shown for you to choose an outer border and an optional inner border You also have the option to add a larger border to take into account the scaling of the image if the image resolution is greater than the size of the object on the page Pre rendering objects Pre rendering can be done for none all or some text and image objects in your project Pre rendered objects will be drawn onto the background image and will no longer have their own independent existence in the ebook Pre rendered objects cannot be magnified on Kindle You can override per object settings with the Pre render objects configuration option for example if one ebook platform requires background image only pages and another platform benefits from independent objects Here are some reasons why you might wish to check Pre render this object in your object region p
206. e see Appendix B Configuring Jutoh Note that you can check for updates and install new versions using Check for Updates on the Help menu Installing on Windows Jutoh Download the setup file from www jutoh com download htm and run the installation program This will create a program group called Anthemion Jutoh x y or other name if you have chosen a different name This folder can be accessed via the Start menu under Programs The folder contains shortcuts to the program ReadMe and Uninstall program You can uninstall Jutoh either by double clicking the Uninstall Jutoh icon in the Jutoh group or by invoking the Windows Control Panel double clicking on Add Remove Programs and then choosing the Anthemion Jutoh item There is also a PortableApps version which you can download instead of using the setup file The PortableApps installer uses a version of Jutoh that is not tied to the registry and so can be easily run off an external drive Jutoh also has its own way of running from external drives so if you have installed the regular version of Jutoh you can use the Mobile Preferences dialog invoked via View Mobile Preferences to install Jutoh onto an external drive Kindlegen You will need to download and install Amazon s Kindlegen if you wish to create Mobipocket Kindle files In the Jutoh Preferences dialog under Helpers or in the Setup Wizard click on Help Me Install Kindlegen Then as per the instructions for Windo
207. e the citation text already present you can check Use custom citation text where present If this is cleared Jutoh will only use its own formatting as specified here Or you may wish to remove all the imported citation text using Remove All so that you can use Jutoh s citation formatting most of the time but occasionally override it via the Custom citation property A handy option is Merge adjacent citations which if checked tells Jutoh to merge citations instead of showing them separately So this way you can have Smart 2011 Bloggs 2012 instead of Smart 2011 Bloggs 2012 if citations are next to each other You will only see this in the compiled book and not in the editor Managing bibliographic databases As mentioned above Jutoh always maintains an Internal Database of items collated from the project s citations and other databases to put into the bibliography You can create further databases from which citations can be selected or which can be added in their entirety to the bibliography To manage these go to the Entries tab of the Bibliography page 125 CHAPTER 11 WORKING WITH INDEXES Contents Index Footnotes amp Endnotes Bibliography Bibliography entries Source for entries Additional References l Fixed Layout Available databases i Page Layout Internal Database 6 items i Additional References 2 items Word Bibliography 3 items Reimport Export rom wo
208. e the units to use for font sizes Some platforms require pixel units for fixed layout books If you specify Default Jutoh will decide what units to use Font size adjustment specify an increment in points to add to all font sizes You might use this to generate large print books Font pixel scale when fonts are specified in pixels the size shown in Jutoh can differ from pixel size as rendered in HTML This scale factor helps to compensate for this difference RTL direction sets all paragraph styles to have right to left text direction URL attribute removal style specifies the character style containing URL attributes to remove so that only the default link attributes specified by the book reader software or in custom CSS will be used For example if you specify URL in this property containing blue and underlining attributes then blue underlined links will have both attributes removed in the final book However if a link was styled with red then the red colour will be retained and just any underlining removed If this property is set to none or left empty then no attribute removal will be done 83 Use heading text size if enabled text sizes will be written for styles that match Heading style prefix Clear this to use the ebook viewer s default heading sizes Preserve spacing after page break if enabled an invisible separator will be generated to preserve spacing after a page break that is usually lost S
209. eatures and documents E Options shows the Preferences dialog Mi Help shows or hides the help window containing the Jutoh manual Q Search Help type text and press return to search in the Jutoh manual and knowledge base This is your first port of call when you get stuck Organizer 2 The Organizer shows all the documents in your project in the Projects tab A document corresponds to a chapter or section such as a title page You can click on each document to view and edit it You can view multiple projects in the Organizer if you wish though you will have to enable this first via the Preferences dialog Documents can be dragged to change the position in the book and a context menu is available if you right click over a document We ll go into this in more detail in Chapter 4 Working 18 with Projects Next to the Projects tab are two more tabs Favourites and Explorer The Favourites tool shows a list of favourite projects for quick access you can add to or remove from this list The Explorer tool lets you browse your disks and open projects delete them or add to Favourites Control Panel 3 The Control Panel has a Build tab which shows the current configuration loosely the current format to be generated with buttons for compiling checking and launching the book Typically you will e Select a configuration for a particular format such as Epub e Click Compile to build the ebook e Click Check to check the ebook
210. ebook You can eliminate non paragraph styling by selecting text and then choosing Format Text Reset Text Formatting 141 CSS customisation If you find that Jutoh s CSS style creation is inadequate for any reason you can tell Jutoh what CSS style to use instead of the current definition via the Advanced page in the style editor These will be used only for HTML Epub and Mobipocket file generation The CSS customisation fields are illustrated in the style editor dialog shown above You can see the current CSS definition as it will be output to Epub and Mobipocket Check Use custom CSS and edit the definition if you want to use an alternative definition Remember that if you subsequently make changes to the style through the usual dialogs it won t change your CSS definition until you clear the Use custom CSS option Note that if you customise style definitions or use the HTML style be sure to click Check after generating an Epub file in case you have introduced HTML errors When you check a project Jutoh invokes Adobe s EpubCheck tool to examine the Epub structure and content You need to have Java installed for EpubCheck to work If you need further CSS customisation you can edit the sheet properties by clicking the Style Sheet Properties button and checking Use custom CSS Style sheetname Default Style Sheet Description The default style sheet Use custom CSS body widows 1 orphans 1 Any custom CSS
211. ech objects have start and end tags while pause has one tag These objects have speech properties you can set one property value or several as required The speech properties are documented in Appendix E Here s an example of markup Chapter 1 Norfolk England 1816 After five nights Griselda had got used On the first night the prospect was speech gt horrifying lt speech but there had been no choice There was no inn for miles and she had been too tired to do anything but roll herself in the capaciou father lt ald chanting coat male a nnilla fram her narl and hane far tha hect She had fallan acleen he Speech markup with a tooltip showing In this example the speech object has a single property Voice emphasis set to strong A tooltip appears when you hover over the object showing the property values To create markup click on the Speech tab in the Formatting Palette and then click on the Objects sub tab Now select some text in your project and then click Speech Object A property editor will be shown and you can edit properties such as Speak as and Alias Often available values are shown when you click on the property value and then on the arrow that appears When you press OK you will see the start and end objects enclosing the previously selected text You can also add a pause with Pause Object and a new lexicon word with Pronunciation based on the selected word in the editor If you have lexicon doc
212. ech systems pronounce difficult words or phrases In the Accessibilities Speech tab under Lexicons click Add and then in the Lexicon dialog choose either PLS resource or String tables If you choose PLS resource you can specify a pls file that you have added or will add to the project as a media resource or code document It needs to be a path relative to the other content files for example lexicons lexicon_en pls If you choose to use string tables specify a global and or project string table that contains string names and values corresponding to the word or phrase in question and phonetic description respectively You may add as many lexicons as you wish They will be referenced by all documents in the project without further intervention The language specified for the lexicon will be used if it matches the reader s localisation preferences You can also use the SSML attributes ssml ph Phoneme in Jutoh and ssml alphabet Alphabet in Jutoh to define pronunciation for a particular content element Not many systems yet support the extra speech markup However by including it now in your books they will automatically get the enhanced features when the state of Epub 3 technology advances Devices and software supporting Epub 3 Apple s iBooks supports Epub 3 and iOS devices have good general accessibility support However it s not clear how much of the extra Epub 3 markup is used in support of accessibility A
213. ect as a fixed layout bO0K oooooonoccnoconocccconoconccnonaconcconnonanccnnnnnncnnos 188 Faking fixed layout using a reflowable projecto tiritas 188 A eeu ual ea ntcag des once aeienane a a sexes costalseusd a Eo td tata oetaes 189 SU o A 189 Chapter 19 Adding Interactivity To Your BO00k oooooooomomons 190 vi Introd ctioi caian aa ee aE Mee E IN eR 190 Form objects nenia hci ys oe n ls ace tet mea a Ot Aas es come NC ts A als tae 190 Using form OD SS a ora 191 ON 192 Chapter 20 Making Your Books Accessible ccsscccsssccssssccsssscssssscsscsccsssscesssssescssssscseeseesseees 193 o rie hy acc ties fen cede snes sc teed gs aot eco g52y gar eal tea nean Meo dy aewch pads E tes cays 193 Epub S and tol o ia 193 Editing your project for ACCESSIDILILY a casada dt irte 195 How the stvle mapping WAR as 196 Using speech in your BOOKS hiss eaves cr evaaleavia ouch gesies anda wa daslacs iS 197 Devices and software supporting Epub a RS 197 FUME COT EAI Os anata aan aer a ia dad 198 SOTONA TI DA nE EDELE S DETARE OREORE OEE DAE se Big EENE E E A A E A O A 198 Chapter 21 Working With Text To Speech sseessesoessoesoesoeesossoesoessossoesooesossoessoesossoeesosssoesssosessoese 199 introductions ine ae Pe A Eees 199 How does Jutoh support text to pecch ii das 199 Configurations and speech protesta ay Biases 201 Spesch mark p irs Fak tend ouh Sessa A A tenses ONR OER aa 202 Previewing PESA E A te 205 A cae A wegen g
214. ections for print that won t appear in an ebook Fortunately you can do this using conditional content dependent on the configuration you re currently compiling with Take a look at the file Print Book Sample jutoh that comes with Jutoh It uses conditional sections to output suitable print only sections such as the half title page Sections that should start on a right 211 hand page do so by virtue of setting Layout to Right Only in page styles For more on conditional formatting for POD see KB0 23 How do I use Jutoh with print on demand services in the Jutoh help Setting configuration options You can specify the overall paper size using the Paper size option if none of the provided paper sizes is suitable type values in mm into Custom paper width and Custom paper height to override the Paper size selection Specify the margin between the content and the edge of the paper in mm with Left margin Right margin Top margin and Bottom margin Check Mirror margins if you need a larger gutter for binding the book having set the margins according to advice given by your print on demand service Mirroring the margins will set the left margin value as the inner margin and the right margin value as the outer margin As we shall see below these settings can all be overridden via individual page style settings Usually Jutoh will export special formatting such as a table of contents index entries and footnotes in the appropriat
215. ed If you use in your properties you can specify variants so you don t have to mention every single style to include or exclude Here s another example Say we are going to create a Smashwords OpenDocument file which says Published by Acme at Smashwords but all other formats will just say Published by Acme We create two paragraph styles one called Only Smashwords OpenDocument and another called Non Smashwords Formats In our title page we have the two paragraphs Published by Acme at Smashwords Published by Acme The first is formatted with Only Smashwords OpenDocument and the second with Non Smashwords Formats In our Smashwords OpenDocument configuration we set these properties Paragraphs to exclude Only Non Smashwords Formats Paragraphs to include Only Smashwords OpenDocument In all other configurations we keep the default properties for example for Epub Paragraphs to exclude Only Paragraphs to include Only Epub Now when we compile the Smashwords OpenDocument configuration all Only styles will be excluded except for Only Smashwords OpenDocument and Non Smashwords Formats will also be excluded When we compile another configuration such as Epub the Non Smashwords Formats paragraphs will be included by default it doesn t need to be mentioned explicitly Since we are using wildcards it doesn t matter if we a
216. ed by a Heading 3 While this may achieve the look you want you also need to think about a proper structure for your document When you click Next the final page will be shown with an option to automatically build the table of contents whenever generating the Epub or Mobipocket you can leave it unchecked if you can remember to use Update whenever a heading has changed in your project Finished Your table of contents has been generated You can now edit the page if you wish to Note that if you edit your book in a way that may change the table of contents you must run this wizard again to update the table of contents page and NavMap or check the Automatically Buld Table of Contents option below Note that you must ensure that building the table of contents works correctly without editing before enabling this If this option is checked the table of contents and NavMap will be rebuilt on Epub Moibpocket generation as if you had used the wizard Table of Contents Wizard final page Click on Finish to quit the table of contents wizard Note that to make best use of the advanced table of contents facility you need to use consistent heading styles in your document so Jutoh can work out the heading levels in the structure implicit in your document and add bookmarks to them For example you might use Heading 1 Heading 2 Heading 3 and so on 112 If you haven t opted to add a table of contents page Jutoh
217. eds to be dismissed before you can continue working in the main window Dialogs usually have a Help button that will give more detailed information than this guide can cover Screenshots are taken on Windows but the functionality is identical on Linux and Mac even if it looks slightly different XV Chapter 1 Introduction to Ebooks and Jutoh IO In this chapter we explore ebook formats and explain how Jutoh fits into the process of getting your book onto virtual shelves We ll take a look at how you get your content into Jutoh and other tools that you can use alongside Jutoh Ebook formats There are three major ebook formats in use today 1 Epub an open standard supported by all non Kindle reader devices 2 Mobipocket a proprietary format specific to the Amazon Kindle but also supported on other devices 3 PDF Portable Document Format an Adobe proprietary format supported by most devices There are other formats including plain text and HTML but the Big Three above are the important ones Epub 2 is the industry standard with wide adoption and is flexible enough for most ebook purposes It s basically a zip archive containing the content in XHTML form plus metadata that describes the content and provides navigation information An Epub reader such as Apple s iBooks tries to format the book in a standard way but inevitably there are differences between implementations Most Epub ereaders handle Epub 2 th
218. ee also KB0173 Abbreviate style names if enabled style names in the HTML and CSS files will be abbreviated instead of being derived from the original style names Optimize style sheet if enabled Jutoh will remove unused styles from the CSS style sheet Emulate small caps if enabled Jutoh emits actual capitals and a smaller font size for viewers such as ADE that ignore the font variant attribute On by default Superscript CSS custom CSS for implementing superscript Subscript CSS custom CSS for implementing subscript Convert horizontal bar to em dash converts Unicode 8213 horizontal bar to Unicode 8212 em dash and adds a non breaking span Some Epub viewers such as Adobe Digital Editions do not support horizontal bar and it is essential punctuation for Spanish For the non breaking behaviour to work the bar and non space character to the left or right of the bar must be formatted in the same or no character style Convert non breaking hyphen to hyphen converts Unicode 8209 non breaking hyphen to an ordinary hyphen and adds a non breaking span Some Epub viewers do not support a non breaking hyphen For the non breaking behaviour to work the hyphen and non space character to the left or right of the hyphen must be formatted in the same or no character style Add thin spaces around punctuation inserts non breaking thin spaces around punctuation to conform with typographical convention for French books If there is wh
219. een nena eee A Maal 206 Speech ACV A A A AS 207 Techniques Tor effective speech MAN a a ti 209 ORN A A IR AP CS 209 2 Use Alias Phoneme lexicons and custom pronunciatiOMS ocococccnocononcconcncnnnnnoconancnconncnc nns 209 3 Use paragraph and character Styles id ad tada 209 4 Use Pause objects and PUC atada 210 Use conditional formatting isesi i a a E E 210 6 Use alternative text and table title desScripti0N ooonoccninccnococonccconanoncconnoconccnonoconcconnnconccnnocns 210 A 210 Chapter 22 Formatting For Pritt scscsiescsseoasssscedsvexssesiensecoiscneovessensnusdsatsossvace avessonsndapesdesesseunsbvesseusies 211 A e s De wae 211 Using the Print on Demand Wizard e a ti iaa batas 211 Setting CONTISUFATI OM opti n S ln rt rs doen AE EA E EE EEA EREKE RR 212 Specifying page layout nnernese nonien ai 212 Specials HAMES nanira l gui costed a a a a e a a a a E O aE 213 Using Header and O a e E E R E E Oe 214 Setting the outline lenin ia ia 214 Creating table of Contents na seo 215 How page styles work in LibreOffice OpenO Mt ii dd hain een aw aieoutts 215 Importing from ODT and DOOR ads 216 SUMMA A A O 216 Chapter 23 Conditional FOrmatting cciccscecsssseocoasccaseoaccssoncnsncesnsasessseotbssvonessesnetessenssssesoouuedsassesansecs 217 A sass ren tu ea Na AE EA RE Saa E Pease ak gestae Sea Sapewanl aaa aian 217 Tagging whole section and media documents s ssesssessssesetsessresetssessresrtsstssressrestesressees
220. eft bottom right and centre The whole page will be zoomed when one of these regions is touched Note that Kindle Previewer does not always display magnified regions properly sometimes it will give up altogether after a few zooms until Previewer is restarted On the Kindle Paperwhite double tapping an object starts magnification and single tapping cycles through all the magnified regions until you double tap again IMPORTANT if you enable Auto region magnification Kindle will not show a single page in portrait mode and a double page spread in landscape mode which can work if you don t lock the orientation in your configuration and you specify two pages per spread With region magnification set Kindle will simply show single pages in both orientations Also links within text objects that are subject to magnification won t work So treat this option with caution Recommended settings for KF8 Unless you are forcing landscape mode Set Book type in your configuration to comic This way double pages will work in landscape mode on LCD Kindles and on e ink Kindles the book will be fixed to portrait with no option for landscape which can be illegible in landscape anyway due to the low resolution When book type is set to none the Kindle Keyboard renders fixed layout books terribly they are fixed to landscape rotated but only one page is shown at a time Also clear the Auto region magnification configuration o
221. elow You can add edit and delete page styles from the Page tab of document properties dialog or from the Page Style Management dialog that can be invoked from the Page Layout tab of the Project Properties dialog From here you can export and import page styles using files with a jutohpagestyles extension You can also import page styles directly from another project using the Book Import From Project command Special style names If you have a page style called Standard it will be used as the default style when no page style has been specified for a section If Standard isn t defined the default style will take its values from the configuration 213 If you have a page style called Cover it will be used for the cover To ensure the page style doesn t repeat for subsequent pages set the next style field to Standard However don t do this for sections with more than one page unless you only want the first page to use the specified page style Using headers and footers You can specify very limited headers and footers in automatic page layout mode but for more control you can edit header and footer content and their formatting in a page style These headers or footers will continue until the next page style if any and you can also specify different headers and footers for the first page in a section or for the left and right pages but see the note below about restrictions for the first page content
222. elow regarding setting KF8 options 89 e Open to spread if checked the book will open directly to a full page spread This is only applicable to iBooks e Show binding if enabled a binding crease will be shown in the middle of a double page spread in iBooks only e Write page image as background if checked the page background will be written using the background image CSS property which for KF8 will disable default zooming but will also prevent the background from being shown independently from the rest of the content when clicking double tapping on the background e Pre render objects if set to Default any text or image objects that have Pre render this object checked in their region properties or inherited page or project properties will be rendered to the background image instead of being written to the ebook as a separate object If this option is Always all objects will be pre rendered and if Never no objects are pre rendered e Font pixel scale this option is in the HTML Formatting group rather than Fixed Layout but it is useful for making the text size in ebooks closer to the size as shown in Jutoh Try a value of 0 85 if the ebook text is too large It is only used when font sizes are expressed in pixels If your font sizes are in points you can scale the text size in ebooks by setting the Custom DPI in Project Preferences Options e Auto region magnification for KF8 output only this option enabl
223. en at least the paragraph will be generated using the h1 tag However it still doesn t give much information about the type of section that this heading introduces What we would really like to do is enclose the heading and the text below it in a section and assign the type chapter to the section within the Chapter 1 document and the type acknowledgments within the Acknowledgements document For example lt section epub type chapter gt lt hl epub type title gt Chapter 1 lt h1 gt lt section gt Similarly subsections should also have their own sections whether or not they have an explanatory type unfortunately Epub types don t have enough expressivity for all possible subsections but adding sections is still useful even without the type When creating an Epub 3 file Jutoh scans the mapping for style patterns that match paragraph styles If there is a match Jutoh will insert a section tag in front of the heading paragraph and will close the tag either when a subsection with a greater level is encountered or the document ends At the same time the mapping item can assign the heading level an Epub type for the section and an optional Epub type for the heading itself such as title A caveat for this is that if you have defined an Epub type for the whole document in the document properties dialog then Jutoh will not create a section that defines the same type as the top level section since it wi
224. ent for example if making a book sample Off by default in order to warn about missing links Commands Sometimes you may wish to execute an external command before or after the compilation of your book These properties allow you to specify such commands Note that if executing a command using an interpreter such as Java or Python you must specify the interpreter command in addition to the script to be executed Here s an example command that runs the Kindlestrip program c python27 python exe c apps kindlestripl 35 kindlestrip py FOLDER SFILENAMES SEXTS SFOLDERSASE ILENAMES new SEXTS e Pre compile command a command to execute before compilation You can use the keywords FOLDER FILENAME EXT and APPDIR Pre compile command a command to execute after compilation You can use the keywords FOLDER FILENAME EXT and APPDIR Upload book check to upload the file to a device folder or email account after compilation using applicable device profiles edited via Preferences Device Profiles Device profiles a comma separated list of profile names to use for uploading the file You can use star to match multiple characters in the profile name By default any applicable device profiles will be used You can edit device profiles via Preferences Device Profiles Comments These options control how comments are included in your ebooks Comments to include a pattern for
225. epts a wide variety of input files and can create MOBI EPUB and other standard ebook formats It compiles and checks projects and links to preview software It also allows for extensive metadata entry All this in a neat and tidy presentation When the only other options seemed to be an expensive and unnecessary outlay on something like Adobe In Design this came out of the blue and has answered all our prayers I love it Ellis Delmonte Hawkwood Books Lincoln T just wanted to say your software is bloody genius The Smashwords conversion went brilliantly Jutoh has been a God send and the learning curve will really pay off in the future Having come across many many forums where new digital authors are having a painful birth in converting to the digital platform Jutoh is something that many of them don t know about Your software will make a difference My book is now live on the Amazon and Smashword sites It reaches Apple in two weeks Your software helped make that happen Will B Jutoh is way ahead of any of the ebook editors and I have tried a number of them even Adobe s InDesign Dan R T just wanted to write and thank you a thousand times over for coming up with Jutoh I can t begin to tell you how much simple it has made my life Create once and send out everywhere in all formats is a Godsend and I have been able to supplement my own titles with those of others through my publishing company I learned
226. er forums Again the message here is do not over promote become part of the community Share your own enthusiasm and participate in the conversations that are taking place People are very turned off by relentless self promotion It pays to be discreet And then we have Twitter Twitter gets a lot of flak Its very name seems to suggest triviality but in fact it is a very useful tool in building an online presence It is easy to find like minded people supplying you with support and lots of information especially about indie publishing and marketing It is also a great book promotion tool if used correctly Once again the advice is be subtle Do not go on and on about your book Try to be interesting and supply interesting information related to your special subject Find the people who are interested in your special subject and follow them There is still a role for traditional media in marketing your book be it a local newspaper or a special interest magazine They are looking for stories but once again be creative Find a hook and an angle that is fresh Create a story from your special subject rather than pitching a piece about an indie published novel 261 Another area worth exploring is can you do an event Is there a tie in with a local event that you can devise and pitch to the organisers Would local societies be interested in hearing about your special subject They may become willing readers if you give a good performance This
227. er to show a tip on startup change the display language set the width and surrounding colour of the edit window and various other options that change the display and behaviour e Show Jutoh full screen If you are short of screen space or simply want to temporarily reduce clutter you can use F11 or the View Full Screen command to remove the title bar menu bar and main toolbar Press F11 again to restore normal viewing For more information on customising Jutoh to suit your preferences see Appendix B Configuring Jutoh Summary In this chapter we ve seen more detail about the various parts of Jutoh that allow you to work with your projects Next we will help you achieve mastery over your projects including how to manage the individual documents that they contain 25 Chapter 4 Working With Projects ee Ee ee In this chapter we ll get to grips with how projects and documents within them are managed It s worth reading so you have a model of how Jutoh will handle your material and what you are able to do within a project When using Jutoh if you find the way documents work confusing you might want to come back and re read this chapter Overview A Jutoh project contains a hierarchy of documents some of which will be used to create your ebook A document is a piece of information such as a book section a text note a picture a shortcut to a file on your local disk or a web link Why might you add documents that are not
228. er words one which is present as a section in your project instead of generated only when the ebook is compiled Jutoh will replace it with one that is more suited to printable documents The table of contents will contain page numbers as well as hyperlinks Any page style you specify for this page will still be respected for example you might want to add a footer with page numbers displayed as roman numerals For more details see Chapter 11 Working With Indexes Note if your table of contents does not contain all the levels you expect after you have updated fields in LibreOffice OpenOffice the heading style outline levels may be incorrect Edit each of your heading styles in Jutoh and for Heading 1 or whatever your heading 1 style name is make sure Outline level is set to 1 for Heading 2 make sure it s set to 2 and so on Alternatively clear the configuration option Use outline levels so heading styles are not output with their own outline levels but the default Outline style is used instead as defined in Project Properties Fields amp Numbering Edit Document Outline Style How page styles work in LibreOffice OpenOffice This is a quick explanation to help you edit page styles within your word processor of choice once you have exported your project to ODT Jutoh generates two kinds of style for each page style a master page style and a page layout style The master page style has a reference to the page layout style In
229. era aa A a A aE O a AA ASSA 41 Importing into n existing POE Cbs ed eval ceslecsaaciossttdaas a ii aaa 41 O e o E E E E E AE AES EA E i E A a 41 A ao EA TE E E 41 Chapter 6 Editing and Formatting Content eessoessoesssosssoessoesssoessoeessosssocssoesssosssoesssosssoeessessssoesse 42 Why divide a book into SECHOMS enrera En vas seacaemen Canta ucnsGeaterdcau sha eatherenlaaaaseal 42 Basic content editing A A A Ao 43 A A races E EE ay E A cotta en natin vais E EES E 45 F rmatting Para at apis A dd 46 Special symbols a A a 46 A O OET APLAR ACR RARE DMR MEET 47 A aie ak noua ete aise ee en Gis ae eae eae ae it ido a 48 Non breaking spaces and Ip ii cto 48 PLOT ZO al HLS oeann a A io Des Nip Och aoe Neda can uae vases a SEER asa 49 a A A O 49 A E A O E NN A ER 49 ss A EEE OEI ESS 50 TR SMCS A A E on A E ey Rw E 50 Comments meron na Gatien oe thet eee Ree e aes Geta ars Shute 2h eee oe tacit 51 The basics of formatting using named SiS ES A 51 Using the formatting palette to apply Styl8S o ooonnoccnoconococoncconnncnonononaconononn ronca nan oconononnn ono ncncnnnncnos 53 Applying styles using shortcuts and favOUurites ccceeccessceeseceseeeeseeeseeeseeceseeeseeceseeeeeceeeeeteeeeeeaaees 55 Using TOS gece ees AA SE RN na Gey 55 Line and paragraph spacings co A A A Ud is dels 56 Indentation A A A A O 56 ANIMEN A A E A E aden E EEEN 56 A RT 57 Di StS a a o O 57 ii Addie OVW OCS onssa a n a a a a Ueda Nie a atin scoahenatas 5
230. es Jutoh s automatic generation of magnification regions for backgrounds text objects and image objects For more on this see below You may wish to switch this off if targeting e ink Kindle devices since it can cause interruption of normal page navigation Speech This category contains an option for determining which speech profile is used for this configuration There is always at least one speech profile which all configurations initially use e Speech profile the speech profile to use containing further options Edit speech profiles in the Speech tab on the Formatting Palette Navigation This category contains options for tailoring the way navigation is supported in HTML pages for the HTML format only HTML templates specified here will be inserted into the HTML pages Navigation controls can be placed at either the start or end of the page or both For each header or footer there are three templates to account for the fact that the presence of Next and Previous links will change according to whether you are currently viewing the first page the last page or the pages in between The default HTML templates give reasonable navigation between pages using text links you could provide more fancy navigation perhaps using images that you copy to the folder of HTML files after generation by Jutoh In the HTML templates you can use these keywords TOCFILE TOCTITLE PREVIOUSFILE PREVIOUSTITLE NEXTFILE NEXTTITLE FIRS
231. essoessoesssesssesssoessoosesosssocsssoessoessoosssoessoesssosesoesssosssssseessssssose 106 Creating an advanced table of COM ii ds 106 Editing table of contents PEOPLE na dd ii Ti iS 113 Adding multiple A ec aia Re Oat Sua ea atlanta Mea Lat Me adi 114 How tables are output to OpenDocument vis ccccncsincressscecsensancovadesssevendaiucnaees deieedandevebecanendancees 115 Specifying and stripping Iniesta da 115 Creating a table of contents mal as 115 Creating a table of contents for a fixed layout bo0k oooocnnoccnnconiccnnoconoccconccconccnnnonanoconccnancncnnos 116 Ep b 3 considerations ereitera ocenwugs taievane sien EE edadnctiwestasadenecavendaanvaabdartieoteavtucens 116 Creating an alphabetical mide ese 116 CONO A A e osa 117 Importing index Entre o inde 118 Creating footnotes anden dni dd 119 Cont unidad irte das ada 119 A ee is EA EAA T ed Cis as Ri a E 120 O aTi 120 importes TOOMIOLES a A E AEE O EAS 121 Creating a iD MO Strap Hy ax a Sa dt 121 Creating citations and a bibliG graphy sic osc sccsecesasccsegeeenscessdoasnesssdeqedeoneavengsenegecandessoasnnddecaatbacedeis 121 How Jutoh stores bibliographic SES A tee acide A 123 Creating and updating the bibliography ooooocnnncnincononaconacconnconnconnnonnncnonc cnn ncnonoconcncnnccnnncnnna nn 123 Changing bibliographic Sedan ii O eae aula eines 124 Managing bibliographic databases ls 125 Editing bibliography TOMA A A ti DAR 128 Exporting to OpenDeco 130 iv Chapter 12 W
232. ever checking on other simulated devices is usually good enough See KB0118 in Jutoh help How can I test my Epub and Kindle books for more details iBooks Apple s Epub based iBooks platform is administered through iTunes Unfortunately only the USA is supported at the time of writing unless you are already set up to do business in the USA Fortunately you can use Smashwords and other aggregators to target iTunes from any country If you re creating fixed layout books first check that these will be accepted by an aggregator quite often they re not Epub files for iBooks need a little tweaking to perform well on iOS Edit your Epub configuration s and check the Optimize for iBooks property Jutoh will then apply a few small changes the next time the book is generated These are Font names are removed from styles unless Generate font names is enabled e Dummy span tags are added to centered paragraphs since otherwise the centering is lost in full justification mode e An image that is on its own in a paragraph and has its size dimensions specified in its properties is generated using a div that takes the dimensions of the image and dimensions are removed from the image itself This is because iBooks ignores width and height specifications in images and using a parent div is a widely used workaround e If either Generate font names or Embed fonts is enabled at the same time as Optimize for iBooks Jutoh will ge
233. example the free OpenOffice org suite or LibreOffice which is an offshoot of the OpenOffice org project Note that Word itself tends to create more compact doc files than does OpenOffice org or LibreOffice so you might want to re save the file using Word if file size is an issue Before creating an ODT file you might like to change the Paper size and margins in your configuration You can also use the Mirror margins setting if you are creating a printed book for example via Amazon s CreateSpace service In addition to document wide paper size and margins Jutoh lets you adjust page styles for each section in your book adding headers and footers with page numbers if necessary If you have an advanced table of contents in your project this will be converted to an ODT table of contents field with both hyperlinks and page numbers For more information please see the topic Creating OpenDocument files for print and PDFin the built in help under Jutoh User Guide If you wish to to add headers footers and page numbers manually to an ODT file generated by Jutoh instead of using Jutoh s page styles follow these steps in LibreOffice OpenOffice org doesn t 249 currently support the Format Title Page command l Ze 4 Open the file in LibreOffice Writer Mark the title page using Format Title Page enter 2 into Number of title pages to skip the cover and title page and choose Convert existing pages to title pages Check Reset
234. f a Unicode font that you can freely embed in your ebook is DejaVu available from dejavu fonts org wiki Main Page If you wish to create a Greek Epub you can use the free Gentium font available from scripts sil org cms scripts page php site_id nrsi amp id gentium To embed a font follow these three steps 1 Add a font Use the Documents toolbar button or Document Add Embedded Font Document menu command Select a font file when prompted A copy of this font will be added to the project and you can change the font family name and other parameters Change the font family name to match the font name used in your ebook styles if applicable 2 Enable embedding in your configuration In your Epub configuration s available from the Configurations tab on the Project Properties dialog scroll down to the Fonts group and check Embed fonts if not already checked Note that if Embed fonts is enabled as well as Optimize for iBooks Jutoh will generate a file called com apple ibooks display options xml with specified fonts set to true This enables font embedding for iBooks 3 Specify font substitutions If the font is installed on the computer and is therefore available from Jutoh s dialogs and is specified in your book then you re done But if the font you want to use is not specified in your document you must specify a font substitution in the Font substitutions property in your configuration For example Times New Roman DejaVu San
235. f your book contains reflowable and fixed layout content The mainstream platforms iBooks Kobo Kindle don t allow mixing types of content but Epub 3 allows it e Orientation lock whether the book will be locked in portrait or landscape mode This doesn t refer to the actual aspect ratio of an individual page this is entirely up to you e Pages per spread how many pages HTML files will be created per double page spread This may differ from the way you created your pages Jutoh will split or merge pages accordingly e Synthesize spreads whether left and right pages should be stuck together to form a seamless spread or whether the pages should be shown as being separate even if next to each other If not Default this setting overrides individual page settings e Page width the overall width of the book This may be different from your individual page sizes if the Pages per spread setting indicates that Jutoh should split or merge pages e Page height the overall height of the book Currently Jutoh doesn t split or merge pages in the vertical direction so this should always be the same as your page heights e Book type this is only used for Kindle and need not be set if you select comic it enables automatic zooming facilities on some Kindles and changes the rendering of double page spreads There may be rendering side effects when specifying a book type so test the book carefully Please see the notes b
236. ffer in their native support of this property by default Jutoh emulates it for the values characters spell out the letters digits spell out the digits and telephone spell out the digits and create suitable pauses between groups of numbers Jutoh will emit suitable text to feed to the speech engine saving you the bother of creating an Alias with equivalent spoken text 2 Use Alias Phoneme lexicons and custom pronunciations Sometimes it s useful to simply tell the speech engine what natural language to say in place of the actual text in the book for example to expand an abbreviation correct a difficult pronunciation or expand the pronunciation of a date or time You can do this with the Alias property in an object that encloses the relevant text or to apply it automatically wherever the text occurs use an entry in a lexicon document Similarly you can specify the pronunciation phonetically with Phoneme in the text or using a lexicon entry This requires some knowledge of phonetic alphabets so most people will probably prefer to use aliases either via markup or lexicon entries There is another mechanism that can be useful custom pronunciations accessed via Preferences Speech This is a list of words and replacement text similar to aliases but with the added benefit that if you place an asterisk in front of the word to find the word will match text anywhere inside a word and not just the whole word As an example this a
237. for errors Epub only e Click Launch to view the ebook in an appropriate application such as Adobe Digital Editions The control panel also shows the cover of the current project which can be clicked to edit the design Next to the configuration list is an edit button which will show the configuration editor giving you the ability to change various things about the way the book is generated We will cover configurations in Chapter 9 Understanding Configurations Control Panel x Build Files Creating Great Ebooks Using Jutoh Dr Julian Smart Configuration Epub v edit The Control Panel Next to the Build tab the Files tab shows all the ebook files that have currently been generated for this project regardless of format You can view the folder containing a selected file view the file with the appropriate helper application or for Epubs examine the structure of the generated book 19 CHAPTER 3 THE JUTOH USER INTERFACE Document area 4 The bulk of the window is taken up by the document area where you can view and edit the documents sections in your book At the bottom you ll see a row of tabs one for each document that you re currently editing and also one for the Jutoh Desktop The Desktop contains a Welcome window and shortcuts for various Jutoh features and documentation and it s also a place you can add sticky notes as shown below pi
238. for helping Meatgrinder create a NavMap from the word processor document 1 Create a linked table of contents page which Jutoh will do automatically or you can build your own Don t use Word or OpenOffice s automatic table of contents generation facility since Meatgrinder doesn t like field codes 2 Start each section with the word Chapter Please see the Smashwords Style Guide at www smashwords com Jutoh will help you conform to them but some aspects you will have to take care of yourself such as careful use of text size sparing use of empty space and consistent heading style usage Much of what the Smashwords Style Guide says can be used when working with Jutoh such as advice on use of indentation paragraph spacing images and so on Recently Smashwords has started allowing authors to upload Epub files However this is only used for delivery of the Epub format and you still need to upload Word files for the other formats See also Chapter 25 Troubleshooting Your Book for tips on dealing with Smashwords submission problems Your own web site Of course there s nothing to stop you uploading Jutoh generated files to your own web site using an FTP client such as FileZilla If you re making them available for free there s not much else to do except upload the files in different formats and add links to your web site Or you could simply link to 256 the files on other platforms such as the Kindle store or Sm
239. g Summary You should now have a good idea of how to create and edit tables Next we look at how you can use text boxes in your book 158 Chapter 15 Working With Boxes SIC This chapter shows you how to create and use boxes and how to manage differences in box layout between platforms Introduction Text boxes allow you to enclose text and other content within a rectangular area optionally with a background colour and border Normally boxes act as a single character within the rest of your document but you can set the floating mode to be left or right as for images to allow text to flow to the right or left This won t show in the editor but will be shown in the generated ebook if the ereader supports it To understand the way margins padding and borders work when showing a box refer to Appendix C The Jutoh Box Model Here s a selection of boxes from the project Formatting Sample provided with Jutoh This text box has a plain border Sample boxes in Jutoh 139 Creating and editing boxes There are several ways to create boxes interactively e using the menu command Format Insert Text Box e using the context menu command Insert Text Box e double clicking on a box style in the Formatting Palette with no existing box selected If any content is selected before you create the box it will be moved inside the box When you click inside the box you can edit content as usual and editing and formatting comma
240. g For normal text paragraphs you ll probably specify at most an after paragraph value For headings it s likely you ll specify spacing before and after the paragraph If you leave these values empty they will either inherit values from the base style or will effectively be zero Its worth remembering that when the configuration option Use relative dimensions is checked Mobipocket KF7 ignores spacing values that are less than 25 tenths of a mm 133 Line spacing the spacing between lines within a paragraph not between paragraphs is specified as none takes a default or inherited value single spacing or in 0 1 increments up to 2 times the normal line spacing You can ignore the Bullets and Tabs pages as far as ordinary paragraphs are concerned since bullets are only defined as part of a list style and tabs are not supported in Jutoh or most ebook formats In the Advanced page you can also specify whether to give this style custom CSS that will be used directly instead of using the Jutoh generated CSS for HTML Epub and Mobipocket formats only This gives you more control over how the content will appear on the rare occasions that Jutoh generated styling is inadequate Remember that if you check Use custom CSS any changes that you make to the style attributes using the style dialog will have no effect in the generated ebook because Jutoh is no longer in control of the CSS for this style Style Font Indent
241. g the formatting creating a table of contents and so on Because Jutoh runs on Windows Mac and Linux you can use most desktop or notebook machines for your editing and even switch between them since the Jutoh file format is portable and a single Jutoh licence is good for any operating systems you may be using Jutoh can run from a mobile drive you can read more about that in the Appendix and in the user manual A question people often ask is Can Jutoh create an encrypted ebook The short answer is No but in fact this would be a useless feature The sites that you will be uploading your book to requires unencrypted content and it s the ebook vendor site such as Kindle Smashwords or iBooks that will be doing any encrypting Unless you re a big publishing company with a deal with Adobe for example you won t be able to do any official encryption that can be recognised by any ebook readers If you re distributing the book yourself probably the best policy is to make a virtue of the lack of encryption customers tend to hate DRM Digital Rights Management and it restricts their freedom to use the book on different devices So just put a paragraph on the title page asking them politely not to copy the book in an unauthorised way Any piracy that does happen may well boost your sales by increasing the buzz around your book However you can easily stop any person from freely downloading your commercial book from your own site by
242. get in touch Cepstral You can use Cepstral voices through SAPI or Apple Speech Manager or you can download the installer for the external program to use with Jutoh The program comes with a demo voice which will need to be unlocked by purchasing a licence After installation go to Jutoh s Speech Preferences select Cepstral and click Properties Then specify the path of the swift program in the Cepstral installation folder eSpeak eSpeak is a fairly rudimentary text to speech system but it s free so it s useful if you don t have an alternative On Windows if you wish to encode MP3 files with eSpeak instead of using the built in SAPI voices you can download the installer from espeak sourceforge net download html and run it Then configure Jutoh for using eSpeak in the Speech tab of the Jutoh Preferences dialog Select the eSpeak engine and click Properties You will need to specify the full path of the espeak exe executable On Mac to use eSpeak instead of using the built in Apple Speech Manager voices you can download the zip file from espeak sourceforge net download html Once you ve unzipped the files you need to copy the espeak data files to either your home directory or to usr share So assuming you downloaded the zip file to say tmp you might then do this in a terminal window 278 cd tmp unzip espeak 1 37 zip cp r espeak 1 37 Applications espeak 1 37 cp r espeak 1 37 espeak data espeak data Clean up
243. ground image to the clipboard for editing and re pasting back to the page using Copy Background Image Similarly you can paste image objects to the clipboard using Copy Selection and keyboard navigation The focused object has a dotted outline There can only be one focused object which will receive keyboard input such as Return to edit its properties but there can be multiple selected objects for example by dragging a rectangle around several shapes or by control clicking on several objects Selected objects have a dotted outline but also have a checkbox in the top left corner You can manipulate objects via the keyboard by first clicking on the canvas background to give it the keyboard focus and then using Tab to cycle forwards through the objects Shift Tab to cycle backwards through the objects Shift Return to edit the object s properties e Return to start editing a text object Delete to delete the selected shape s or focused shape Left right up and down arrows to move the the shape by a pixel or 10 pixels if you hold down the shift key Aligning objects A book often looks best when there is a good margin around the content You can set the left top right and bottom margin sizes in pixels using controls on the Page tab If you also check Snap to margins when you move objects they will be limited to the area inside the margins You can align objects relative to the page or other objects For exa
244. guidelines for advice on presentation image size and so on s3 amazonaws com kindlegen AmazonKindlePublishingGuidelines pdf It is possible to upload Epub files to Amazon instead of converting to Mobipocket first but if you do you may miss out on Jutoh s Mobipocket optimizations giving poor results on some devices Also it s better to preview the Mobipocket file on your machine than to rely on Amazon s conversion before previewing with Look Inside Paragraph spacing in Mobipocket You may be wondering why there is no inter paragraph spacing in your Mobipocket file on KF7 devices even though you specified it in Jutoh When the configuration option Use relative dimensions is checked Mobipocket rounds paragraph spacing before or after to the nearest em unit so for example 1 4em becomes lem and 1 5em becomes 2em In fact you specify spacing in tenths of a mm within Jutoh which are then converted to em by multiplying by 0 02 so 25 tenths of a mm become 0 5em From this you can see that 25 is the minimum value you should use to add spacing in a Mobipocket file since anything less will be rounded to zero To ensure that your Mobipocket configuration is using absolute dimensions mm clear the 251 option Use relative dimensions Note that this may cause poor spacing in some implementations of the Kindle Look Inside feature KF7 does not honour line spacing although this can be changed by the book end user on some
245. guration Epub v Edit oes LA E The Control Panel Each configuration corresponds to an ebook format Select Epub if it s not already selected and click Compile After it s compiled click Launch and if you have an ebook viewer such as Adobe Digital Editions installed your ebook will be shown 15 BE Asobe Digital Edtiors Chapter 1 ln my job I mix with some very funny people They don t know they re furry and if they did the realisation might change thom 1 might make them behave with blandness or with exaggerated eccentricity And that would really spoil my other job When fm not tending to my eccentrics I write No man could have better inspiration than the wonderful people who look to me to assuage their endless thirst for caffeine and their craving for doughnuts To you may be Just the gregarious barista chatting up the attractive clientele 1 may seem harmless enough at the controls of the cafe s poltshed amd beastly hissing machines But beware elements of your personality may find their way into my writing You have no protection against thts forced extraction of the essence of your being dont ask you to sign a walver And maybe one day Til even benefit financially from vour mannertsms or the argument you re having too loudly with your mistress I m soery but there s absolutely nothing you can do to protect yourself The only retaliation ts to get out your own notebook suppose that s what love mo
246. h Minimum desktop size 600 ES pixels wide by 280 Is pixels high Options Show tooltips Show dock Show dose button Reset Desktop to Original Settings The Desktop Preferences page You can change the desktop background the logo displayed on it the font and colour used for sticky notes and various other settings You can also change the settings back to the original defaults There is a Tool tab in this page that lets you add and remove tools that will be placed on the desktop and also on the Tools menu on the Jutoh menubar For more details click on the Help button on the Preferences dialog Project options You can change behaviour relating to project handling not per project settings that s the job of the 289 APPENDIX B CONFIGURING JUTOH Project Properties dialog using the Projects tab in the Preferences dialog Current project Project filename C projects WritingTools Jutoh UserGuideV 2 CreatingEbooksUsingJutoh jutoh Project author Settings View multiple projects Open last viewed document V Restore document position Edit Document Preferences Prompt for document titles Prompt for document deletion Create backup file when project is opened Edit in temporary folder to avoid synchronization problems Match pattern Google Drive Dropbox Y Auto save every 10 S minutes _ Use auto pas
247. h updating the fields in LibreOffice then exporting to PDF Note conversion of page layout when saving to DOCX from LibreOffice doesn t work well so save as DOC instead and if necessary use Word to save to DOCX Also although recent versions of Microsoft Word will read ODT files it has problems with lists headers and footers and table of contents fields so you are advised to open the ODT in LibreOffice and then save as Word if necessary See KB0128 in the Jutoh help for tips on converting ODT to Word The remainder of this topic will explain how to tailor ODT export to your needs For extra information about what options to specify when exporting fixed layout books to ODT see the topic Exporting fixed layout books to ODT in the Jutoh help Using the Print on Demand Wizard You might like to try the Print on demand wizard via the menu command Book Help with Print on Demand to help you set up your project for print output It takes you through most of the steps detailed below for manual page style creation and it can also import page settings from DOCX and ODT templates All the settings in the wizard can also be edited manually elsewhere in Jutoh Suitable template files can be downloaded from sites such as CreateSpace and Lulu If they are in Word DOC format they will need to be saved as DOCX or ODT files before import into Jutoh What the wizard doesn t help you with is the creation of suitable content You may need to insert s
248. h that if your Epub configuration passes the EpubCheck test then files generated by your Mobipocket configuration will also be good from a syntactic point of view at least Also Jutoh will catch most common errors and the Kindlegen compiler will catch further fatal errors So you may be content to use EpubCheck for your Epub configuration only Structural errors Structural errors are overall problems with the project some of which may be flagged by Jutoh at the end of the compile Here are some common structural errors e Missing bookmark fragment identifier is not defined The first thing to try is simply regenerating the table of contents if you have used the advanced table of contents mode Quite often editing text can disrupt bookmarks so try pressing F9 to update the table of contents and then compile and check again So say you find the error is in XHTML containing the text lt a href section 0003 html auto_ bookmark table of contents 1 gt Chapter 1 lt a gt you can look in Chapter 1 and see why the bookmark auto bookmark table of contents 1 doesn t exist In this case regenerating the table of contents will put back this automatically 237 generated bookmark Bookmark names change If you re using advanced table of contents generation Jutoh will generate bookmarks such as auto bookmark table of contents 14 If you link to a bookmark and then Jutoh renumbers it in a later table of contents recreation your links
249. hange a font in Jutoh and then on loading the font has reverted back to a previous font name it is probably because Jutoh tries to use fonts that are likely to be present on your platform so for example Helvetica may be 240 changed to Arial when opening the project on Windows If you want you can specify a font substitution in your configuration using the Font substitutions property in order to use a particular font name in the finished ebook e Garbage characters appear Some readers do not cope well with non Western European languages or need special consideration First try setting the Language metadata field in Project Properties to the language used in the book such as hu for Hungarian If that doesn t work you may need to consider embedding a Unicode font See Embedding Fonts for more information It s also worth doing a quick search online for whether the reader software or hardware supports the language you re writing in e Text size and fonts are inconsistent Sometimes you may have hidden text formatting where spans of text or whole paragraphs are formatted with ad hoc or named character styles in addition to the named paragraph style So several paragraphs appear to have the same named style and yet look different from one another Often you can solve formatting problems like this by selecting the text and applying Format Text Reset Formatting to remove all formatting except links e Paragraphs with the
250. has an option for importing local content so once you have the file on your Android device for example using file transfer Dropbox web site or email you can then view it using Kobo Diesel eBook Store Diesel uses a variety of formats including Mobipocket and Epub you can get your books on their site via Smashwords At the time of writing there are no known issues with Diesel s Epub implementation that require special consideration Lulu Lulu uses the Epub format and combines the advantages of print on demand with ebook publishing There are a couple of considerations that we are currently aware of e You need to have more than one chapter in the book or Lulu will complain about the table of contents e You should switch off Optimize for iBooks or Generate iBooks XML so that Lulu doesn t complain about unmanifested files in iBooks mode Jutoh adds the file com apple ibooks display options xml in the folder META INF inside the Epub So try clearing this setting in your configuration to remove this file Also check that iTunesMetadata plist hasn t been added by iTunes if so compile the file again e The author metadata needs to be output to Epub with opf role set to aut and the date metadata 255 needs to have opf event set to publication or Lulu will compain This is done automatically if they are not already set but you can adjust these values using the buttons next to each item of
251. he selected cells You cannot select rows columns or the whole table with one click as you can with some word processors However you can use the mouse to drag a selection of multiple cells and you can use the Format Table Select Row Column commands Here is an example of using the Table Properties dialog 153 Table Line arrangement Line properties Width 1 00 pt Style Solid v E Set Properties for All Border mode Collapse borders EJ H E Restore Original Arrangement Border changes will apply to the whole table The Borders page of the Table Properties dialog The Borders page is the most complex aspect of the Table Properties dialog and deserves detailed explanation here For further help on this and other aspects of the dialog click on the Help button This page shows a summary of the borders surrounding the table and the horizontal and vertical dividers Since these can vary throughout the table it is an approximation based on a sample of borders but you can select a group of cells and change the borders for that group if you need to change specific borders and dividers The dialog reminds you what rows and columns any changes will apply to in the example above changes will apply to the overall table The borders will only be applied if they were changed in the dialog which means you can t accidentally change the table simply by showing the dialog and pressing OK Clicking on a border l
252. held by the monks since the Abbey was founded by Joseph of Arimathea uncle of Christ and guardian of the Holy Grail The mission takes Dee to the tangled roots of English magic into unexpected violence necromantic darkness the breathless stirring of first love and the cold heart of a complex plot against Elizabeth This is the Amazon description for a very famous self help book THE 7 HABITS OF HIGHLY EFFECTIVE PEOPLE is recognised as one of the most influential books ever written In this seminal work Stephen R Covey presents a holistic integrated principle centred approach for solving personal and professional problems With penetrating insights and pointed anecdotes Covey reveals a step by step pathway for living with fairness integrity honesty and human dignity principles that give us the security 258 to adapt to change and the wisdom and power to take advantage of the opportunities that change creates Translated into thirty four languages and with phenomenal sales THE 7 HABITS OF HIGHLY EFFECTIVE PEOPLE has been the key to the success of legions of business leaders and individuals the world over And finally the description of a new biography of Georgette Heyer by Jennifer Kloester Georgette Heyer remains an enduring international bestseller read and loved by four generations of readers and extolled by today s bestselling authors Despite her enormous popularity she never gave an interview or appeared in p
253. herwise the ereader will not be able to find the correct font to use Even if you have the option Generate font names switched off embedded fonts will still be named explicitly in generated styles This allows the book to use default fonts except where they are embedded to allow the ereader user to still configure the fonts for the majority of the book where fonts are not named Embedding media Jutoh lets you embed audio and video into Epub and Mobipocket books This is only supported in some 225 readers for example iBooks and Amazon may not accept Mobipocket containing multimedia and media in locally transferred Mobipocket files may be blocked For video in iBooks Apple recommends that you use H 264 compression at VGA resolution The poster image should be 150x300 pixels Audio should be stereo AAC MP4 256kps encoded using iTunes Amazon s guidelines for formatting Kindle books with information about audio and video formats is available at kindlegen s3 amazonaws com AmazonK indlePublishingGuidelines pdf To embed a media object follow these three steps 1 Add a media document Use the Documents toolbar button or Document Add Media Document menu command Select a media file when prompted A copy of this file will be added to the project it may take a long time if the file is large and you can change the file name to be used and other parameters 2 Insert a media object into your content Use the Insert Med
254. hould match except for the exclusions You can mark up as much content as you like within a section document from a single letter to multiple paragraphs You can also move the markers around with cut and paste or delete them both to remove the condition You can nest conditions within each other but don t overlap different spans of conditional text Specifying string variables in your content You can specify variables in your content to be filled in when the configuration is compiled For example you could have two versions of your book where a character has a different name in each Just use say WHERO within the content and have different configurations that reference different string tables where the value of HERO is either Joe Bloggs or Bob Smith What are string tables Each project can have zero or many string tables consisting of name value pairs So you could create two string tables in the String tables panel of your Project Properties dialog one called HeroJoe and one called HeroBob HeroJoe has a string called HERO with a value of Joe Bloggs and HeroBob has a string called HERO with a value of Bob Smith There are two more things you need to do to make this work In each of your configurations you need to reference the correct string table So in your configuration Hero Joe Epub you can set the option Project string table to HeroJoe and in your configuration Hero Bob Epub you can set the option Project str
255. how a message when a control is clicked output gt lt output A selection of form objects The form objects aren t live within Jutoh but give a rough representation of their eventual appearance given their current attribute settings Click on an object to edit its attributes Where appropriate you can edit visual attributes such as the object s size margins and so on via the pages in the Object Properties dialog Attributes edited in this way will be generated inline in the style attribute so you can instead specify a Jutoh style or alternatively a CSS class that will apply to the object The most interesting attributes are in the Advanced page of the dialog here you can edit object specific properties such as List options and specify JavaScript event handlers such as for onclick Using form objects It is beyond the scope of this manual to give a tutorial on JavaScript and HTMLS but briefly you can add identifiers and event handlers to your form objects and then write JavaScript to handle the events 191 writing results to controls such as output or simply to a paragraph or span in the document JavaScript code can be defined inline within the JavaScript tab of the document properties dialog or in Jutoh Plus it can be specified as a resource created as a code document You can test your code by compiling with the HTML configuration with the Epub version configuration option set to 3 Launch will show th
256. hsdatiy nena stualobagtenmanrdvineabaaebintedd cmuntehaptarwaned E E E 80 PLY LS A ab a pancteasn toad A 81 O 82 HTME PO as e area 82 TER OO A a dit 85 Images and Medi it 86 Adan Formatting A A RA 88 As AO 88 Fonts and Colours A IR AAA AIRIS 88 MOD A eau vane EEEE eas EAEE AEDES a EERE TRS 89 A soe E E E E EA A E A A AE E A E EEE 89 PE AS AAA clases E E a 90 iii PINAY VAIO ssi s iseices castes aed a Roadie 90 CONAM O o te a tated aca 91 COMMAS 0 4 sacsidencsiesvanedisnss ds ci 92 COMMENTS rated a aa 92 A a T E E hh A AO ha aes Ah a gl Taam Sele Doh a 92 Se to dd e itiante 93 Chapter 10 Working With PICtiaressiccsicsisuschscutacszsssavexssenudasteanisechicedanadssussctecnasdenesitonsabsoscnvasatstosavel ease 94 Insertine nd diting Dictada lit oia 94 Editing basic Pictire POPE ES 95 Editing Size properties aoin A 97 Editing margin border background and advanced propetrtics cccccccssseeeseeesseeeeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 99 Addingcaptions to Magesa cel uescaestventacien tuvae E elev a a a a a aa teres 101 Special considerations TOBIAS ii ta id coa aci n 101 Inserting SN A es 101 Importing pictures from DOCX ODT and HTML cece ecccecceesseeseeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeecsseeeseeeeeeaeeeeeaes 103 Image export to CDOOKS iS A ES RS 103 Exporting mages to es NC 104 Working A E E E E ued cach vad A Eai 105 Using media objects to insert IS 105 SUNMAYA A E E tan E E tabs E ART EE E AER 105 Chapter 11 Working With Indexes
257. ia Object command on the Format menu or the context menu and when prompted choose the file name from the list of media objects currently in this project Enter other parameters if you wish such as a title and fallback text to show if the reader does not support the audio or video tags You can preview your file in Kindle Previewer setting the device to for example iPhone or iPad to see the effect of adding media 3 Ensure media objects are switched on in your configuration Under the Images and Media group in your configuration check that Generate media objects is enabled If you switch this off no media files will be included in the book and the media tags will not be included in the XHTML You can also use media documents and objects to insert images The image won t show up in the editor when you insert a media object that references the media document but there is an advantage you could add several media documents with the same name at different resolutions and use configurations to selectively include and omit media documents from the generated ebook You do this by specifying tags in your media document for example hires lores and then specifying tags in the configuration options Include media documents matching tags and Exclude media documents matching tags This technique is also useful for very large images that take a long time to load into the editor when inserted directly Embedding a PDF Currently em
258. iewing the Mobipocket version of your ebook This is because Mobipocket KF7 implements first line indent but not full left indent or hanging indents The solution is to edit the paragraph styles for table of contents entries such as TOC Entry 2 and give them first line indents instead of full left indents Go to Project Properties Styles and in Indents amp Spacing set Left to 0 and Left first line to a non zero indent value such as 120 The downside of this is that long items that wrap will not be fully indented but in most cases the items will fit and will appear indented Alternatively you can adjust the Mobipocket configuration option Styles for indent fix which converts matching paragraph styles to first line indent instead of full left indent The default setting is TOC which applies this change to all table of contents entry styles You can clear this entry if you do not want to adjust any styles Multimedia and JavaScript in Kindle books Although the Amazon Publishing Guidelines describe how to embed audio and video it seems that they will currently not accept books containing multimedia and any existing books containing audio or video were submitted during an experimental beta phase Locally downloaded Kindle books will have their multimedia blocked This may change in future At the time of writing JavaScript is not supported in Kindle books submitted via KDP 252 Kindle book covers When submitting a
259. ification or per object or pre rendering the images to the background e Images within text objects may not centre correctly To work around this you can insert the image into a centred 1 row by 1 column table Magnified regions in KF8 KF8 supports a technique called panel magnification for zooming into parts of a page Jutoh can generate magnified panels for text objects and image objects if you check the Auto region magnification configuration option When you touch a text object it will be shown in a larger box at 150 magnification similarly an image object will be shown at 200 by default You can edit visual characteristics such as the magnified panel s border width and colour and zoom factor using the Region tab of the object properties dialog Or you can edit these characteristics for a whole page using the Regions tab of the document properties dialog or for the whole project if you use the Regions tab of the Project Properties dialog You can make page or object properties override the higher level properties To make an image show full screen give it a large zoom factor such as 500 and it will be limited to 186 the available space If you are not seeing any magnification for a large image it s probably because the image is constrained by the display size If a page has no separate image or text objects Jutoh will generate five magnification regions for the background image top left top right bottom l
260. ight value when creating an ebook This prevents the overflow of content from a box that is too small for its text when you import text boxes from word processor documents they will often specify the box height but this is not optimal for generated ebooks where the text size and font may vary from how the document was originally created You can switch this behaviour off by clearing the configuration option Omit box height Summary You now know all about Jutoh text boxes The next chapter describes tag objects for advanced markup you can skip this if your needs are relatively simple 163 Chapter 16 Working With Tag Objects SIC This chapter describes the use of tag objects which allow you to add markup that you can t achieve with styles You can skip this chapter if your ebook creation needs are simple Introduction Jutoh 2 introduces the notion of tag objects for advanced markup such as grouping content into sections indication of voice gender for spans of text marking emphasised text and so on Tag objects normally have a close relationship with an equivalent HTML tag but this may not always be the case A tag object always has a start and an end Jutoh will check whether the tags match up when compiling a book Here s an example of using an em tag to mark an emphasised word without explicitly using italic formatting Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet em gt consectetur em adipiscing elit An example of em
261. in the Accessibility page of Project Properties It works for Epub 2 Epub 3 and Mobipocket generation 6 Figures and captions 194 Wrapping images and tables up in figure tags containing captions ensures that the ereader knows which text is associated with which figures Jutoh can insert these tags if you enable the option in the Accessibility page of Project Properties You can specify styles you have used for captions and Jutoh will look for figures near the caption currently only a single image or table above the caption In addition Jutoh will optionally insert image alt alternative text and table descriptions using an HTMLS details tag that displays extra an description when clicking on a button next to the caption Obviously for the best results enter descriptions into all your images and tables For images that are purely for decoration set the Epub type to presentation so that Jutoh knows to ignore them for the purposes of captioning If your configuration specifies Epub version 2 then div tags are added instead of figure tags 7 Table headers The sighted user can easily distinguish a table heading from the rest of the table if it has been formatted in an appropriate way to help disabled readers make it plain which are header rows in table properties by specifying the number of rows that are part of the header in the Repeat header control If several rows are part of the header and the
262. indle and iBooks fixed layout http authoradventures blogspot co uk p tutorials MobileRead com page on fixed layout Epub http wiki mobileread com wiki Fixed_layout_ePub Summary This chapter has described the details of creating fixed layout pages in Jutoh as well as the pros and cons of fixed versus reflowable layout In the next chapter we see how simple interaction can be added via Jutoh if you have or have access to JavaScript skills 189 Chapter 19 Adding Interactivity To Your Book IO This chapter describes the facilities available in Jutoh for adding interactivity to ebooks You will need to have JavaScript skills to make use of these features and currently not many ebook platforms support JavaScript Introduction Jutoh supports interactivity in Epub 3 books via form objects that you can insert into your document without writing HTML and the ability to add JavaScript code via the document properties The form objects have identifiers and callbacks which provide the links to the JavaScript code These are examples of interactive content you might have in your book e a multiple choice quiz e acalculator illustrating scientific principles e an animation demonstrating an important point in the text e retrieval of up to date information from a remote database Epub 3 supports HTMLS and JavaScript currently only Books and some Epub 3 readers such as AZARDI and Readium support a decent subset of Epub 3 The Kin
263. indlegen If Kindlegen isn t working within Jutoh first check that the path in the Helpers dialog refers to a file that exists If that s not the problem perhaps Java isn t installed You can check this by opening a terminal window and typing java If there s an error message that indicates that the command is not found go to www java com and download and install Java Installing on Linux Jutoh Download a suitable file from from www jutoh com download htm There are versions for several methods of installation tarball Debian package and RPM and also 32 bit and 64 bit variants If you are using a Debian or Ubuntu derived version of Linux you can use the deb archive If you are using Fedora Mandriva SuSE Linux PCLinuxOS you can use the rpm archive To install the generic tarball version unarchive Jutoh x y i386 tar gz to a temporary location such as tmp Then run the script installjutoh and follow the instructions This will copy the application files and launch script jutoh2 to locations of your choice If you want to install it system wide log in as root first or use sudo So you would type something like cd tmp tar xvfz Downloads Jutoh 2 10 1386 tar gz sudo installjutoh To install the deb version use a command like this sudo dpkg i jutoh 2 10 1386 deb To install the rpm version use a command like this sudo rpm i jutoh 2 10 i386 rpm Now you should be able to run Jutoh with an icon
264. ine cycles through three states on off and no change indicated by a thick grey line When you choose the on state by clicking one or more times it will take on the new line properties as specified in the Line properties group of controls Alternatively right click or control click on a line to have it immediately take on the current line properties instead of cycling through the three states If you want the line property controls to reflect the state of one of the lines shift click on that line To set the current line properties for all lines that are currently present use Set Properties for All 154 Note that this page uses cell borders to achieve an overall table border You can set an additional table border via Box settings in the Table page but this will only work for HTML based formats Changing the size of cells rows and columns You can influence the size of columns rows and the table itself in a variety of ways 1 specifying cell width and height in the Cell Properties dialog specifying column and table width in the Table Properties dialog Specifying row and column size using menu commands adding content to fill out the column or row specifying whether a cell should wrap text break it into lines Dn nk WN adding padding spacing between the content and the border You can t currently change the sizes of columns and rows by dragging their dividers but you can achieve the same
265. ing With Indexes Index entries If you mark your book with index entries Jutoh can generate an alphabetical index section Use Format Insert Links Index Entry Shift Ctrl I and enter the index entry name and if necessary one or two subcategories This symbol will be inserted into the text index The way the the index is presented is determined by settings within the Index tab in the Project Preferences dialog under Indexes For more information about indexes please see Chapter 11 Working With Indexes 50 Comments You can add comments anywhere in your project by selecting the content you want to comment on and using the menu command Format Insert Comment Ctrl or the EJ tool Then click on comment object to edit it hover over it to view the comment or use the Inspector tab of the Formatting Palette to list all the comments in the current document Julian Smart Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetur adipiscing Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet co amet libero bibendum eleifend lt I Curabitur vel mi ut justo omare iaculis id id est Vestibulum porta felis imperdiet libero rutrum eget scelerisque turpis fermentum Duis ultricies tempus mi quis tristique Duis egestas sem sed leo molestie euismod sit amet sit amet lacus Duis nec sapien sed est gravida iaculis Etiam venenatis in nulla sit amet ornare Curabitur placerat ipsum ac metus faucibus aliquam Phasellus luctus velit sit amet mi gravida
266. ing table to HeroBob Also check Replace strings in content in both configurations or Jutoh will not bother looking for variables to replace You can use this mechanism to have different ISBN numbers in different configurations If you have a variable ISBN in your project metadata it will take its value from the relevant string table when you compile the project Alternatively you can also use the dentifier configuration option to do the same thing and leave the Identifier metadata field blank but the disadvantage of that approach is that you can t mention the ISBN in your document content for example your title page since there is no variable to use There s another way of inserting string table values into your project you can insert a get variable field and specify a source such as project table to use whatever the configuration specifies and variable name For more on this please see the Working with fields topic in the Jutoh application help or type get variable into Search Help in the toolbar Specifying conditional paragraph styles The idea here is to specify in each configuration which paragraph styles should be used to omit or keep text styled with them This method predates the condition method and is not recommended for new projects as it makes it difficult to specify arbitrary styles for your conditional text Plus it s not obvious at a glance which text is conditional and can t be used for arbitrary
267. ing ultricies eleifend Nam sed sapien non nisl dictum accumsan id sit amet orci Donec sit amet libero et arcu vehicula tristique ut et neque Donec id porttitor sem Mauris venenatis libero vitae mi accumsan ut tristique massa posuere Praesent A picture floating to the right of text Kindle KF7 doesn t support floating pictures but KF8 does and so do all ereaders that use Epub so floating pictures should work on all recent devices Next we have Width and Height which you can specify in pixels cm or percentage or not at all the ereader will use the physical picture size to decide how big it should be on the screen Minimum and maximum size can also be specified it s a good idea to specify a maximum size as a percentage to stop the picture exceeding the device display size Percentage size is relative to the containing object a text box a table cell else the overall display size You can specify just a width or just a height and the ebook reader will keep the original aspect ratio Image size specified in the individual image properties as distinct from the resizing done by Jutoh as described below is respected by some viewers and not others In particular early Kindle devices will ignore the specified pixel width and height and will use the original resolution scaled to fit if necessary whereas newer versions of Kindle hardware and software take pixel cm and percentage size specifications into account However
268. inimum a simple bitmap editing tool for resizing cropping and so on Starting from an existing file format If your existing book was designed using an application such as Adobe InDesign or Adobe Illustrator you will not be able to import it into Jutoh directly but you can export a page as a bitmap and paste that into Jutoh one page at a time Then optionally copy paste text and further images from your original file into Jutoh as text and image objects that overlay the page background If you are starting from scratch you can prepare your pages with Jutoh in mind again pasting or inserting images and text from your design tool of choice What are the disadvantages of using fixed layout It s worth emphasizing some of the issues you might find with fixed layout which might influence you in your choice between reflowable and fixed layout e Text may not appear exactly as shown in Jutoh Even when font sizes are expressed in pixels HTML based systems simply render text differently and according to their own rules So especially if you have a lot of relatively small text it may take less or more space than expected leaving extra white space or causing overlapping You can mitigate this to some extent by embedding fonts and choosing a suitable Font pixel scale value in your configuration When using small amounts of large text this will not be such an issue and of course you can pre render text into the book images if the text is suffi
269. interactively If you have specified absolute sizes for boxes in centimetres quite likely after importing from a word processor file you may find the boxes are too large for small ereader displays or they are not in the proportion originally intended relative to the display width It can be better to use percentages and you can apply this to all tables boxes and images when exporting ebooks by checking the Replace absolute widths configuration option Jutoh will use the paper size and left and right margins defined in the configuration or the parent object s width if it s an absolute value to calculate a percentage width for a given object width Although you can specify vertical alignment for a box in Jutoh and the content will be shown vertically aligned in Jutoh currently this won t be reflected in any exported formats due to restrictions in the expressiveness of those formats In a future release this limitation may be worked around meanwhile if you really need vertical alignment you could use a one cell table or use the option Emulate boxes using tables Note that if you don t specify the box height and specify a padding around the content you can achieve the look of vertical centre alignment since the box will be sized symmetrically around the content If a box doesn t appear to have a border in the generated ebook when it does within Jutoh try increasing the thickness of the border If you set the Floating mod
270. iographic formatting and is supported by a test facility in the formatting template dialog It s easy to export and import these templates so users who become queasy at the thought of editing XML can outsource the task if needed at all The commands in a formatting template are executed for every item in the bibliography It can access all the fields in the bibliography as well as some other variables that may be needed such as the item number Number and whether the bibliography is being formatted as a list FormatAsList The template can also set variables either to communicate with Jutoh or for its own convenience The template writes out fields and other necessary text using the write command conditional on whether fields are set or on the values of variables An example template Here s an example of a formatting template so you can get used to the overall feel lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt xi version 1 0 0 0 gt lt Use the new variable Id so we can change it easily gt lt set name Id value of Number gt lt set name PersonSeparator value and gt lt A catch all formatting clause gt lt write if variable neq FormatAsList value 1 gt lt variable name Id gt lt text value gt lt write gt 295 lt write if variable set Title attributes emphasis gt lt variable name Title gt lt write gt lt write if variable set Book gt lt text val
271. iography style in these applications then you might want to check the option Note that Jutoh cannot translate the XML formatting template to the ODT bibliography style which is much less expressive So if Special bibliography formatting is checked you may need to customise the bibliography style in the word processor All in all if you just need to export to a print format without much further editing it s better to keep the option cleared and let Jutoh do the citation and bibliography formatting Summary We ve seen how to build a variety of special index sections in Jutoh We ve mentioned styles and style sheets from time to time throughout this guide now we ll devote a chapter to them as styles are important in Jutoh 130 Chapter 12 Working With Style Sheets ee Ee ee In this chapter we explain how to work with styles important for formatting your books consistently and also important for such features as automated table of contents creation Introduction Style sheets are important in controlling the appearance of a book when converted to the supported formats Style sheets contain styles for paragraphs paragraph styles spans of text character styles lists list styles and boxes and pictures box styles You can have more than one style sheet and switch between them by changing the Style sheet property in a configuration or by having multiple configurations specifying different style sheets Most users will
272. ious strategies to cope with errors that might occur in your book 232 Chapter 25 Troubleshooting Your Book gt ONT Once you ve compiled your book you need to check it and fix any formatting or other errors that might be present This chapter explains why you need to do this what errors are likely to crop up and how to fix them You can supplement the information in this chapter by typing keywords into the Search Help field in the Jutoh toolbar to search the application help and the Jutoh knowledge base What errors can occur If you re lucky your ebook will be perfect the first time you compile it In the real world however it may contain flaws These are the seven categories of error or imperfection that we can identify e Syntax errors in particular bad generated XHTML Structural errors for example bad page links chapters that are too long for ebook readers to cope with and missing sections such as table of contents or cover Formatting errors poor or inconsistent formatting e Content errors spelling and grammar mistakes poor writing factual errors and so on Platform errors formatting or content that is fine on the face of it but falls foul of a particular publishing platform s guidelines or bugs e Import export errors problems with importing existing files into Jutoh and exporting to other applications Expectation errors when Jutoh isn t designed to do what you re trying to
273. ired outline information if they are specified in the named styles and then OpenOffice org Writer or LibreOffice Writer will be able to save the bookmarks for the headings in the document For this to work you will need to make sure that Heading 1 has its outline set to 1 Heading 2 has an outline of 2 and so on And of course you will need to be using these styles in your project The outline setting can be found on the Indents amp Spacing tab of the Jutoh style editor dialog You can switch off outline output using the Use outline levels configuration property for example if your document doesn t use heading styles consistently and it would create a poor table of contents in Adobe Digital Editions If your Jutoh styles don t have outlines you can achieve the same effect by using the Tools Outline Numbering command in Open LibreOffice to set numbering for your heading styles Jutoh outputs appropriate metadata to ODT files so that when you export to PDF the title and author will appear in the left hand pane in Adobe Digital Editions If your cover design is on the first page of your ODT file it will be used for the thumbnail in Adobe Digital Editions See also the next topic for creating headers and footers and a hyperlinked table of contents with page numbers for your PDF file OpenDocument Text ODT OpenDocument Text is a word processor format that can be converted to many other formats such as Word and PDF using for
274. irs of eyes if you can Platform errors Some publishing platforms have requirements over and above the usual ones and can be picky about some style and content issues We ll look at several of the main platforms Smashwords errors More general information about Smashwords can be found in Chapter 16 Understanding Ebook Formats and Platforms so here we will confine ourselves to some of the errors that Smashwords might alert you to Paragraph separation error Smashwords doesn t like you to have both paragraph spacing and a first line indent so you can either modify the style you use or if you would like to maintain your current styles for non Smashwords configurations add a paragraph substitution in your configuration For example in the Paragraph style substitutions property for your Smashwords ODT configuration type the string Body Text First Indent Body Text without quotations of course This will cause the Smashwords ODT file only to use non indented paragraphs assuming you have these styles defined and are using them Misidentified publisher error Check that your title page is as Smashwords wants it in particular that you are using the same publisher name as defined in your Smashwords account For example Published by Anthemion at Smashwords Copyright page error You need to specify a copyright line in your title or copyright page such as Copyright Julian Smart 2011 Can t create a Na
275. ists If that s not the problem perhaps Java isn t installed Go to www java com and download and install Java Installing on Mac OS X Jutoh Download the Mac version of Jutoh from from www jutoh com download htm and open the Jutoh x y img file The disk image will be mounted automatically and you can then copy the Jutoh folder to a suitable place on your hard disk such as the Applications folder You can drag the Jutoh icon to the dock for quick access You can uninstall Jutoh by simply dragging its folder to the trash can 269 The first time you run Jutoh you may need to control click and select Open to stop Mac OS X trying to protect you from an unknown program For details please see www jutoh com macinstall htm Kindlegen You will need to download and install Amazon s Kindlegen if you wish to create Mobipocket Kindle files In the Jutoh Preferences dialog under Helpers or in the Setup Wizard click on Help Me Install Kindlegen Then as per the instructions for Windows above click on Download and Install to get Jutoh to perform the whole process automatically To install Kindlegen manually download it from www amazon com kindlepublishing at the time of writing it is bundled as a zip file which you can unarchive to any suitable folder such as Applications Kindlegen Then set the path of the kindlegen program in Jutoh s Preferences dialog under Helpers For example the path might be Applications Kindlegen k
276. it s best to keep this option checked Use document depth not level can be checked if you want to bypass matching headings and instead generate one link per section and use the hierarchy of your project to determine how the NavMap and table of contents is built You can create or move book section documents under other ones to create a hierarchy if you are not using Use document depth an actual hierarchy isn t necessary since headings 110 CHAPTER 11 WORKING WITH INDEXES give an implicit hierarchy but it s an option that you have Editing level shows the current level we re editing affecting the next two fields There will be as many levels available here as we specified in Max heading level Style for formatting this level is the paragraph style that will be applied to the entry at this level depth of the contents page Finally Matching heading style for this level tells Jutoh that when this style matches within the project we will treat this paragraph as a heading at this level You can match against multiple styles by specifying asterisk for match multiple letters and you can specify multiple patterns by separating them with the pipe character In the example we re allowing Jutoh to look at three headings levels and for the first level we re going to search for the Heading 1 style and format each table of contents entry with TOC Entry 1 Click on the Editing level control to cha
277. ite space already in position it is replaced by the thin space but existing white space is not necessary Thin space entity the HTML code to use for a thin space By default it is sthinsp Not all fonts support this entity you can sometimes work around it for Epub files by embedding a font that supports it Some but not all Kindle devices will render it correctly Or you can use an image instead although this can slow down rendering considerably This code will insert an image you should also add a media document with a suitable small white bitmap lt img width 4 style width 4px src media emptybitmap4xl png alt gt Orphan control for single letter words inserts non breaking spaces after single letter words to avoid orphan words at the end of lines Character substitutions semicolon separated pairs of decimal Unicode substitutions For example the value 8239 160 8201 160 would convert two kinds of thin space to non breaking spaces Use div tag determines whether the div tag is used instead of p Extra metadata extra meta elements for the metadata section of the Epub or Mobipocket OPF file 84 e Widow control a widow is the last line of a paragraph appearing alone at the top of a page This option specifies the minimum number of lines of a paragraph that appear at the top of a page Use Default to use the ebook defaults None to switch off widow behaviour or a number for the minimum number of lines
278. ition Ensure Avoid page breaks within figures is checked If you need to add a caption to a floating image or the caption needs to be restricted to the exact width of the image or you have multiple images per caption create a text box with a percentage or absolute width Add the image setting the width to 100 and then add the caption Note that these tips also apply to table captioning Special considerations for iBooks A problem that many people find with images in iBooks Epub files is that iBooks ignores width and height specifications in images and fits images to the page instead This can be bad because you may wish to include high resolution images which will look good on high resolution devices such as retina display iPads while keeping the image to a particular size The workaround for this is to use a parent div tag that takes the image s size and have the image expand to the size of the parent This optimization is applied when Optimize for iBooks is checked in your configuration An image that is on its own in a paragraph without any other content and has its size dimensions specified in its properties is generated using a div tag that takes the dimensions of the image and dimensions are removed from the image itself So to support a variety of device resolutions it s a good idea to specify high resolution images and specifiy the desired size just one of the dimensions will do Currently this won t work
279. itor as below with the opportunity to see either only the important properties fields or all of the relevant ones for the selected item type 122 Bibliographical reference Type Artide Custom citation Short name SMART2015 Title A Brand New Day Author Julian Smart Corporate author Year 2015 The citation type Show all properties Update Value The bibliographic reference editor Press OK to insert the citation after you are satisfied with the field values When entering person names into a field separate them using semicolons and type the forenames first For example Dr Julian Smart Fred Bloggs You will be able to change the way that names are written to the bibliography or shown in a citation but the names should be entered in this standard format How Jutoh stores bibliographic entries Entries are stored in two places in one or more databases that you can edit via the Project Properties Indexes Bibliography panel and in the content itself By storing entries at the point of citation in each document information doesn t get lost when copying and pasting between projects When a citation is edited or the bibliography updated in Jutoh the data in the citations and in the database s are synchronised You can edit the entries either by clicking on citations in the content or by editing the databases via the bibliography settings You can cite the same item multiple times since each item has a unique
280. ity The background image will also be scaled to fit the page size You can set margins for the page if you wish and check Snap to margins if you want objects to be constrained within the margins when positioning them You can also set the notional grid size and check Snap to grid to make object positioning easier Adding image and text objects With some books you can simply provide a single image per page but ebook distributors generally recommend that as much content as possible is provided as actual text layered on top of the page image Also if you add image objects that float above the page image Jutoh can provide zooming For example in a photography book the reader can double tap on an image on the page to view it in more detail To add an object click on Objects and then New Text or New Image You will be prompted for a name for the object this allows you to keep track of them in the object list where you can move them up and down in order to specify their positions in the z order how they are layered Double click to edit inside a text object When you are editing text the Formatting Palette will be displayed you may need to press Alt P if the palette is not displayed It will be hidden automatically when you are not editing text Text objects can contain most of what a regular reflowable Jutoh page can contain including images but currently excluding currently footnotes You can give a text or image object borders a b
281. ium high and x high For SSML this can also be an absolute or relative value preceded with or with a Hz or suffix SAPI will use a rough equivalent of a relative or absolute percentage but the Hz form is ignored Voice pitch contour Supported for SSML A set of targets at specified time positions in the speech output conforming to the SSML definition of pitch contour in the prosody element Each target is a pair time position pitch Example 0 20Hz 10 30 40 10Hz In SSML the pitch values can use absolute or relative Hz but this is not supported by the Jutoh pitch contour editor Voice rate Supported for SSML SAPI Manipulates the rate of generated synthetic speech in terms of words per minute Specify a keyword from normal x slow slow medium fast x fast or a percentage where 100 is the normal rate Voice variant Supported for SSML This is supported by CereVoice only It selects a different version of the synthesis for the contained content generating a usel tag The value is an integer a value of 0 represents the original version If you find the wrong pronunciation is being used then if you are using the CereVoice speech engine generating SSML you can often correct by using a suitable value such as l or 2 Voice volume Supported for SSML SAPI The volume value can be one of normal default silent x soft soft medium loud x loud For SSML only you can also supply a relative dB valu
282. ject and press Compile to make the book Help lt Back i Cancel Step 7 Cover Design page You can use the default design or click on Templates to choose another template You can change it later Just press Finish to complete the import Jutoh will now create several sections which are shown on the left in the Projects outline window You can click on each section name and edit the text if you wish If you have made changes to the imported file or wish to see if Jutoh can make a better job of splitting the book up by making different selections you can save time by using the menu command File Reimport Project which preserves your previous selections 14 Using Quick Convert If you prefer you can bypass the New Project wizard using the Quick Convert command on the File menu or toolbar This chooses various options for you such as the project folder book name book cover and so on and it also allows you to choose several files for importing into different projects You can then edit the project properties in the usual way or you can use File Reimport Project to refine some choices such as how the document is split Compiling the project Now we have the book in Jutoh we can create an ebook In the bottom left part of the Jutoh window you ll see the Control Panel listing configurations If you don t see the Control Panel press Alt 7 or choose View Control Panel Control Panel x Build Files Confi
283. ject outline and hitting the Delete key or right clicking and selecting Delete Note that this operation cannot be undone Moving documents You can move a document in the project outline by dragging it to a new position using the left mouse button If you drop the document onto a folder the document will be placed inside the folder Otherwise the document will be inserted in front of the drop target You can veto insertion into a folder by holding down the control key as you drag and you can force adding the document as a child by holding down the shift key If you need finer control of where you move documents you can use the cut and paste method Right click over the document you wish to move in the project hierarchy and select Cut from the popup 27 menu Now go to where you wish to move the document right click again and select Paste Before This Scrap Paste After This Document or Paste As Child of this Document Managing project files Each project file contains all the data needed for generating the ebook including all book sections style sheets the cover design configurations and project wide options You can save and open project files as you would any word processor file and you can open multiple projects simultaneously within Jutoh if you enable the View multiple projects option in Preferences the Project tab This will allow you to copy and paste between projects As well as using the Open toolbar or file menu comman
284. jects in the Jutoh application help This is what the drawing object properties dialog looks like with tabs for editing each of the supported formats and controls for operations such as import export previewing and editing Peevccccccccccccccees Bitmap PNG 600 x 325 138743 bytes 102 The drawing object properties dialog With the second and third options you can use configurations to control whether SVG or bitmap images are exported so this allows you to maintain different configurations for creating ebooks with either SVGs or bitmap images for different sites or devices Importing pictures from DOCX ODT and HTML You can control some aspects of picture import when they are part of documents imported via the New Project wizard In the Import Preferences pane in the Preferences dialog or in the Import Options page in the New Project Wizard you can choose whether to import images or not and whether to resize them and to what size If you want to specify the image size later you can clear the Respect specified image size option This will force images to be imported either at the width you specify or at the maximum resolution they have in the original file Then you can specify the maximum image width and height in your configurations for later resizing see Image export to ebooks below Some types of picture cannot be imported from ODT documents in particular SVM the StarView
285. k Table Box Formatting to edit table wide properties such as overall size Changes will be reflected in the preview You can also choose to omit some properties of the table template such as cell colour by clearing items in the Filter list Editing tables To edit your table use the following e the Table Properties dialog via Format Table Table Properties or the Table command on the editor context menu e the Cell Properties dialog via Format Table Cell Properties or the Cell command on the editor context menu 152 e the various editing commands on the Format Table menu or the Table Formatting menu on the editor context menu From the Format Table menu you can add and delete rows and columns merge and split cells change row and column dimensions and change vertical alignment in cells Insert Table Shift Ctrl A Apply Template Table Properties Cell Properties Top Align Centre Align Bottom Align Merge Cells Split Cells Row Height Column Width Insert Rows Delete Rows Select Row Insert Columns Delete Columns Select Column The table formatting menu You can often save time by selecting a group of cells for paragraph or cell formatting operations If you select a group of cells before invoking the Table Properties dialog this group of cells will be edited instead of the overall table Similarly selecting several cells before invoking the Cell Properties dialog will format t
286. ks if you need to retain page breaks 32 CHAPTER 5 IMPORTING FILES Y Resize images to max ao pixels wide Y Remove any page breaks Import encoding Unicode 8 bit UTF 8 v Style options 8 Create standard style sheet O Use style sheet template Import basic CSS from HTML Epub Styles to assign text and HTML import only First paragraphs Body Text Subsequent paragraphs Body Text First Indent Section headings Heading 1 New Project Step 4 import and style options Step 5 in the Import Method page click on From an existing file containing all sections and specify the ODT file to import from 33 CHAPTER 5 IMPORTING FILES Import Method Now choose how you d like to create your project From a folder of existing text or HTML files one file per section Folder to scan C Users Julian Smart Documents Jutoh Documents Browse From an existing file containing all sections File projects WritingTools Jutoh src Samples Lena odt Browse Use this to import a single file containing all content in text DOCX ODT HTML or Epub format Click Help for details Also you can import from RTF LIT or MOBI if Calibre is installed This is not recommended as the results are not ideal Calibre is available from calibre ebook com O From scratch an initially empty project New Project Step 5 specifying the import method and file Step 6 in the Single Fi
287. l characters The encoding is therefore specified by the user when importing In general UTF 8 is the best encoding to use when saving from a word processor since it can handle any language If you specify a folder of text files each file will be used for a separate Jutoh section If you specify a single text file Jutoh will take you to a wizard page that lets you choose criteria for splitting up the file You may wish to edit your original text file to make it easier for Jutoh to split it into sections for example labelling each chapter Chapter or adding a separator between chapters such as The steps for importing text are mostly the same as for ODT above the main difference being the Single Text File Import page that appears after you have chosen your text file 37 New Project CHAPTER 5 IMPORTING FILES Single Text File Import Choose a pattern that will identify divisions between chapters Use wildcards and to match any number of characters or one character Chapter identification pattern Chapter 8 The matched line is the chapter heading The next line is the chapter heading There is no chapter heading _ Remove lines matching pattern Import encoding Unicode 8 bit UTF 8 v 5 of 100 matches found Please review to check they are correct Preview Lena by Felix Carswell Chapter 1 In my job I mix with some very funny people They don t know they re fu
288. l see an object like this rule You can click on object to change properties such as width and colour These properties won t be reflected within the Jutoh editor but will be output to the Epub or Mobipocket book Bookmarks You can mark text or a picture with a named bookmark so that a link can point back to it Use Format Insert Links Bookmark and give the bookmark a unique name consisting only of alphanumeric characters and underscores If you select content first the bookmark will be associated with that content No extra formatting will be shown but the cursor will change as you move over it and you will be able to click on it to show the bookmark dialog If you don t select content first a bookmark object will be placed at the cursor like this bookmark Note that you don t need a bookmark for a link to point to a whole section only if you need to be able to refer to a specific point within a section Another type of bookmark is the object identifier This is the Id property in the Advanced page of the property dialog for paragraphs text fragments and most objects You can set the identifier for a paragraph using Format Paragraph and the identifier for a text fragment with Format Character However a more reliable method of setting the identifier for a text fragment since styling can break a span of text into separate pieces is to bracket the text with the span tag object see Chapter 16 Working
289. later errors by fixing earlier ones first Click Close and then double click the error to see it in context The Book Error Details dialog As you can see there is an error from EpubCheck followed by a tip from Jutoh that explains more about how that error has arisen and how you might fix it To see exactly where the error is in the Epub file click on the Debug button or double click on an error message You ll see the Book Viewer window 235 File View Help R 25 TROUBLESHOOTING YOUR BOOK Sd Home Play Stop a section 0002 html section 0003 html section 0004 html section 0005 html section 0006 html section 0007 html section 0008 html section 0009 html section 0010 html section 0011 html section 0012 html section 0013 html section 0014 html section 0015 html section 0016 html section 0017 html section 0018 html A d Forward lt Previous gt Next S Options project for accessibility lt a gt lt p gt lt p class P_TOC Entry 2 gt lt a href section 0024 htmifauto bookmark table of mapping works lt a gt lt p gt lt p class P TOC Entry 2 gt lt a href section 0024 htmlfauto bookmark table of your books lt a gt lt p lt a gt lt lt p class P TOC Entry 2 gt lt a href section 0024 html auto bookmark table of lt a gt lt p gt lt p class P TOC Entry 2 gt lt a href section 0024 html auto bookmark table of_
290. le for example you can t then sell the identical edition on Amazon directly Why would you want to do that Well Smashwords doesn t always produce as good an ebook file as if you created it directly with a tool such as Jutoh so you might want to handle some sites yourself and have Smashwords distribute to the remaining ones If you want to take advantage of Amazon s free ebook promotions you need to sell it exclusively on Amazon an annoying restriction but the promotions can be very worthwhile for visibility and collecting reviews Summary In this chapter we ve explored the differences between the major ebooks formats and we ve looked at the most significant distribution platforms and their pros and cons Next we ll try to give some general advice on how you might market your ebooks 237 Chapter 27 Marketing Your Book IO by Harriet Smart Your book exists You have toiled over it now you need people to know about it Easier said than done There are a lot of people shouting and waving their books out there How are people going to know about you and what you have written Step 1 Describe your book Of course you know what your book is about But can you describe the contents briefly and in an understandable and enticing way Look at the blurbs on the back of printed books or the descriptions on Amazon and see how it is done Here s one for a Young Adult novel by Michael Pryor Aubrey Fitzwilli
291. le Import page tell Jutoh how to split the file into book sections which is important for an ebook You can split the file using one of three methods 1 By style specify the heading paragraph styles that indicates the start of a section Specify an asterisk to match against multiple styles and separate multiple heading style patterns by the pipe character 2 By pattern specify a pattern to match against heading text For example you might label each chapter with the prefix Chapter Again use an asterisk to indicate multiple characters to match for example Chapter 3 Using page breaks Jutoh will use page breaks to split the document 34 CHAPTER 5 IMPORTING FILES Jutoh will show a preview of some of the section headings it has found based on your current split settings It will make an initial guess If you cannot persuade Jutoh to find suitable split points you can split your book sections manually later Or you might decide it s easier to edit the original ODT file to let Jutoh find split points In this case you can click on Back and then Next again to have Jutoh reread the changed ODT file You can also adjust a few other options such as removing unused styles the default and discarding empty paragraphs also the default But the defaults are usually best Single File Import Choose a style from the original document that divides book sections If you choose none the book will be imported
292. le of the book in the project outline and click on Properties 2 Choose the Document Document Properties menu command 3 Press Shift Alt Enter 4 In the Project Properties dialog click Document and then Edit Document Properties 39 CHAPTER 6 EDITING AND FORMATTING CONTENT General Notes css Javascript Media Advanced General properties Title Chapter 6 Editing and Formatting Content Id File name Tags Guide type none y Uses _ JavaScript sve _ MathML _ Remote resources Show in Table of Contents NavMap Spine Word count 5909 77799 Compute Include this section for these formats The Book Section Properties dialog Here you can edit the title of the document the guide type see Chapter 24 Advanced Topics for information on guide types an optional HTML file name tags whether to show the document in the table of contents NavMap and spine Epub Mobipocket only whether to include the section for a particular file format and notes for this document You can add tags to allow for conditional inclusion of exclusion of the section in your ebook for more on that see Chapter 23 Conditional Formatting You can also see the word count for this document and the whole project by clicking on Compute and you can see the unique identifier of this document not editable For more advanced use there are tabs for extra CSS for
293. lecting WAV files clicking Configure Viewers and adding a player that is installed on your system To 205 avoid showing a menu that includes the default system audio player clear Show this command for the Default viewer NOTE When previewing a selection with the Preview button or playing an MP3 file it is recommended that on Windows you use a simple audio player such as Media Player Classic and not Windows Media Player since WMP can hold on to the file even if you close it causing an inability to generate the audio file a second time You can configure a suitable for viewer for displaying XML SSML or SAPI files when pressing the Source button by repeating the above configuration but for XML files You could use a text editor or special XML viewer A useful little XML viewer available for free on Windows is XML Viewer by MindFusion Lexicons Sometimes speech engines need help in pronouncing difficult words You can create lexicons containing pronunciations using the lexicon document feature Create a new lexicon document by clicking on the Documents toolbar button and then Add Lexicon Document You can add new lexicon entries using the New button in the lexicon document or via the menu command New Pronunciation in the Objects tab of the Speech palette Lexicons allow you to use phonetic alphabets or aliases sounds like Unless you re a wizard at phonetics you ll probably just want to use aliases to
294. les such as URL are used by features in Jutoh in the case of URL for applying a link style in various situations for example in a generated table of contents or for a page link So it s best not to delete the standard styles unless you really know what you re doing The following lists the styles that are added by Jutoh The asterisked styles should not be deleted and the other styles can be replaced by custom styles in various dialogs but you may wish to play it safe and not delete any of them By default certain standard styles will be restored when opening a project You can turn this behaviour off via Options in Project Properties by clearing Restore missing standard styles e Body Text Body Text First Indent e Bullet List 1 e Citation e Centre e Comment e Drop Caps Endnotes Group e Endnotes Heading e Headers e Footers e Footnote e Heading 1 6 52 e HTML HTML Text e Index Entry 1 3 e Index Group Heading Index Heading e Normal e Numbered List 1 e Preformatted Right Small Caps e TOC Entry 1 6 TOC Heading URL x Since you can have multiple style sheets in a project the style sheet that s being used and edited at any given moment is the one that s specified in the Style sheet property of the currently selected configuration You don t need to concern yourself with that if you will only be using the default style sheet but it s worth bearing in
295. ll assume that the type added to the HTML body tag defines an overall section for the 196 document You can define any number of mapping items for the same heading level so it is a more powerful way of indicating headings than the simple Heading style prefix configuration option and overrides it Similarly for phrase tag mappings character styles are matched against entries in the mapping and the appropriate tags inserted For em and strong tags any italic and bold attributes are removed Also be aware that any advanced properties or advanced attributes such as identifier or Epub type will be removed as well for em and strong tags only Using speech in your books Jutoh can help generate SMIL media overlay files both with and without associated media files and timings Unfortunately the largest ebook vendor Amazon doesn t yet support SMIL files but this may change In the Accessibility page in Project Properties click on the Speech tab and check Generate overlays for TTS Now Jutoh will create a SMIL file for each section document describing the document at the paragraph level if other document specific settings do not take precedence Even without an associated sound track this provides useful information to suitably aware ereaders To add narration to your book which also makes use of media overlays see Adding narration to your book You can add lexicons to your project to help text to spe
296. ll increase or decrease the level of the current paragraph in the list It is dependent on the particular ebook reader whether the particular bullet or numbering style will be honoured so you may see a different style in the ebook than in Jutoh The Bulleted List and Numbered List buttons in the toolbar apply the styles called Bullet List 1 and Numbered List 1 respectively To apply a different list style use the Format Bullets and Numbering menu command which will give you a choice of list styles to apply along with the option to renumber the list 57 Bullet List 1 Bullet List 1 Numbered List 1 Outline List 1 List level 1 Duis pharetra consequat dui Nullam vitae justo id mauris lobortis interdum List level 2 Duis pharetra consequat dui Nullam vitae justo id mauris lobortis interdum Listlevel 3 Duis pharetra consequat dui Nullam vitae justo id mauris lobortis interdum Restart numbering OK Cancel The Bullets and Numbering dialog You can renumber a list without choosing a style using the Format Renumber command and you can remove list styling from one or more paragraphs by clicking on a bullet or numbering toolbar button Non contiguous list numbering is possible by repeated use of Format Renumber specifying the start number but not all ereaders support this and it can cause EpubCheck errors so use with caution and be sure that your ebook distributor doesn t reject the file
297. llowing dialog 241 CHAPTER 25 TROUBLESHOOTING YOUR BOOK Document Cleanup Choose which aspects of document formatting Jutoh will dean up Note that this operation cannot be undone so you are advised to make a copy of your Jutoh project first Click on Help for more information about each of the following options Remove ad hoc font names from text Remove ad hoc point size from text _ Remove ad hoc text colour _ Remove ad hoc background colour _ Remove empty paragraphs _ Remove spaces at the start and end of paragraphs and strip all tabs Remove line breaks at the end of footnotes and sections Remove all line breaks _ Replace straight quotation marks Remove automatic bookmarks _ Remove unused bookmarks _ Convert bookmarks to footnotes for content imported from InDesign HTML _ Repair missing character style names _ Remove redundant character formatting _ Substitute missing styles The Document Cleanup dialog This will give you the option of removing erroneous spaces ad hoc automatic style font and size styling within spans of text empty paragraphs line breaks and automatically generated or unused bookmarks It can also replace missing styles with specified ones and convert blank lines to proper style based spacing Use this feature with caution since it can make a lot of changes to your project back up your project first Another handy way of correcting styles is t
298. llows you to replace co uk with dot co dot uk within web domains 3 Use paragraph and character styles Normally you will use speech and pause objects to refine speech behaviour changing the properties in the objects as required But there s another method apply the properties to paragraph and character styles Then the speech markup won t be immediately obvious in the editor but you can save a lot of time if you can improve speech just by editing styles that are used throughout the project One example would be clarifying chapter headings If the chapters aren t prefixed by a chapter number or an obvious indication that they are headings besides the visual style then you could edit the Heading 1 style and in the Advanced tab set the property Content before to Chapter This will be inserted in front of all paragraphs styled with Heading 1 giving a better hint to the listener that this is the start of a new chapter An alternative approach in this case is to enable automatic numbering for headings in Project Properties Fields amp Numbering Note that the Content before and Content after properties apply to all configurations not just speech So to avoid changing the heading content for all possible formats you would need to use different style sheets for different formats To do this duplicate the default style sheet change the Heading 1 style for your second style sheet and set the MP3
299. log and click Install Jutoh on External Drive You will be presented with the Mobile Installation Wizard which will take you through the necessary steps You can install Jutoh from the web from the version you re currently running or from zip files you downloaded earlier You can install Jutoh for different operating systems and they will all share the same application data files The Windows version of the software is installed to Applications Jutoh Windows Jutoh x yz and other platforms are installed to similar paths but with an appropriate platform name in place of Windows Launching Jutoh on Windows If you installed the Windows version from a Windows computer a shortcut will appear on the mobile drive top level folder You can double click that from Explorer to get started Launching Jutoh on Linux The Linux version has a launcher script called jutoh linux which uses a relative path to the actual binary so when using it your current directory should be the drive itself You may find that you don t have execute permission on the external drive particularly if the drive is formatted with a Windows file system such as FAT32 In this case you need to mount the drive with different options and you can do that by editing the file etc fstab as root You should add a line that tells the system to use special options Here s an example dev sdb1 media usbdisk vfat rw shortname mixed uid 1000 gid 1000 user auto exec 0 0 To find
300. low To use a natural language equivalent of the content such as the expansion of an abbreviation use the Alias property In order to cater for different alphabets in the same object you can use a comma separated list of phonemes in the Phoneme property and a corresponding list of alphabets in the Alphabet property Then specify the valid alphabets in the Lexicon alphabets speech profile property as a comma separated list these can contain wildcards to match multiple alphabets Jutoh will filter out the invalid alphabets for this configuration and speech profile For text to speech output Jutoh will also take into account the current speech engine to filter out further invalid 302 alphabets The first of the remaining alphabets if any will be used CereVoice when using CereVoice with SAPI you can specify either x microsoft sapi as the alphabet or a name that includes the word cerevoice In this case instead of using the pron tag the lex tag will be generated with CereVoice phonemes Rest Supported for Epub SSML SAPI Apple Controls the pause that occurs between any aural cues and the rendering of the associated element For example 25ms Oms Use null to specify that one of the values should be absent You can use a pause object for this or a speech or span object or you can use it in a style Say as Supported for SSML SAPI Apple partial This property uses SSML conventions t
301. lt write if variable set Author gt lt text value gt lt variable name Author surnamesfirst attributes strong gt Test Reset to Default Gotoline ok Cancel The bibliographic formatting template editor Update the bibliography via Book Update to reapply the template to the bibliography section 300 Appendix E Speech Markup Reference ONT This topic describes the properties you can use to enhance text to speech through markup in content using speech span div pause or other objects or via advanced paragraph or style properties Property reference To understand which properties can be used with a given speech engine check the description of the selected speech engine in Preferences Speech This will indicate whether SSML is supported SAPI XML is supported when you select Microsoft SAPI and Apple Speech Manager text is supported when you select Apple Speech Manager Note that not all SSML properties are supported by all voices and SSML speech engines Most of the time you will be marking up text within a paragraph and not across paragraphs If you wish a single object to span several paragraphs ensure that the start and end objects are on lines of their own This will ensure that Jutoh can emit correct and not overlapping markup Alias Supported for SSML SAPI Apple text Provides an alterna
302. lways checked your Epubs with EpubCheck without having to remember to press Check You can specify the default document folder and finally you can choose the user interface display language currently just English but this will be expanded in future as people contribute translations 292 Appendix C The Jutoh Box Model SIC To understand the way margins padding and borders work when showing a text box table table cell or image consider this simplified illustration of the box model used by Jutoh as well as by CSS and to some extent other formats Outline Border The box model At the centre you have the content area containing the paragraphs in your box Separating the content and the border is padding which gives breathing space around your content The optional border is itself surrounded by the margin and outside the margin you may have an outline which is a secondary border drawn around the overall box It s very rare to use the outline though and only HTML based formats support it So when considering the space taken up by a box you need to include the content margin padding and any border and outline The box model applies to cells within tables and tables themselves In the case of tables the cells are the table content and so the padding represents the gap between the outer table border and the cells and the padding is also used for the inter cell gaps When you specify width and height in Jutoh the
303. margins is all very well but what if you want more page layout detail such as headers and footers in particular parts of the book showing page numbers and other information There are three ways to set page layout as specified in the Page Layout tab of the Project Properties dialog 1 Basic page layout the same page layout applies throughout the book 2 Manual page layout Jutoh leaves all page layout to individual book section properties 212 3 Automatic page layout the default Jutoh creates headers and footers and optional page numbering at the start of the main book content The first method won t add any headers or footers or page numbering only the most basic layout will be specified paper size margins and whether to mirror margins These document wide settings will also be output as the default page style for the other two methods unless a page style called Standard has been defined in which case Standard will be used as the default page style The second method manual page layout is the most flexible You can specify page layout styles per section document in the Page tab of the Book Section Properties dialog This method is set when you run the Print on demand wizard with Book Help with Print on Demand The third method lets you leave it to Jutoh to decide where numbering begins after the table of contents or the section with a text guide type or you can specify a particular section You ca
304. mats Recent versions of Microsoft Word can also open ODT files Jutoh s recommended file import format is ODT and Jutoh supports ODT book export Paragraph style Named paragraph styles are applied to whole paragraphs and are important in enforcing consistency throughout a project For example the Normal style is defined by default You can view and edit paragraph styles using Book Project Properties or Edit on the toolbar and clicking on Styles You can apply paragraph styles using the drop down list in the formatting toolbar or by right clicking on selected text then choosing Styles styles in the context popup 266 menu Reflowable ebook A reflowable ebook does not have a fixed number of pages since pagination is dependent on display size and user customisations such as font size and device orientation Jutoh can create both reflowable and fixed layout ebooks Style sheet Usually used to describe the Jutoh style sheet a collection of paragraph character and list style definitions A Jutoh project can have multiple style sheets Jutoh style sheets are only indirectly related to CSS sheets and you cannot import from a CSS sheet However you can export Jutoh style sheets for import into other projects 267 Appendix A Installing Jutoh gt 9C SNE This appendix describes how to install Jutoh and associated third party software on the main supported platforms For further configuration including for text to speech pleas
305. mended by Apple for creating label files for media overlays in case that gives you extra confidence Here s a screenshot of Audacity with an audio track and label track 169 CHAPTER 17 ADDING NARRATION TO YOUR BOOK File Edit View Transport Tracks Generate Pod bd Dad Bad Bod H YE rr ere j Tena EPI t lo O AMALIA lt Selection Start End O Length Audio Position Tuwo vi snap oC OOOIOSO RINGS O Audacity with an audio track and label track Run Audacity and open the narration audio track If the audio file is in a format not supported by Audacity you may need to convert it to for example WAV or MP3 first You can use software such as FFmpeg to do this or you can use an online file converter Now add a label track in Audacity using Tracks Add New Label Track Use View Zoom In Ctrl 1 as many times as you need to view enough detail At high zoom levels you will be able to see roughly where word phrase and sentence boundaries are by the appearance of the wave form To add a label define the clip start and end positions using a drag movement or more precise dragging of the start and end positions You can use Audacity s snap to nearest label option to make it easier to create consecutive audio segments Press Play to see if you have got the clip position right When you have use Tracks Add Label at Selection Ctrl B and start typing For each span identifier in your Jutoh docu
306. ment add a label with the same name in the Audacity label track When doing this you can refer to Jutoh s Inspector Palette with its list of bookmarks including span identifiers and their context When you have finished marking up the clips save the label track as a text file using File Export Labels You can have several label tracks for a document if you wish 170 Step 4 Import the label track The Jutoh book section properties dialog has a Media page within which you can define timing sets for narration synchronisation A timing set is simply a list of start and end times clips each with a label The label will identify which part of the content the clip applies to As noted above you can have as many timing sets as you wish for each document since you might have several audio files for the document and corresponding label files A timing set in Jutoh corresponds to an Audacity label file but we give it a neutral name timing set since you may define your timings in a different way such as adding each one manually though this would be laborious Here s a screenshot of the Media page with a timing set defined Te ry General Notes CSS JavaScript Media i Advanced Media overlay If you have a custom SMIL resource not generated by Jutoh specify it here SMIL resource x Duration in seconds 0 00 Overlay timings Specify timing sets that are used to synchronise narration When the
307. menu command Type the note text in the editor dialog press OK and this note symbol will appear in the text note To edit the note just click on the symbol You may wish to resize the editor to see more items on the toolbar Since you cannot use menubar commands from the footnote editor dialog you can instead use the context popup menu to format text this is shown with right click on Windows and Linux or control click on Mac Note that currently Jutoh applies the Footnote style to all footnotes when appended to a section or collated in the Endnotes section unless Always apply style is cleared in index properties Configuration You can configure the way footnotes and endnotes are presented via the Footnotes and Endnotes page in Project Properties Click on Edit on the toolbar or Book Project Properties or type Alt Enter then click on Indexes and finally on Footnotes and Endnotes 119 y Metadata Contents Index AL Cover Styles Indexes Configurations i Assets Strings Options Fixed Layout Accessibility Info i Document Footnotes and Endnotes Footnote style Footnote Y Always apply style Base reference style Citation Y Reference styles Superscript Y atcitation and Superscript Y before each note Footnotes 8 Generate footnotes at the end of each section Edit Footnotes Rule Properti Unlike endnotes footnotes are automatically
308. metadata Smashwords Smashwords is very popular with authors especially as it has distribution deals with other major ebook platforms in addition to selling them directly from the Smashwords site in multiple formats So if you want to be listed on sites that you can t upload to on your own and or want to save yourself the hassle of submitting to multiple sites this is great You submit a file in Microsoft Word format so you need to do that extra conversion step in OpenOffice org Writer or Microsoft Word after generating an OpenDocument file destined for Smashwords Note that Microsoft Word creates a more compact file Smashwords will take your Word file and pass it through their Meatgrinder program to convert it into the various formats supported by Smashwords Epub Mobipocket HTML PDF and more The conversion is pretty good most of the time but you may find that the output is not quite as good as if you generated the file directly using a program such as Jutoh When you create a Jutoh project a Smashwords OpenDocument configuration is added in addition to OpenDocument The only difference between these is that the Smashwords variant has the Special index formatting and Special footnote formatting properties disabled since Meatgrinder doesn t like the special formatting associated with these options So instead of using special fields Jutoh will generate the index and footnote text in full There are two methods
309. mobi file to Amazon KDP you are also required to submit a high resolution version of your cover separately so strictly speaking you don t need a cover in your mobi file You can set the Cover design configuration setting to none However when previewing it s nice to see a cover and there is no harm in leaving a low resolution cover in your mobi file when you upload it You may be surprised that Kindle books don t open on the cover This is an Amazon decision and it s not possible to force books to do this Checking your Kindle ebook For automated checking you can can check the Generate Epub option in your Mobipocket configuration so that Check can work on the Epub equivalent of the Mobipocket file the formats share files and most formatting Some Mobipocket specific HTML will be included in this Epub so you may need to ignore a few of the errors in particular those flagging up incorrectly positioned a tags bookmarks If you are also generate Epub files be sure to change the name of your file using the Book file name option in your Mobipocket configuration otherwise you will overwrite the file generated by the Epub configuration which will have different optimizations We recommend that you review your Kindle book in both Kindle for PC Mac and Kindle Previewer Kindle Previewer lets you set the current simulated device type For checking how books will look on iOS unfortunately you need an iOS device How
310. mple to align object B with respect to object A click first A then B right click or control click on the Mac or click on the Tools button and choose Align Left The first clicked object will be the reference object with respect to which the other selections will be aligned 180 Faragrapn styles v more Fixed Layout x Page X Objects Cut Copy Paste Delete Left Right Undo od Centre Horizontally Redo Ciriey Same Width Select All Top Add Text Box Bottom Add Image Centre Vertically Background gt Same Height E Align gt Same Size a _ _ ___ _ __ _____ a ______ loft 7 2 Dinht 7N The Tools context menu If you only select a single object it will be aligned with respect to the page if possible applicable horizontal or vertical alignment These are the available alignment commands Left align the left side of an object with the left side of the reference object Right align the right side of an object with the right side of the reference object Centre Horizontally horizontally align the centre of an object with the centre of the reference object or the centre of the page Same Width give an object the same width as the reference object Top align the top of an object with the top of the reference object Bottom align the bottom of an object with the bottom of the reference object Centre Vertically vertically align the centre of an object with the centr
311. n Launch after compiling an ebook You can configure the applications using the Helpers page in the Preferences dialog shown below 274 APPENDIX B CONFIGURING JUTOH gt E aa Jutoh Preferences MES General Viewer applications Appearance Highlighting File types a Epub files epub v X i x E Media Types Viewers for Epub files Name Azardi FE L Command C Program Files x86 infogridpacific AZARDI azardi 2 0 exe Show this command Configuring commands for Epub Here we selected Epub files epub and clicked on Configure To add a new application click on Add and enter the application name and full command path The Default application is always present and means run the application currently associated with this file type by the operating system If only one application is defined for a file type then a menu will not be shown when launching the application for that file type The following screenshot illustrates what happens when a Mobipocket helper for Kindle Previewer has been defined for Kindle Previewer and the user clicks on Launch The default viewer is Kindle for PC so the user has a choice between running Kindle for PC or Kindle Previewer for the current Mobipocket configuration 275 SH E P O Oj R Compile Check Launch Previous Next Appendix B Configuring Jute Default Previewer Clicking Launch with several viewe
312. n bullets In the Spacing sub page define indentation appropriate for the current level Font for Level Indentation tenths of a mm Spacing tenths of a mm Before a paragraph 60 After a paragraph Justified Centred 8 Indeterminate Line spacing none List level 1 Duis pharetra consequat dui Nullam vitae justo id mauris lobortis interdum List level 2 Duis pharetra consequat dui Nullam vitae justo id mauris lobortis interdum o Listlevel 3 Duis pharetra consequat dui Nullam vitae justo id mauris lobortis interdum List Style Editor spacing sub page The first line left indent defines the distance between the left margin and the bullet while the left indent defines the distance between the left margin and the start of the list item text These values may be ignored depending on format and ebook reader List styles are the only way to achieve bulleted or numbered paragraphs you can t define bullets per 138 paragraph Note that the bulleted and numbered list buttons in the toolbar are hard wired to apply the styles called Bullet List 1 and Numbered List 1 So if you delete either of these styles the relevant button will no longer work To apply a different list style use the Format Bullets and Numbering menu command which will give you a choice of list styles to apply along with the option to renumber
313. n choose from a small number of header and footer options the book title current book chapter or page number The Headers and Footers paragraph styles will be used to format any header or footer you specify here When using manual page layout and assigning page styles to sections you don t specify the properties directly but instead create and edit a project wide page style which you can do from the Page tab Then you can assign the same page style to multiple sections You can choose whether to start numbering at this section but you must also set a page style The page style properties contain paper size and margins as before which override the configuration options Or you can choose to use the configuration options for these values As well as the Layout option to mirror margins you can specify only left or only right pages in which case the other page will be blank So if you want a section to start on the right hand page specify Right for Layout and specify a Next Style to use for the pages after the first one in the section When exporting a PDF from the ODT file in LibreOffice or OpenDocument don t forget to check the option Export automatically inserted blank pages in the word processor s PDF Export dialog You can specify a numbering style such as arabic or roman and the start number if not overridden by the text section properties Finally you can specify the header and footer properties as described b
314. n customisation of the text within your ebook Next we look at how you can use tables in your book 149 Chapter 14 Working With Tables SIC This chapter describes how to create and edit tables in Jutoh for presenting tabular data Introduction You can create tables within Jutoh or import them from HTML Epub DOCX and ODT and include them in your generated ODT Epub and Kindle files Supported features include border and cell background colour several border line styles column and row spanning e an editable gallery of table templates e arbitrary content in cells including graphics and nested tables e multiple cell property editor and table property editor Don t expect to use all of the advanced table features in your favourite word processor such as shading fancy border styles and vertical text But you can still create a wide range of table appearances and Jutoh s table tools should be more than sufficient for all but the most demanding user E Gorilla Crocodile Ant Simple examples of tables in Jutoh 150 Creating and editing tables To create a table use the Format Table Insert Table menu command or the Ctri Shift A keyboard shortcut or click on the New Table button on the toolbar This will show the Insert Table dialog as illustrated below Name MyTable Columns Options Border Table template Borders Gallery Data Orange Apple Banana Clementine Separator
315. n you will have trouble adjusting the type size without content either disappearing off the screen or leaving blank areas We will not say much more about PDF in this book but suffice it to say that if you need to support PDF Jutoh can help you create these files by generating ODT which you can load into OpenOffice org or LibreOffice and from there export to PDF Since Jutoh can handle all major ebook formats it means that you can distribute your books for Apple iBooks on iPhone iPod Touch iPad Amazon Kindle any Android device Kobo Barnes amp Noble Nook and many other devices as well as for any PC or Mac What is Jutoh Jutoh is an editor for creating your ebooks you can create a book from scratch in Jutoh or you can import an existing book As we ve seen Jutoh can generate the major ebook formats Unlike most word processors Jutoh divides ebook content into sections which is more naturally suited to the way ebooks work Jutoh is a bit like a word processor in that it supports content formatting but it is geared towards generating a variety of ebook formats with various tools to help with this task You can add images to your documents and experimentally sound and video where supported by the ebook reader For clarity here are some things that Jutoh is not e Jutoh is not just a converter Although you can import from several different file formats it s an editor so you can write content and apply formatting within Jutoh
316. nced Topics we look at a variety of advanced topics such as character encodings embedding font and media guide types and more In Chapter 25 Troubleshooting Your Book we explain the ways in which you can check and improve your book after compiling it If you find problems with your book this chapter is your first port of call In Chapter 26 Understanding Ebook Formats and Platform we describe some of the nuances of ebook formats and distribution platforms that you should be aware of In Chapter 27 Marketing Your Book we take a look at various ways in which you can get your book to a wider audience The Glossary may be useful for getting used to various terms used within this guide and the software itself In Appendix A Installing Jutoh we look at how to install Jutoh on various operating systems In Appendix B Configuring Jutoh we describe how to configure various aspects of Jutoh in particular useful third party applications such as Kindlegen and EpubCheck In Appendix C The Jutoh Box Model we describe how content padding margins and border all relate to one another In Appendix D The Bibliographic Formatting Language we describe the XML based language for XIV customising how a bibliography is formatted In Appendix E Speech Markup Reference we list the available speech properties and their usage In Appendix F Speech Profile Reference we list the options available in a speech profile for altering
317. nces to be sure that the desired entries are being found Alphabetical Index Jutoh will create or recreate an index page if you check this option Endnotes Jutoh will not create endnotes since this option is currently disabled You can enable it from Project Properties Update Special Book Sections dialog If any of these special sections are out of date since the last compile for example you added headings index entries or footnotes you can show this dialog using Book Update or F9 and click Update to update all checked special sections Note that you can also elect to automatically update these sections when you compile via controls in the Project Properties dialog so you can be sure they are always up to date Configuration categories Let s look at the property categories in detail Locations This category contains location related properties Usually you don t need to edit these Book folder used to specify the folder in which the ebook for this configuration will be generated The folder containing the project will be substituted for the keyword FOLDER which is the default value Book file name this is FILENAME by default you might want to change the name if you have multiple configurations for the same format Note that an appropriate extension will be appended so you don t have to include that in your file name value For example if your project is called MyBooks you could use FILENAME ibooks
318. nd Click All to apply this to all entries and then click OK to dismiss the dialog Right click over the special Table of Contents field that has been inserted in the document and choose Update Index Table and you should find that a table of contents with page numbers appears All this will be done automatically if you already have a table of contents in your project marked with the toc guide type MP3 Jutoh can output audio books in the form of MP3 files using the operating system s built in text to speech engine or one of several other engines such as eSpeak Obviously this is not going to be as good as a human reading the book but it can be helpful in some circumstances such as listening to a book when commuting Also note that when using some voices the generated MP3 files can t be distributed commercially without permission from the original voice license holder Creation of MP3 files requires an MP3 encoder Jutoh uses the LAME encoder as described in Appendix A Installing Jutoh 230 Platforms Amazon Kindle Kindle books account for the majority of all ebooks sold so it s obviously important to be in the Kindle store Fortunately Amazon makes this very easy for the independent author or small publisher using their publishing tools in the USA and UK check for support in other countries You can upload your Jutoh generated Mobipocket file and Amazon will encrypt it for you if you wish One of the gre
319. nd Jutoh Ebook formats What is Jutoh What kinds of book can be created with Jutoh The book creation lifecycle How to get content into Jutoh Tools to use with Jutob Summary 2 Getting Started Creating a new project Adobe Digital Editions showing a NavMap and table of contents Ebook readers will present the NavMap in different ways and some may label it the table of contents The main point is that in an Epub you have to have a NavMap but a separate table of contents page is optional Mobipocket files also have a NavMap but in Kindle hardware it s not actually shown On Kindle for PC and Mac you can show the NavMap using Show Document Navigation and on Kindle Previewer 106 this is available via NCX View as follows 2 Kindle for iPhone Previewer Ele View Goto Devices Utilities Help e 4 p gt Baa gl El 3 NCX View The Page Table of Contents Preface Introduction Ebooks and Jutoh 2 Getting Started The Jutoh User Interface Working Wth Projects Editing and Formatting Content Editing Your Book s Metadata 7 Creating Your Cover Design Understanding Configurations 9 Working Wh Pictures 10 Working With Indexes 11 Working With Style Sheets 12 Working With String Tables 13 Creating Speech MP3 Files Owes wre SPP eeee ee co 14 Differences Between Formats 15 Advanced Topics 16 Cestributing and Marketing Your Book Appendix A Installing Jutoh Appandx 8 Configuring Jutoh
320. nd See fields in the index entry dialog Added descriptions for the new configuration options Epub version Orientation lock Optimize style sheet Abbreviate style names Use heading text size Visible URLs Use outline levels 316 e Styles suppressing hyphenation HTML top margin HTML bottom margin and Convert horizontal bar to em dash Documented the search box and reordering buttons in the Configurations page Changed erroneous 200Kb section size limit to 300Kb Clarified the effect of width and height settings for various formats Expanded the section on creating PDF documents Corrected typos kindly pointed out by Jim Kerwin Version 1 1 November 8th 2011 Removed text asserting that hanging indent is not supported in Mobipocket since this is fixed in Jutoh 1 39 Fixed text describing how to insert page numbers in OpenOffice org LibreOffice noting that the Format Title Page command is only available in LibreOffice Documented the configuration option Use relative dimensions new in Jutoh 1 39 Version 1 0 October 26th 2011 First edition 317
321. nd formatting and how to accelerate your typing and styling using shortcuts and favourites You can read more about styles in Chapter 12 Working With Style Sheets It s worth repeating an essential point create and use named styles wherever possible and don t use ad hoc formatting When you come to tweak your book formatting you ll be glad if took this advice and planned ahead rather than having to make potentially thousands of changes in your document Next we ll look at editing the project s metadata the information describing the book 61 CHAPTER 6 EDITING AND FORMATTING CONTENT 62 Chapter 7 Editing Your Book s Metadata SIC Each project must have a minimal amount of metadata which describes the project to the reading software to display if appropriate It is required for Epub and Mobipocket formats This chapter explains what metadata you should provide and how to do it The metadata panel When you create a project you will be prompted for a small amount of the possible metadata that can be provided You can edit more metadata via the Metadata tab of the Project Properties dialog click on the _ Edit toolbar button 63 CHAPTER 7 EDITING YOUR BOOK S METADATA Book title Creating Great Ebooks Using Jutoh i Language en iz Indexes Configurations Identifier ISBN Assets Strings Author Julian Smart Date 2012 Options Fixed Layout Contributor s
322. nd other properties that only more complex books are likely to need Note that if you specify a CSS class name image properties such as maximum size and margin will not be included in the generated code as they are assumed to be specified by the class 100 Adding captions to images You can add captions as normal paragraphs above or below an image You can manually add the caption and apply a suitable paragraph style or if you wish to automatically number your images you can use the command Format Insert Caption This lets you enter the caption text and choose what kind of object you are captioning such as a picture or table Jutoh will then insert the caption text and a sequence field that automatically increments the caption number Finally Jutoh will apply a suitable paragraph style You may find that page breaks appear between the image and the caption which is not ideal For Kindle books it seems that nothing can be done about it for now but for most other ereaders you can get Jutoh to glue them together using a non breaking div tag To do this apply a named style to your captions using different style names depending on whether the caption is above or below the image Now show the Project Properties dialog and click on Accessibility Check Add figure and caption tags and type style patterns for captions below images and captions above images You can leave one of them blank if all your captions are in the same pos
323. nd that are more succinct equivalents to using if but sometimes if is needed when a whole block of commands is conditional finish This command is used to terminate the template immediately and avoid further unnecessary tests It is not essential to use this set This command sets a variable to a text value or the value of a different variable for example lt set name Id value of Number gt lt set name PersonSeparator value and gt The first set command sets a new variable d to the value of the Number variable which contains the position of the current item in the bibliography list 297 The second set command sets the value a variable which is used to tell Jutoh how to separate a list of names for example if there are multiple authors write This command writes text or variable values to the bibliography Two further tags can be nested within write text and variable The text tag takes a value attribute with the text to write and variable takes a name attribute for the variable whose value should be written The write command can take the following attributes if variable set if the value of the specified field is empty the write command is not executed if variable eq if the value of the specified field is the same as the value attribute the write command is executed if variable neq if the value of the specified field is not the same as the value attribute the write command is executed attribute
324. ndering how Jutoh opens recently edited files if the drive name and even the operating system changes between Jutoh sessions Jutoh does this by saving the last known external drive when it quits so when it runs again it can convert the old file names to new ones if it turns out that they were relative to the external drive Using a mobile drive for settings If you use the mobile drive for storing settings you can keep important information mobile such as your registration key auto replace customisation cover design templates and other data that Jutoh makes use of This is independent of your own project files Go to the Mobile Preferences dialog and in the Portable Settings section check Store all settings on an external drive You will be asked to restart the program When Jutoh runs again you will be prompted for a drive and any new settings will be stored on that drive Your registration information will be copied to the drive but no other settings will be copied The new settings will be stored in folder Application Data Jutoh on the external drive If you wish to copy previous setings see Jutoh files for where to find the old settings 212 Running Jutoh from a mobile drive The most portable method of using Jutoh is to install the software on the mobile drive If you do this all settings will also be stored on the drive as described in the previous section To install Jutoh to a mobile drive go to the Mobile Preferences dia
325. ndle books Version 1 7 July 24th 2013 e Added new configuration options Mobipocket anchor optimization Pre compile command Post compile command Version 1 6 May 15th 2013 e Added new configuration options Styles suppressing page break before Styles suppressing page break after Character substitutions Character style substitutions Orphan control for single letter words Emulate small caps Dimension units Font size units Generate colour Generate iBooks XML Widow control Orphan control Namespaces e Removed references to the obsolete preflight checker which has been removed from Jutoh since version 1 67 Version 1 5 January 18th 2013 e Added a description of the formatting palette to the Editing and Formatting Content chapter e Added a description of how to fix the unmanifested content Lulu error to the Troubleshooting chapter Updated screenshots to reflect UI changes e Mentioned Jutoh Plus in the Introduction in relation to custom HTML provision e Updated the Glossary 315 Elaborated on viewer applications in Configuring Jutoh Documented the new configuration options Generate colour Generate generic font names Character substitutions Orphan control for single letter words Custom paper width Custom paper height Dots per inch Extra metadata Include media documents matching tags Exclude media documents matching tags Added some more tips to the troubleshooting chapter Version 1 4
326. nds will apply to the contents of the box You can edit the box properties with the Box command on the context menu This shows a formatting dialog with various pages namely Box Size Margins Borders Background and Advanced Box Size Border Outline Corner Border Y Left Solid v Right Solid v Top Solid vi Bottom Solid Synchronize values The Box Properties dialog showing the Borders page In the Box page you can define a style see below and also whether the box is treated as an aside outside the main flow of the text for the purposes of Epub 3 You can define borders with a small range of styles solid dotted and dashed a width and colour 160 You can also define a rounded corner radius but rounded corners are not supported on many ereaders For example Adobe Digital Editions Nook and Bluefire Reader do not support them However they are supported on Kindle KF8 Kobo and iBooks If rounded corners are specified the whole border will have just one style and width individual differences between sides will be ignored To delete a box click outside the box and delete it as you would a single character If you want to preserve the contents of the box you will need to cut and paste it elsewhere before deleting the box By default boxes size to their content and any padding but you can set a specific width and or height using the box properties dialog Currently you can t resize a box
327. ne 3 How te pet content into Tuto a 4 Tools to us with MO A a 5 SUMMA AAN 6 Chapt r 2 Getting Started AMA 7 Creating A new PTO ES A alate alent ela E R tah 7 Step t M tadata id EA id RA T Step 2 Projeet LAI A A a ais 8 Step 3 Layout C O E a a E a Mead aa Wastes a T a A Ra ara a Eee AES 9 SEA OPINO aT P AA EA E E A E AE TE E E A 10 Steps Import Method dal 11 Sep Gm Mle File IMPOR lidad 12 Step 7 Cover DE e e es 13 Using Quick A OS 15 Compiling the Pr ys ia ld 15 RI 16 Chapter 3 The Jutoh User Inter tac ini oran a oa caS Sai aia 17 Menu Dat ad es atc a a A 2 Cant ke aaa a a 17 o asi SO 18 COMPO Pa a a O O 19 Document ared Mii A Ode 20 Loe anidcerror windows Di tecad ean tasellndtannedajusedeasateiaas Goines a 21 Formatting Palta 21 GE A NN 21 Proj ct PrOPSIliSs MAMI ne 24 SUMMA Yo ea St e ts Set Cel See DC aoe e do oll 25 Chapter 4 Working With Pro edu dit 26 OV EL VIE Weak APP AN 26 Creating and deleting do dc 27 Movine docto 27 IMA DEE AS E A ita 28 Whereis My pro Ei ads 28 DIA e Din a 28 So AA E een eels 30 A A A A su Ba et amen RAT 30 Chapter 5 Importing Piles sis ccsecnisecesconssseoaussesaansupancoeaiacentastoducecoucssdeunsscoeesidonustentatesatasssunodSuvivosseeseaynes 31 What can Jutob Import A AR OA A aa N ES TENS 31 Microsoft Word XML DOCX and OpenDocument Text ODD ooooniccninccnocaninccinonccnonnnccnnnnnnos 31 Plantex ta ennea aE shes og At T E ig E E A E T 37 HTM Grd a O aed ee adh 40 Epu o
328. need Jutoh to convert them to JPEG since Epub and Mobipocket do not support TIFF A pasted image will always be inserted as a PNG If you want to insert an image as a particular type such as JPEG you can use Format Insert Picture to insert it as a file instead Note that separate image documents in your project created via Document Add Image Document or the toolbar new document command are not included in your ebooks These documents are purely to help you organize pictures that might or might not be pasted into the book at some point Editing basic picture properties To edit picture properties click on the picture or right click control click on Mac and choose Picture The tabbed dialog illustrated below will be shown 95 Picture Size Margins Borders Background Advanced Properties Name Box style Alternative text SVG alternative Format Original format PNG O Preserve original format Original size 491 x 450 15062 bytes File operations Export Editing picture properties If the Name field has a value it will be used to form the file name of the picture and if several pictures have the same name only the first will be output to the ebook This means that you can repeat pictures without them taking extra space in the ebook file However if you find that pictures are repeated erroneously you can disable this behaviour by clearing the configuration option Use specified image fil
329. need to add a see or see also entry you can choose one of these options from the Type dropdown control and then type text into the See entry It will be placed by the relevant entry in the index according to the entry and key fields This kind of index entry doesn t have to live anywhere in particular but is easy to lose so consider inserting all see and see also entries into the same page Configuration You can edit various aspects of index presentation in the Index Properties page Click on Edit on the toolbar or Book Project Properties or type Alt Enter then click on Indexes then Index and finally on the Options tab 117 y Metadata Contents Index Footnotes amp Endnotes Cover Styles Indexes Configurations gt Assets Section tite Index Level style Index Entry 1 Strings Options Title style Index Heading y Level 2style Index Entry 2 Fixed Layout i Accessibility Group style Index Group Heading v Level 3 style Index Entry 3 Info i Document Link style URL v Index options Link format LINK Link separator Entry separator Only use linked numbers Automatically build index Generate Index Now Index options Settings include the title of the section and how items are to be formatted Using the Link format field you can choose whether items will be bracketed You can customise separators between the entry text
330. nerate a file called com apple ibooks display options xml with specified fonts set to true This will tell iBooks to respect the fonts that are specified in the 253 book otherwise iBooks will choose standard fonts Please note that if the configuration option Exclude cover from reading order is checked the cover image does not appear in the actual iBooks reader only in the iBooks bookshelf Here are some of the recommendations Apple gives for creating Epub files for iBooks e Use guide types such as toc title page preface other back cover and so on use the Book Section Properties dialog available by right clicking on a document in the project outline and choosing Properties or by using the Document Document Properties Shift Alt Enter or Alt Click The first page displayed will be determined from the guide type in this order of preference text acknowledgements dedication epigraph foreword preface other intro Override this with the other reader start page guide type You can also use the keyword STARTPAGE in which case Jutoh will substitute the value of the property Start page guide type in the current configuration This allows you to use a start page appropriate to the target device depending on configuration For cover art use TIF JPEG or PNG image using RGB colours and at least 600 pixels on the larger axis So at least say 400x600 Don t include pricing or a reference to the ph
331. ng Other things you can do e Ensure images that aren t purely decorative have alternative text Mark images that are decorative with the role attribute value presentation so that Jutoh won t try to place it ina 195 figure and speech systems can ignore it Replace table images with actual tables if possible Ensure tables have a description and the number of header rows marked so that Jutoh can link table cells with the appropriate header cells e In each document s properties set the Epub type Effectively this will be the type of the first level outer section of that document so if the document wide type is present Jutoh will only add section tags for the second and subsequent levels if there are any Set the Epub type for content paragraphs spans of text objects wherever appropriate Set the project s language in the metadata e Mark changes in language with span tags setting the Language attribute If appropriate mark changes in voice with span tags setting the Voice family attribute For logical sections that do not contain headings insert section tags manually How the style mapping works The purpose of inserting sections is to assign more meaning than a simple heading confers For example you might have two titles Chapter 1 and Acknowledgements both using the style Heading 1 If the configuration option Heading style prefix is set to Heading the default th
332. nge the level number and specify the heading styles that will be used for the other two levels When you click on Next Jutoh will build the table of contents and show the results in the next page for you to edit or accept as is Table of Contents Entries Remove edit or delete entries that will be shown in the Table of Contents and in the NavMap Jutoh may add a Table of Contents entry to this list it won t be shown in the contents page but it wil be induded in the NavMap When you press Next the Table of Contents will be rebullt if specified Entries A Table of Contents From the Horse s Mouth How this book is structured Conventions and terms used in this book Table id Bookmark of Contents auto_bookmark_table_of_content Change Target Table of Contents Wizard entries page 111 If you find that Jutoh hasn t found the headings you thought it would click Back edit the options and try again You might need cancel the wizard and apply styles to your content for example if you don t have consistent heading styles You also need to make sure that Jutoh will find headings without skipping levels Jutoh will complain if there are such jumps For example going from level 1 to level 3 is not allowed although you don t have to unwind the headings similarly you can happily jump from level 3 back to level 1 It probably indicates a problem with your document if you have say a Heading 1 follow
333. ninitiated trawling through this information the prospect of creating an ebook can look frankly terrifying Fortunately with Jutoh it doesn t have to be that way You don t have to deal with OPF files or HTML unless your requirements are very complex you can simply use a friendly editor tool that optimizes its output to take into account the whims of a variety of ebook reader software and hardware Instead of hiring someone to convert your book you can save money by using Jutoh to do it yourself empowering you the author in the spirit of the ebook revolution If you re a publisher or consultant helping an author create ebooks then you ll appreciate the time saving qualities of Jutoh just as much This book is here to help you learn and get the most out of Jutoh bringing together wisdom that you might otherwise have to glean from around the web Sometimes even Jutoh can t entirely smooth over differences between formats publisher requirements and ebook reader behaviour and these areas are documented as much as possible to save you frustration If you are a Jutoh user this guide will be an adjunct to the software version 2 10 and above and the built in user manual which contains more detail for example on each dialog presented by Jutoh You can also type keywords into the Search Help control in the Jutoh toolbar If you are thinking about using Jutoh or are using a different method to create your ebooks I hope you ll still
334. nny and f they did the realisation might change them y Update Preview Hep lt Back next gt cane Splitting a text file In this page you can specify a pattern to identify the start of chapters including asterisks to denote match zero or more characters If you need to match actual asterisks prefix them with a backslash for example to match you can write You can also choose between the following mutually exclusive options for telling Jutoh more about the matched text The matched line is the chapter heading choose this if your chapters are easily identifiable as in the above example The next line is the chapter heading choose this if the text being matched is simply to denote a division for example and the next line contains the actual heading 38 There is no chapter heading choose this if there is no chapter heading just sections separated by some matchable text gt Check Remove lines matching pattern if you don t want to keep section separators such as Don t check this if you re matching against chapter headings Specify the Import encoding to match the encoding of the text file as used by the tool that created the text file originally Usually UTF 8 is the best format to use If you want to change the styles that Jutoh applies to the imported text for initial paragraph subsequent paragraphs and section headings
335. ntained by the International Digital Publishing Forum IDPF The most popular version of the standard is version 2 as used by all current Epub based reader hardware and software and a specification of version 3 is now available but implementations are not widely used in the real world Version 3 adds more flexibility for absolute positioning addition of sound and video and web like custom features using Javascript Jutoh currently targets Epub version 2 and a subset of version 3 features An Epub file is basically a zip archive containing HTML content metadata describing the book and a navigation map describing the structure of the book An Epub can be encrypted but this depends on cooperation between a particular platform platform such as iBooks and the corresponding reader software When you submit an ebook generated by Jutoh to an established publishing platform the platform will deal with encryption issues Note that even though Epub is a standard there are always quirks in the way ebook reader software and hardware implement the standard Jutoh tries to smooth over these differences for example Jutoh s iBooks optimization feature fixes problems with iBooks failing to honour centre alignment and image sizing Mobipocket Mobipocket is a format purchased by Amazon to be used by Amazon s Kindle hardware and software now Amazon are the odd man out in being the only ebook player using a non Epub format However Mobipocket is based
336. o All about style sheets Whether you import from a word processor file or type text into a Artides Jutoh sometimes the result is not satisfactory because you may not have obeyed some KB0001 How formatting rules important for successful and consistent ebook creation B KB0002 How i EHA Here are some guidelines for formatting text in Jutoh 8 E KB0004 How E KBo005 How 1 Use named styles not ad hoc formatting KB0006 Epub KB0007 Addir o not use ad hoc formatting unless you absolutely cannot avoid it oc formatting is when B D d hoc fol i bsolutel id it Ad hoc foi ing is wh E KB0008 How you select some text and then apply a font size paragraph spacing or other attribute to the text KB0009 Juto om a toolbar or menu command ile this is tempting try instead to define named paragrap B fr Iba d While this i i i d to defi d h KB0010 Impo and character styles in your project style sheet and use those Then you can guarantee B d ch les i j h d h Th E KB0011 Cont consistency and easily change formatting throughout the document if you need to You can Bl i d easily ch fo ing through he d if dto Y E KB0012 Pictu however bend the rules for simple formatting such as bold and italics gt A E SS Maximized help within the Jutoh window highlighting the window management buttons Jutoh has a fast search facility which you can access from the main tool
337. o a configuration in that it controls settings that can be different per configuration for example you can have configurations with associated speech profiles for creating speech with different speech engines different voices different speeds different content and so on Speech profiles exist because it would clutter up configurations too much to include all speech related settings So instead you select which speech profile you want to use in the Speech profile configuration option You might only have one speech profile for all configurations the default profile or you could have different speech profiles for different configurations Engine voice speed and similar properties initially use the global settings set in Preferences Speech as mentioned in the previous section you can override them per profile There are also options for enhancing the text for clarity such as whether to include a spoken prefix in front of list items and table rows and columns Speech profiles are edited in the Speech tab of the Formatting Palette so you need to have a document open to edit the profiles If there are several profiles the one currently associated with the current configuration will be marked with an asterisk Double click on a profile to make it the assigned profile for the current configuration Here s a screenshot of the Profiles tab showing the default speech profile 201 Palette x 4 Inspector Favourites Speech Clips gt g
338. o specify how the content of the element is spoken It is more powerful than the Speak as property which can be used for Epub 3 Unfortunately this feature is supported only patchily by speech synthesisers Most seem to ignore the markup and attempt to parse the text which may or may not yield a correct result So you cannot rely on the correct pronunciation of dates and other values If in doubt use the Alias property to substitute text that will be spoken correctly for example 20 15 instead of 2015 You can use Say as format and Say as detail with this property Values include number cardinal ordinal characters spell out digits fraction unit date time telephone address vxml boolean vxml date vxml currency and vxml phone See also www w3 org TR speech synthesis11 for details When outputting to SAPI most SAPI context ids are handled by converting SSML values except for the context ids web_url e mail_address and number_decimal When outputting to the Apple Speech Manager only the values digits and characters can be used Say as detail Supported for SSML SAPI This property is used with Say as If Say as is number this property s value can be one of ordinal cardinal and telephone If Say as is date this property s value can be one of mdy dmy ymd md dm ym my d m and y If Say as is time this property s value can be one of hms24 and hms12 If Say as is characters this property s value can
339. o use style find and replace via the Edit Find command to do mass replacement of one style with another throughout your project You might want to use the Formatting Palette show or hide it using the Format Formatting Palette command or Alt P It gives you a list of styles to apply and makes it easy to see just what style has been applied at the current cursor position It also has a tab listing all the favourite commands styles and symbols that you have defined For more on this see Chapter 6 Editing and Formatting Content 242 Content errors Obviously there is a limit to what Jutoh can do about general content problems writing style typos inaccuracies and so on However there are a few features that can help e e Use the spelling checker Edit Check Spelling Print out a linear version of your book to make proofreading easier This is where Jutoh s ability to write to ODT and via OpenOffice org PDF comes in handy If you own an ebook reader create an ebook in that format for convenient reading even if it s not the format you re actually aiming for For example you may be creating an Epub book but you can create a Mobipocket file for a Kindle reader if you have one Add text notes under the Scraps folder to record or plan edits Finally it s worth remembering that other people will usually be able to spot mistakes in your book much more easily than you can so enlist the help of further pa
340. oad details aspx id 3 This will add the ability to open and save DOCX files For import of DOCX ODT and HTML files Jutoh will help you split the book into sections by matching against heading styles or content You can also import DOCX ODT HTML and text into an existing project using the File Import command For more information on importing see Chapter 5 Importing Files Tools to use with Jutoh No man is an island and neither is Jutoh These are some of the third party tools you can use to help with your book creation EpubCheck by Adobe is a very useful checker for Epub files It examines the HTML and XML files in your book and flags up errors such as missing mandatory meta data ill formed HTML missing bookmarks and so on This tool is installed and configured by default with Jutoh it needs Java to be installed on your system Use the checker by clicking the Check button or by switching on Check Epub after compiling in the General Preferences dialog You can get updated versions of EpubCheck from here code google com p epubcheck Amazon s Kindlegen is essential if you want to create Mobipocket Kindle books It s not installed by default but you can download it from www amazon com kindlepublishing Configure Jutoh by going to the Helpers page in the Jutoh Preferences dialog and clicking on Help Me Install Kindlegen in the Helpers page or Setup dialog Jutoh will install and configure Kindlegen for you
341. ocket configuration to avoid showing two covers If you check Exclude cover from reading order in your configuration the cover page may not be shown as part of the book for example in iBooks the cover will only appear on the bookshelf If you want the reader to be presented with the cover page clear this option Don t clear this for Mobipocket files however Note that Calibre has an unusual interpretation of exclusion from reading order and shows such sections at the end of the book You can specify the Cover page background colour in your configuration to fill in the area around the image with colour 73 Specifying the cover image format Normally the cover image will be output as a JPEG file compressed at 90 but if your cover contains line art you might prefer to set the configuration property Cover image format to PNG This will result in a larger but higher quality file A cover design can contain a variety of text and graphics that is scaled combined and rendered to a bitmap before the image file is created If you want to provide your own cover image and make sure that no extra processing is done to the image you can set Cover image format to Original Then the image you imported from a file will be the exact image that is used as the cover For this to work there must be only one object in the cover design Using multiple cover designs Typically you will have one cover design per project However Jutoh let
342. of contents page will not be affected This option is useful for Lulu which has trouble with NavMaps that contain bookmarks Generate page list check to generate an NCX page list for Epub 2 or nav page list for Epub 3 using page objects embedded in the book This will work with iBooks Generate Adobe page map check to generate an Adobe page map file for Epub 2 books using page objects embedded in the book Note that EpubCheck will not pass an Epub 2 file with the Adobe page map extension Generate cross reference page numbers check to output page numbers in cross references instead of here Generate guide check to generate a guide section in the OPF file recommended Generate title tag check to generate a title tag for each HTML file Optimize for iBooks various optimizations are applied In particular dummy spans are added to centered paragraphs in order to fix centering in full justification mode Use Generate font names to determine whether the specified fonts option will be switched on in the iBooks XML file or whether font names will be suppressed This option will cause a file called com apple ibooks display options xml to be added to the Epub file under the folder 80 Styles zZ ETA INF If you submit the Epub to Lulu this may cause an unmanifested file error so clear this option for Lulu submissions Generate iBooks XML if this option and Optimize for iBooks are both checked generates the fil
343. of page this is The type is used mainly for Kindle books that outputs a type per page file The possible values for this control are unspecified Jutoh will guess the page type e Single left page this is a left hand page that can stand on its own in portrait mode Single right page this is a right hand page that can stand on its own in portrait mode Spread left page this is a left hand page that is part of a double page spread Spread right page this is a right hand page that is part of a double page spread e Double page spread this page handles the whole of a double page spread e Blank this is a blank page used as a place holder for example at the end of a book with an uneven number of pages Currently this type is not used by Jutoh The page width and height can be edited but it s recommended you use the same size for all pages 178 The Tools menu gives you access to various useful commands such as alignment copy and paste and more The same menu is shown when you right click over the page background Use the lt lt and gt gt buttons to quickly navigate between fixed layout pages Set the background image with the Set Background Image button The resolution and file name will be described along with a hint about whether the image and page sizes match and whether the aspect ratio is appropriate for the page size As we mentioned do set a higher resolution image than the page dimensions to increase qual
344. og that shows all the possible Unicode characters Auto replace works when you have entered the target text and then a space or punctuation followed by a space Jutoh will search back and see whether the text matches any in its list and if so replaces it with the appropriate text For example typing c will insert the symbol O Replacing quotation marks is a special case and has its own tab 286 APPENDIX B CONFIGURING JUTOH Replace Custom Quotes Specify how quotation marks will be replaced as you type Replace single quotation marks Start single quote l End single quote Replace double quotation marks Start double quote End double quote The Custom Quotes tab This dialog specifies how single quotation marks and double quotation marks are replaced when you type the standard quotation marks with the keyboard Jutoh recognises whether the mark is at the start or end of the text Click on the buttons to select the symbol that will be used in each case using the symbol selection dialog You can use the Reset buttons to revert the values to their original settings Appearance options You can adjust various settings relating to Jutoh s appearance using the Appearance page in the Preferences dialog 287 APPENDIX B CONFIGURING JUTOH Restrict window size for comfortable viewing Restrict edit windows to atmost 800 pixels wide Fill remaining
345. ok controls the margins although you switch between several sizes in the Nook settings The Barnes amp Noble Nook Kids fixed layout format is very non standard requires a non disclosure agreement from Barnes amp Noble and is unlikely to be supported by Jutoh but regular reflowable Epubs are fine on the Nook To test your files using the Nook Android app use a file manager app to copy the Epub file to the Nook My Documents folder on the memory card The book will then appear when you next run the Nook app On the PC version of Nook go to My Stuff and then Add Item and add your book Kobo Kobo uses the Epub format again you can get your books on their site via Smashwords or directly via the Kobo Writing Life site Kobo has free apps for most smartphones tablets and desktop operating systems and sells its own ebook readers At the time of writing there are no known issues with Kobo s Epub implementation that require special consideration Conveniently Kobo uses the same fixed layout Epub file format as used by Apple s iBooks When generating for Nook switch off Generate iBooks XML in your Epub configuration or the file may be rejected It s not clear whether the XML file can be included in iBooks compatible fixed layout Kobo books It s difficult to test ebooks with the desktop Kobo reader applications on Mac or PC since they don t accept arbitrary files on your hard disk However the Android Kobo application
346. ok readers with their restricted memory simply can t cope with large chunks of text or if they can slow down when loading and paging through such a book Another reason is that it is is easy to compile a table of contents for a book that s divided into sections though Jutoh can also look inside sections for headings if required Via section properties you can tell the ebook reader that a section is a table of contents or other kind of section which you couldn t do if it was buried inside one huge section Finally you ll find it easier and faster to navigate and edit a book divided into sections If Jutoh didn t split up your book when importing you can do it manually one split at a time Place the cursor on the paragraph you wish to be at the start of a new document and use the command Edit Split Document If you change your mind you can t undo this with Edit Undo but you can join this document with the next one using Edit Join Document If the new document was inserted at the wrong place you can drag it into the correct position You can edit the title of a particular section by clicking on the title above the editor as shown in the illustration below or using the Rename command on the project outline s context menu right click to see it This title will be used in the automatic table of contents 42 CreatingEbooksUsingJutoh Jutoh 2 Plus jook View Help o 0 2 amp Y ext Documer X Chapter 1 In
347. okmark prefix You can control click on a page link or alt click on Mac to display the document that is the target of the link with the bookmarked content selected When inserting a URL not a page link you normally simply specify the URL address such as http www something com However if you want more control in HTML based formats only you can include the entire contents of the a tag and Jutoh will output the whole thing The key is to include the href attribute within the URL For example href http www something com onclick return popitup http www something com In non HTML formats Jutoh will extract the actual URL automatically Footnotes You can insert a footnote using Format Insert Links Footnote Shift CtrI N and you will be able to edit the footnote text in a separate dialog A footnote is represented by this symbol within the text note Footnotes can either be shown at the end of the section containing the footnote or as a separate endnotes section The way footnotes are presented in the generated ebook is determined by settings within the Footnotes amp Endnotes tab in the Project Preferences dialog under Indexes Note that a footnote is always styled with the designated footnote paragraph style setting overriding paragraph styles you use within the footnote editor unless you choose otherwise in footnote settings For more information on footnotes please see Chapter 11 Work
348. olour Image the specified image is drawn at the top left of the object rectangle without tiling or scaling Centred image the specified image is drawn centred within the object rectangle e Tiled image the specified image is tiled to fill the object rectangle Stretched image the specified image is stretched to fill the object rectangle The Texture field shows either a solid colour or a specified image depending on the Style setting Click this field to choose a new colour or image or you can paste an image into the field by clicking on the Paste button The Scale field can be used to adjust the scaling of the image Border style can be None Single Double or or Triple A double border uses the two border colours specified underneath the style field while the triple border style uses the first border colour the object background colour and then the second border colour using Border 2 Width for both the inner and the third border widths Text Type text in the field provided if you wish to add text to this object Click on Insert Keyword to see a choice of keywords that will be replaced when the cover design is regenerated The keywords are taken from the metadata and also from the currently selected global and project specific string tables selected in the current configuration if any You can also specify the font and the text colour Exporting your design If you need a
349. om the rest of the content when clicking double tapping on the background Pre render objects if set to Default any text or image objects that have Pre render this object checked in their region properties or inherited page or project properties will be rendered to the background image instead of being written to the ebook as a separate object If this option is Always all objects will be pre rendered and if Never no objects are pre rendered Font pixel scale this option is in the HTML Formatting group rather than Fixed Layout but it is useful for making the text size in ebooks closer to the size as shown in Jutoh Try a value of 0 85 if the ebook text is too large It is only used when font sizes are expressed in pixels If your font sizes are in points you can scale the text size in ebooks by setting the Custom DPI in Project Preferences Options Auto region magnification for KF8 output only this option enables Jutoh s automatic generation of magnification regions for backgrounds text objects and image objects For more on this see below You may wish to switch this off if targeting e ink Kindle devices since it can cause interruption of normal page navigation It also disables the ability to switch between single pages in portrait mode and double page spreads in landscape mode Formatting for Kindle Kindle fixed layout books have specific rules relating pages per spread and orientation if you fix your orient
350. ome fredbloggs Kindlegen kindlegen If Kindlegen isn t working within Jutoh first check that the path in the Helpers dialog refers to a file that exists If that s not the problem perhaps Java isn t installed You can check this by opening a terminal window and typing java If there s an error message that indicates that the command is not found go to www java com and download and install Java How to use Jutoh with an external drive Overview Jutoh helps you access your data on a mobile drive such as a USB flash memory drive You can also run Jutoh from a mobile drive so that all Jutoh settings are stored on the drive and not on the computer This is convenient if you will be writing on multiple machines perhaps home and work and you don t want to install Jutoh permanently on any one machine Note mobile drives are easily lost and they can fail so please remember to back up your files regularly to another disk These are the different combinations that are possible 1 Not mobile running Jutoh from your computer as normal storing files on your hard drive Application settings such as templates icons window sizes and registration information are 271 also stored on your computer 2 Data mobile running Jutoh from your computer as normal but storing your project files on a mobile drive Application settings are stored on your computer 3 Settings mobile running Jutoh from your computer but storing Jutoh
351. omplains about missing page link targets which might happen if you link to a page that you later delete When compiling ODT files will also complain if you have a page link that does not reference a bookmark since this is required for linear documents such as ODT files that are not composed of individual XHTML sections Unresolved footnote or index entry These errors are flagged by Jutoh after a compile and usually mean that you forgot to use Book Update to update the endnotes section or index section after adding index entries Headings used improperly This is part formatting part structural however if you don t apply heading styles in a rational way for example if you follow a Heading 1 with a Heading 4 instead of a Heading 2 then it will be hard for Jutoh to construct an advanced table of contents and navigation map that reflects the implicit structure of your book An item in the navigation map doesn t navigate to correct item on Kindle Check in Project Properties Indexes Table of Contents that the link in question is pointing to a bookmark and not just the relevant HTML file Without bookmarks the navmap can malfunction An item in the table of contents points to the wrong part of a section If there is an image at the beginning of a section Jutoh may not be able to correctly place an automatic bookmark Insert a bookmark manually before the image so Jutoh can use that and rebuild the table of contents
352. on Epub and Amazon s Kindlegen application formerly Mobigen takes a set of Epub like files including the OPF file as input to generate Mobipocket as output The older variant of Mobipocket is called KF7 and the newer more capable variant is called KF8 KF8 can handle fixed layout books and richer formatting Most older Kindle devices can be upgraded to use KF8 but certain early devices are restricted to KF7 Jutoh generates HTML that is optimized for both KF7 and KF8 and then calls Kindlegen to create the Mobipocket file Mobipocket files have the prc or mobi extension 248 We will talk more about the Kindle platform later in the chapter Adobe Portable Document Format PDF PDF is a popular format for complex fixed layout documents but is not ideal for devices with small screens and the ability to choose text size which requires the ability to reflow the document Jutoh can create OpenDocument Text ODT files which can then be turned into PDF for example using the File Export as PDF command in OpenOffice org Writer or LibreOffice Writer You can view the PDF in Adobe Acrobat Reader or Adobe Digital Editions ADE On Windows you can force the document to be viewed in ADE by using Open With in Windows Explorer s context menu or you can drag the document to ADE When displayed in Adobe Digital Editions a PDF containing bookmarks will show a table of contents in the left hand pane Jutoh will generate styles with the requ
353. on separated character style substitutions for example Drop Caps Drop Caps Epub Emphasis Red Emphasis This allows you to adjust styles per configuration without needing to use a different sheet Paragraph style substitutions semicolon separated paragraph styles substitutions for example Normal Normal Justified Centred Centred Bold This allows you to adjust styles per configuration without needing to use a different sheet Heading style prefix a prefix for determining whether a style is a heading for the purposes of HTML generation The default is Heading Clearing this field will prevent Jutoh from generating lt h gt tags Note that from Jutoh 1 67 the generated CSS overrides heading formatting if Heading style prefix specifies a valid prefix for existing heading styles and so heading styles should be displayed as specified in Jutoh and not according to ereader heading defaults Styles suppressing hyphenation a pattern matching all styles that should suppress hyphenation Multiple patterns containing wildcards and can be separated by the pipe character For example Heading Book Title This works for Epub only and generates the extra CSS adobe hyphenate none hyphens none Styles suppressing page break before a pattern matching all styles that should suppress a preceding page break Multiple patterns containing wildcards and can be separated by the pipe chara
354. one or both values are specified Jutoh will resize each image on export if one or both of its dimensions exceed the specified maximum In this way you can easily create multiple books with images optimized for different screen sizes An additional option Maximum image optimization width applies an optimization for images whose 103 width is the same or smaller by simply doubling the size before rescaling back down This improves image quality at the expense of longer compile times so you might like to have a configuration with this set to 1 for preview compiles if you have a lot of images The above options determine the maximum image size at the time the image is written to the ebook However often you will not know in advance what size is best for the device that is being used Kindle viewers will automatically scale images to fit but for Epubs you might like to check Limit images to viewer size this generates CSS that limits the image size to the maximum width or height of the current viewer This will only work if you have one image on a line since two images side by side will get a combined 200 of the viewer width or height You can override the maximum width and height on a per image basis by specifying these values in the image properties dialog If your image is too big for the device display it could break across two pages this can cause the Epub to be rejected by iTunes so make sure Limit images to viewer size
355. ons in PLS lexicon format when generating SSML or Epub 3 CereVoice lexicon Saves lexicons in CereVoice lexicon format when generating SSML CereVoice abbreviations Saves lexicons in CereVoice abbreviations format when generating SSML Speech enhancements These properties control how extra text is inserted into the audio in order to clarify the content Bullet list item prefix Text to insert in front of unordered list items Numbered list item prefix Text to insert in front of numbered list items Use image alt text 309 Inserts image alternative text Use table descriptions Inserts table descriptions Table row prefix Text to insert in front of table rows If this is specified the table row number will also be read This will be suppressed if the table s Role property is set to presentation Table column prefix Text to insert in front of table columns If this is specified the table column number will also be read This will be suppressed if the table s Role property is set to presentation 310 Appendix G Alphabet Description Reference IO This topic describes the XML based language that Jutoh uses to specify lexicon alphabets About alphabet descriptions The lexicon editor makes use of alphabet descriptions so that the phonetic vocabulary can be shown in the lexicon entry dialog it is also used to translate phonemes between alphabets This appendix describes the syntax of these decriptions To ad
356. onventions and terms used in this book Chapter 1 Introduction to Ebooks and Jutoh Chanal Farm te Title Title Page Level Document id Bookmark a B z7 _ auto_bookmark_table_of_contents_1 Change Target Run Table of Contents Wizard oe Project Properties dialog Customising the user interface These are the main options for tailoring Jutoh to your preferred way of working Close windows use the X button to close panels such as the Organizer Control Panel or Log 24 Window Show them again from commands on the View menu e Rearrange tabs windows drag a tab to the left top right or bottom of the window associated with the tab to split the tabbed area and see more information at once These changes won t be restored on restarting Jutoh e Add or remove toolbar buttons right click on a toolbar to get the customise dialog or use View Customise Toolbars e Add or change keyboard shortcuts for menu commands formatting styles and symbols use View Customise Shortcuts This interface is also used for adding menu items to the optional Favourites menu on the formatting toolbar check Favourite for each shortcut item to be included in the menu e Change settings in the Preferences dialog click the Options button on the toolbar or View Preferences on Windows and Linux or Preferences on the application menu on Mac You can choose wheth
357. option In the Page Layout Style Properties dialog click on the Header or Footer tab and specify whether the header or footer should be included in this style You can then change further properties such as auto fit height same content on first page and same content on left and right pages You can also click on More Properties to specify height margins border and background colour if required There are three kinds of header or footer you can edit main labelled Header or Footer first page and left page Choose which to edit and then click Edit Header or Edit Footer If you don t want different first page or left page headers you only have to edit the main header or footer In the header or footer editor you can use the usual formatting and you can insert fields such as page num and chapter via Insert Field in the context menu right click for the menu or control click on Mac If you insert a chapter field using chapter numbering you will also need to edit the outline style described below so that the chapter title is formatted as required IMPORTANT using different headers and footers for the same page style in order to achieve a different first page only works for LibreOffice in other words OpenOffice does not have a Same content on first page option Both LibreOffice and OpenOffice also have the restriction that a page style for one section must have a different name from the page style for the previous section or the wo
358. optional identifier of an auxiliary resource or related publication and its relationship to this publication Custom metadata If any elements you require aren t catered for in the metadata panel you can add custom ones by clicking the Edit Custom Metadata button at the bottom of the panel You can add elements and then edit their values and edit multiple element values as with regular metadata Unless you have advanced needs you are unlikely to need this facility Viewing the generated metadata If you want to see the actual metadata that Jutoh generates which may differ slightly from the metadata you specify directly you can generate an Epub file and use F6 or Book Examine and click on the file content opf The metadata is contained between the metadata start and end tags 67 Specifying metadata defaults It can be annoying to type in the same metadata for each project so Jutoh allows you to set the default for the most important metadata values in the Advanced panel of the Preferences dialog under Metadata defaults Summary We ve seen how to describe your book to the ebook reading software and your readers Next we deal with another important aspect for communicating what your book s about the cover design 68 Chapter 8 Creating Your Cover Design 4S gt IC An attractive cover design is important for catching the reader s eye as he or she scans through a web site or virtual shelves Jutoh can help you create
359. order to support centred tables in ADE the CSS attribute display inline block must be used However tables with this attribute do not span multiple pages the part of the table that isn t displayed on the first page will simply be lost To work around this conundrum set the configuration property Maximum table rows for inline block to the number of rows above which you consider a table to be large and in danger of being rendered across page boundaries The default is zero Tables larger than this size will omit the display inline block attribute to favour correct rendering across pages over centring Centring should work correctly on most other ereaders without the need for this attribute since we also use margin left auto margin right auto to implement centring Note that using inline block can cause tables to be rendered incorrectly on some ereaders with the overall table border becoming separated from the cells Also if you have the configuration option Maximum table rows for inline block set to a non zero value the generated HTML table may have an extra paragraph tag around it in order to support centring on some platforms Set the option to zero to ensure that a table that is alone in a paragraph is not enclosed within outer paragraph tags which can cause problems in some situations including unexpected text sizes Use Maximum table rows for inline block with extreme caution As noted above ODT files and DOCX files
360. orders This means that you have two ways of specifying the overall border using cells or the table box properties However only HTML based formats know about the extra table border not ODT or DOCX so it s best to use cell borders to form the table border This is what the Table Properties dialog does You can specify a rounded corner for the overall table border but even in HTML this won t work if you use collapsed borders and it probably won t work in many ereaders If your table border doesn t show up in the ebook try increasing the width On iBooks widths below lpt are invisible Importing tables Tables can be imported from DOCX ODT and HTML Epub Most aspects will be retained but these will not Shading and images in cell backgrounds solid colours are supported e vertical text e double borders or border line styles other than solid dotted and dashed e custom image borders e banding in conditional table formatting where the bands are more than one row or column in size DOCX e horizontal and vertical inner borders in conditional table formatting DOCX In summary unless your table formatting is particularly fancy import should be fine Table compatibility in ebook readers Tables should work well in most ereaders Older Kindle ereaders supporting only KF7 Kindle DX mode in Kindle Previewer will not show border styles other than solid and all borders are either on or off there i
361. orking With Style SDettS usiiiocirn a 131 A bing sawssswaeagaly E RS 131 Ki dsof SOS as src di A E AR 131 Editing style sheets a E O a Sade a a a E S 132 Editing paragraph sis A i ay cies aca 133 Editing character le A A e mene ee 136 Editing liststyle S cart e aia a a dE 137 Editing box Styles eas NS AR IS 139 Creato NEw Styles nos e NE 139 PP PLY INS named Styles nonnai A A AA as 140 Automatic ES dd a da SE ES EEAS 141 RS UMTS TOA Sg 8 oe AE EA AAE AEN E cence EA AE E os E E A EA E 141 SS CUS CONS AON aos hate a E E E a E AR Mas TA E E E E Rate 142 Special style NAME Sianio ia 143 Importing and exporting style MES as id acodo 143 Finding and replacing styles A A a 143 ESTE BUDS CUT IATIS rea E Gch A danas 144 Using styles to change ebook CONSE isis cansino celda rica iia tna cia 144 Automatic heading UMD di 146 SUI nl AS ca 146 Chapter 13 Working With String Tables oooooonmocmoomsss 147 A E hE alias 147 Troubleshootine string tal IS ES A ASA es 148 A A ssn cack cng babi d oie EE EA ATATA a tab doxau E a tan EE aE A 149 Chapter 14s Working With Tables ssiciscodssniscsteicasccescocosdeskcansodssus cosbstcassesdcessssesacsseedessssseeetcbtcosesoens 150 A rte A PR nar ETE ER nC RORY PEE Ure e a eee er eRe 150 Creating and editing table A My laaa yeep tia Mga egacs 151 Editing TADS A o td 152 Changing the size of cells rows and COMMS ia A id 155 Abo t table A O cal 156 RS E AN 156 Table compatibility in ebook TEACETS nestor daa
362. ou can insert media documents and then add media objects that refer to them For more on this see Embedding media Summary We ve seen how to insert pictures and adjust the way they are saved in your compiled ebooks Next we look at further refinements for your books namely getting Jutoh to help create various kinds of index section 105 Chapter 11 Working With Indexes SIC Jutoh can help you with four kinds of index table of contents alphabetical index endnotes or footnotes at the end of each section and bibliography For a simple book you don t have to know how to use these and Jutoh will generate a simple table of contents automatically by default Creating an advanced table of content In an Epub 2 book there is always a NavMap navigation map which tells your ebook reader to list the sections in your document Optionally you can create a page listing the contents of the book more like the contents you ll see in a book It s just a regular page with hyperlinks to your book sections In Jutoh we ll call these NavMap and table of contents respectively The following screenshot of Adobe Digital Editions illustrates the difference between a NavMap on the left and a table of contents on the right BB Adobe Digtal dma di e Table of Contents Tithe Page Preface Bring en the revolution About the author How this book is structured Cenventions used in this book 1 Introduction Ebooks a
363. ou switch to endnotes mode you need to use the Book Update menu command to create the endnotes or create the section from the Footnotes and Endnotes properties page From this page you can choose to always rebuild the endnotes page by checking Automatically build endnotes 120 In the properties page you can choose the endnotes title and styles for the title per chapter heading and whether the numbering will be global continuous numbering or whether it should restart for each chapter Note that a chapter should be a separate section or numbering won t start for each chapter Normally whether the numbering is global or starts again for each chapter the chapter headings will be shown You can suppress chapter headings by leaving the Group style blank Importing footnotes Footnotes are imported from ODT files but not from HTML files since there is no representation for footnotes in HTML and it s impossible to distinguish them from regular linked text So if importing from HTML you will need to copy the footnote text into new Jutoh footnotes There is an option in the Jutoh Document Cleanup dialog from the Book menu for recognising InDesign footnotes and converting them to Jutoh so if you are importing from InDesign HTML it s worth trying this Creating a bibliography Jutoh has tools to manage bibliographic entries and create a bibliography or references section from them If you import a document from a DOCX or ODT file and
364. paragraph styles you can define left alignment right alignment full justification centering or indeterminate alignment leave 1t up to the reading software Jutoh won t display full justification in the editor but 1t will appear in the ebook Note that leaving alignment indeterminate may cause justification in some readers such as Mobipocket but ragged left on others such as Adobe Digital Editions Paragraphs aren t centred iBooks has a bug or feature that means centring can be ignored You can fix this by checking Optimize for iBooks in your Epub configuration it generates a span tag for each paragraph that causes centring to work Multiple paragraphs per list item are all numbered or bulleted You can create continuation paragraphs by placing the text cursor to the right of a bullet and pressing Backspace The bullet will disappear and the paragraph will be a continuation of the previous item Fonts don t appear as expected Ebook reader software has a limited range of fonts and if you format your book with fonts that happen to be on your system don t expect this to be reflected in your book Use a small range of fonts instead such as Times New Roman Courier New and Arial or Helvetica The ebook reader software will usually substitute something appropriate Although you can embed fonts in your project not all readers support it and you also need to make sure you have the legal right to distribute the font If you c
365. part of your book I hear you asking Well you may have textual or pictorial research that you want to store with the project or perhaps you want to keep a note of what ebook sites you have uploaded the book to and when However you don t have to use any other kind of document apart from the book section The different document types are listed towards the end of the chapter The project is shown in the project outline window within the Organizer LA Neve Open Organizer x Projects Favourites Explorer 5 Lena 2 O Content Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 O Soaps The Project Outline Window Each document is displayed by clicking on its title in the project outline Depending on your current settings the document will be shown in a new tab or an existing tab in the document area You can change this in Preferences under Project Document Preferences and determine which document types will be shown in separate tabs You may prefer to reuse a tab per document to avoid having to manage a lot of tabs 26 You can drag a tab to an edge of the document area to split the tabs and show multiple documents simultaneously Drag the tab back next to another tab to go back to viewing one document at a time You can close a tab using the X button This only closes the view of the document and doesn t delete it If you right click over a tab you will see a menu with tab management commands such as Close Other Tabs This i
366. phabet file format version usually 1 0 xml lang describes the language the alphabet is relevant for name is a long name for the alphabet 311 abbreviation is the abbreviated alphabet name such as x sampa or x microsoft sapi description is text describing the alphabet or phone vendor is the alphabet vendor if any phone separator is the text used to separate phones syllable separator is the text used to separate syllables word separator is the text used to separate words supports equivalent is a comma separated list of alphabets that this alphabet can translate to Each phone element will also have to have an equivalents attribute defined as below equivalents is a comma separated list of alphabet phone pairs indicating the equivalent phone for the given alphabet value is the phone representation example word is a comma separated list of example words example pronunciation is a comma separated list of pronunciations in the alphabet s phones corresponding to example word 312 Change Log ee Ce we Version 2 10 October 26th 2015 for Jutoh 2 37 e Added clarification about manual TOC creation for fixed layout books Version 2 9 October 22nd 2015 for Jutoh 2 36 Documented the configuration options Font size adjustment Superscript CSS Subscript CSS Speech profile Generate NCX Use page styles Epub package prefix Epub metadata namespaces Removed references to the deprecated editor toolbar in
367. piling projects You can show them with the menu commands View Log Window and View Error Window and there is also the option of showing them automatically when you compile an ebook You can close these windows again using the X in the top right corner The error window is shown when either Jutoh finds errors during a compile or you perform an Epub check on a generated Epub book If there are no errors a green tick will be shown If there are errors they are listed and you can double click on each to show the position of the error either within the original source or within the HTML of the Epub book depending on the type of error From this you will be able to work out what you need to change in your project Formatting Palette 6 The Formatting Palette is shown when you use the menu command Format Formatting Palette or Alt P It contains tabs for a range of formatting functions e Tools shows toolbar buttons and other controls for changing styling in your document Styles shows the available paragraph character list and box styles You can double click on a style to apply it to the document and right click or click More to edit the style or create a new one It also displays the styles for the content at the current editor position e Objects lists the tag objects for example span and input and other objects such as images text boxes and tables that you can insert into the document Inspector sho
368. plit or merge pages accordingly Synthesize spreads whether left and right pages should be stuck together to form a seamless spread or whether the pages should be shown as being separate even if next to each other If not Default this setting overrides individual page settings e Page width the overall width of the book This may be different from your individual page 184 sizes if the Pages per spread setting indicates that Jutoh should split or merge pages Page height the overall height of the book Currently Jutoh doesn t split or merge pages in the vertical direction so this should always be the same as your page heights Book type this is only used for Kindle and need not be set if you select comic it enables automatic zooming facilities on some Kindles and changes the rendering of double page spreads There may be rendering side effects when specifying a book type so test the book carefully Please see the notes below regarding setting KF8 options Open to spread if checked the book will open directly to a full page spread This is only applicable to iBooks Show binding if enabled a binding crease will be shown in the middle of a double page spread in iBooks only Write page image as background if checked the page background will be written using the background image CSS property which for KF8 will disable default zooming but will also prevent the background from being shown independently fr
369. pply ad hoc formatting to the paragraphs in question since the wildcards will match the rest of the style name Another way to exclude content from your book depending on configuration is to add a style substitution in the Paragraph style substitutions property If you added Epub Only Comment to this property paragraphs formatted with Epub Only will be omitted from the final ebook since paragraphs with the Comment style are removed 145 Automatic heading numbering If you wish to have Jutoh insert numbers or text in front of headings follow these steps 1 Use consistent heading styles in your book such as Heading 1 Heading 2 and so on 2 Go to the Project Properties dialog click on Page Layout and check Enable automatic heading numbering 3 Click Edit Document Outline Style and assign number formatting for each level Make the heading style match the styles you are using To show an outline number such as 1 2 3 set the number of sublevels to be shown 4 Close the Project Properties dialog and use the menu command Book Update Check Heading numbering and click Update Your headings should now show numbering which can t be edited manually Whenever you have edited your books such that numbering is out of date use the Update command Or to ensure numbering is always up to date when generating a book by checking Update all headings before compiling in Project Properties Page Layout If you only want autom
370. project maintenance Miscellaneous options The General page in the Preferences dialog has a variety of useful settings for changing the way Jutoh behaves When Jutoh starts up _ Show a splash screen Open the last project Showa tip Y Show welcome window Customisation Y Show tooltips Y Show an icon in the taskbar Auto add files to favourites Show error window automatically Y Show log window automatically L Check Epub after compiling Y Clean up intermediate files Y Search in help from the toolbar Verbosity Verbose v Toolbars Shortcuts Folders Documents C Users Julian Smart Documents Jutoh Documents Browse Language Display language Engish The General Preferences pages Here you can switch off the opening splash screen and or the startup tips and elect whether to automatically open the last project when starting Jutoh 291 There are further controls for showing tooltips enabling the Jutoh Desktop and whether to add projects to the Favourites window automatically The Verbosity control lets you choose how much text gets written to the Log window and Show log window automatically specifies whether to show the Log window as soon as you start compiling a project handy if you want to hide the Log window when you re editing An option you may well want to enable is Check Epub after compiling so you can guarantee you ve a
371. ption Force simple NavMap to resolve Lulu errors Added new configuration option Special table of contents formatting e Added remarks about using Jutoh s page styles in Understanding Ebook Formats and Platforms new in Jutoh 2 14 e Documented Quick Convert in Chapter 2 Version 2 1 April 18th 2014 e Added new configuration options HTML version and Use XHTML e Updated notes on Maximum table rows for inline block to reflect the possibility of incorrect table rendering 314 e Added Comments group of configuration options Added Replace absolute widths and Maximum percentage width configuration options e Mentioned Replace absolute widths in the pictures boxes and tables chapters e Added a section on editing comments to Chapter 6 Version 2 0 March 4th 2014 e Added chapters on tables boxes narration interactivity accessibility tag objects and the Jutoh box model e Added new configuration options Font pixel scale Table headers and footers Emulate boxes using tables Use minimum size for cells Maximum table rows for inline block Maximum box words for inline block Mirror margins and fixed layout options e Updated other chapters for Jutoh 2 Version 1 8 February 25th 2014 Added new configuration options Cover image width Identifier and Mirror pages e Replaced screenshot for Table of Contents properties and wizard pages and added screenshots for index and footnote options e Updated the section on creating Ki
372. ption or the Kindle Keyboard will cycle through the regions when paging Note that these recommendations are for the current state of Kindle apps and Kindle Keyboard hardware as of May 2013 changes from Amazon may render the advice obsolete Behaviour of fixed layout books with different combinations of settings can be a little unpredictable from one device to the next as you can see from one author s tabulation of the permutations Do test your book on as many devices as possible Formatting for iBooks Kobo iBooks Epub files need two pages per spread and unlike Kindle can never be a single page or file per double page spread So you need to set Pages per spread to Two if your actual Jutoh project contains double page spreads implemented in a single page forcing Jutoh to split the pages Apple specifies that there should always be a cover which appears on the right hand of the first spread meaning that left pages are even numbered and right pages are odd numbered You can use the cover generated by Jutoh which will be optimized for absolute layout and the configuration page size or you can switch automatic cover generation off set Cover design to none and clear Generate cover page 187 and add it as the first page of your project In this case don t forget to set the toc guide type in the document s properties and also set the page type to Single right page Even if your double page spreads make sen
373. r we ll have a closer look at Jutoh s user interface so you can get to know your way around it 16 Chapter 3 The Jutoh User Interface SIC In the last chapter you learned how to import a file and compile it without getting bogged down too much in the details of the Jutoh tools Now we re going to take a closer look at the Jutoh main window where you will do most of your ebook work File Edit Format Tools Document Book View Help D e B Rally O R 9 New Open Save Edit Cover k Compile Check Launch Previous Next Documents Home Options Organizer X Chapter 2 Getting Started Projects Favourites Explorer gt j CreatingEbooksUsingJutoh PEZ LO Consent 2 4 Chapter 2 Getting Started EX E Title Page Body Text Left Align Table of Contents From the Horse s Mouth Body Text Preface Chapter 1 Introduction to Ebooks and Jut E Chapter 2 Getting Started Tn this chapter we ll demonstrate how easy it is to go from an existing file to a new Jutoh project and a generated ebook We ll assume that you ve installed El Chanter 2 The litah leer Interface Jutoh see ix A Installing Jutoh for details Creating a new project In this tutorial we ll be importing an ODT file called Lena odt you can Book Title 6 Caption Center Spacing After Centred Picture No Caption Centred Picture substitute it with your own file Jutoh will accept OpenDocument ODT
374. r applications defined Note that this mechanism relies on applications accepting file names on the command line most do but a few don t such as the Nook viewer and in these cases you will need to use the application s user interface to view the book Yov ll be glad to know that we persuaded Amazon to add command line file name handling to Kindle Previewer if only on Windows Conversion and checking applications Jutoh uses a number of third party applications to help it create and check books The two Epub checker commands are already configured but if you wish to create Mobipocket files you will need to configure Kindlegen These commands are specified in the Helpers page of the Preferences dialog 276 APPENDIX B CONFIGURING JUTOH Viewer applications File types HTML files html htm xhtmi Viewers Default Conversion and checking applications Media Types Epub checker command a java jar SAPPDIR lepubcheck 3 0 1 epubcheck 3 0 1 jar ba Strings Adobe s epub file checker detecting XHTML and other errors This is installed with Code Editor Jutoh i Advanced Get Checker Kindlegen location C Kindlegen kindlegen exe Browse A third party conversion utility required for Mobipocket Kindle file generation Not installed with Jutoh by default Specify the full path and executable name or just kindlegen on Linux if it s in your path Help Me In
375. r each book section document insert a single image containing an image of the page at a high resolution around 2000 pixels wide Apply the Centre paragraph style to centre the image and set the image width to 100 click on the image to show its properties then on the Size tab set the width value to 100 and the units to percent You can specify that only landscape orientation will be used by setting Orientation lock to Landscape Your reader will then be forced to turn the device into the landscape position Note that in this method we output a reflowable book In the previous topic we use a regular reflowable document but output the book as fixed layout The ebook readers will use different rendering mechanisms but the end result will be similar An advantage of this approach compared with the previous one is that you can still include linked tables of contents and other linked content as text pages When reading a book prepared in this way the user may need to adjust the settings to show one page at a time On Kindle for iOS tap on the Aa button and click on the single page icon at the bottom of the menu 188 Further reading These resources may be useful in conjunction with this guide Kindle Publishing Guidelines http kindlegen s3 amazonaws com AmazonK indlePublishingGuidelines pdf Kindle fixed layout templates https kdp amazon com community thread jspa threadID 9978 amp start 255 amp tstart 0 Tutorials on both K
376. r each kind of bullet from the Options page on Jutoh s Project Properties dialog It s worth checking through a file exported by Jutoh and then converted to a different format before submitting to a distribution site such as Smashwords to fix any errors such as the above The majority of ebooks probably won t encounter them anyway particularly fiction books Expectation errors While not exactly an error this class of problem still causes head scratching and support questions If you come to Jutoh and ebooks in general with expectations of PDF like complex layout you will 245 probably think there s something wrong with the application when it refuses to import this kind of file Because Epub and Mobipocket files are reflowable they don t tend to use absolute positioning and complex layouts Likewise Jutoh can t import such files with much fidelity If you have a book with elaborate layout you will need to think about redesigning it to make use of simpler cues such as small images such as indentation colour spacing and pictures laid out simply If you want custom web like features this isn t possible in Jutoh and indeed most ebook readers wouldn t support it anyway Having said that Jutoh Plus allows you edit HTML and JavaScript to create interactive ebooks if you have the necessary programming skills It s been my experience that users often want Jutoh to work in the particular way that their own favourite
377. r from emphasising words that it might normally emphasise The value normal leaves the output unaffected For SAPI there is just one strength of emphasis Voice emotion Supported for SSML SAPI This provides a small variation in the content prosody and emphasis currently for CereVoice voices only Values are happy sad calm and cross Voice family Supported for Epub 3 SSML SAPI This attribute uses Epub 3 syntax to specify a change of voice You can provide three space separated values in the form age gender number or just age or gender The age may be child young or old and the gender can be male female or neutral The number represents an index into available matching voices Alternatively you can use a specific voice name in single quotes such as Heather When supplying a specific voice name you can use wildcards for example Heather This will be matched against the available voices for the current speech engine so that there is a better chance of matching the voice you want even if you switch speech engines Even if you don t supply wildcards Jutoh will still try to find a voice using substring matching if none of the 304 available voices matches the exact specified name Not all text to speech implementations support specification of age and gender You can also change the overall voice via the speech profile Voice pitch Supported for SSML SAPI The value for this property can be one of x low low med
378. r importing it one step per wizard page Step 1 Metadata This page is for entering information about your book CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED Create a new Jutoh project This wizard will help you fill in the details for your new book First please enter some basic information The fields marked with an asterisk are mandatory Metadata Book title Lena Identifier Language Author Felix Carswell Contributor s Subject y New Project Step 1 Metadata page Type Lena into the Book title field and a name into Author field Leave the other fields as they are you can fill them out later If you wish you can clear the Identifier field so that Jutoh will generate a unique identifier UUID for each ebook format that you create Now click on Next Step 2 Project Location Here you can specify the project name and folder You can leave the Book Formats options as they are CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED Project Location Now enter the desired name for your Jutoh project and the project location Your project name Lena Project folder C Users Julian Smart Documents Jutoh Documents v ae Use template Y Ebook Formats Jutoh will configure your project for an initial choice of ebook formats creating one configuration per format but you can add more later Please note that Mobipocket creation requires you to do
379. r keyboard if there is one This menu contains commands for editing the current style clearing formatting in the current paragraph showing and hiding the style description pane managing your styles showing the Project Properties dialog with the Styles page selected and creating new styles The Clear Formatting menu command works like Reset Text Formatting in the Format menu if you have selected some text character styling within the selection will be removed It ll also reset character styling surrounding the cursor if you haven t selected anything However if there is no selection and no character styling under the cursor it will remove ad hoc direct formatting from the paragraph So for example Body Text Centre will become just Body Text If you select multiple paragraphs Jutoh will remove both ad hoc paragraph and character styling You can choose what kind of styles appear in the list using the drop down control next to the More button By default it shows paragraph styles but you can also show character styles list styles box styles or all styles Applying styles using shortcuts and favourites Especially if you have a lot of reformatting work to do you ll appreciate a quick way to apply styles Press Ctrl and then Enter to start editing shortcuts for the styles in your project Scroll down the list of shortcuts until you get to the styles section then edit each relevant style and choose a primary short
380. r people If you would like to of content share this book with another person please purchase an additional drawing copy for each recipient If you re reading this book and did not Inserts a multi format drawing object purchase it or it was not purchased for your use only then please visit an www harrietsmart com and purchase your own copy Thank you for Renders emphasised text respecting the hard work of this author ota le v Inserts a field Y 4 Chapter Forty eight Chapter Six Chapter 5 Importing Files Title Pa Q searc 4 gt Condition tags marking up two blocks of content Now you can mention the tag in Include content matching tags and or Exclude content matching tags in your configurations For example if you only want some text to appear in your Smashwords book use the tag smashwords and add it to Include content matching tags in your Smashwords configuration Sometimes you might wish to exclude all conditional content except for particular tags rather than specifying all the tags that are not relevant for the configuration This avoids you having to go back and add tags to exclude for lots of configurations after you ve added more tags in the project To do this use the value asterisk for Exclude content matching tags and specify the tags you wish to include if any in Include content matching tags Similarly you can use an asterisk in Include content 221 matching tags to indicate that all tags s
381. r use inline block Maximum box words for inline block the maximum number of words in a text box before Jutoh no longer uses the display inline block attribute for the box While this attribute is useful for centering boxes in Adobe Digital Editions it stops Adobe Digital Editions rendering long boxes Set to zero to never use inline block e Omit box height check to omit the height value from text boxes since specifying the height can cause content overflow e Popup footnotes check to show footnotes in a popup window e Hide footnotes check to hide footnotes by using aside tags The Popup footnotes option must be checked Text Formatting This category contains options for plain text and ODT OpenDocument Text output e Wrap paragraphs check to wrap paragraphs at the maximum number of characters per line for text output only 85 Add blank lines check to add blank lines between paragraphs for text output only Characters per line the maximum character per line if wrapping for text output only Left margin the left page margin in mm for ODT output only Right margin the right page margin in mm for ODT output only Top margin the top page margin in mm for ODT output only Bottom margin the bottom page margin in mm for ODT output only Paper size the paper size for ODT output only The default is A4 Custom paper width the custom paper width for ODT output only Specify mm the default cm
382. rd The list of bibliographic databases Here you can edit add and delete databases though you can t delete the Internal Database You can export to and import from databases using files with extension jutohbib a binary format On Windows you can import from the global Word bibliography file using From Word if you have Microsoft Word and there are entries gathered from documents If you wish you can select a database in the Source for entries control for an additional database to be used for collecting items You can select several by typing the names separated by commas Click Edit to edit add or delete entries or modify the template that specifies the valid fields and types for the database 126 CHAPTER 11 WORKING WITH INDEXES Name Additional References Bibliographic entries Author Title A Wolf B The Woof B Julian Smart My Excerpt The bibliographic database editor If you click on Template you can edit the fields and item types 127 Fields Citation Types Edit the permissable fields for items in the bibliography Edit the permissable citation types Types Add Artide Add Delete Ss Delete Book excerpt Clear All kaa Clear All Artide in conference proceedings PEFP Journal Technical documentation Thesis Miscellaneous Dissertation Conference proceedings ASE Move Down Ronk title Name Artide
383. rd processor will only consider there to be one first page in the whole sequence of chapters not for each chapter To work around that create two styles one for the first page in the chapter and another for the other pages in the chapter In your first page style set the Next style field to the name of the other style Now select the first page style as the Style name in the section properties Page tab You can check Repeat page for subsequent sections to avoid having to set the style for all chapters If you want to create a Word DOC or DOCX file you may need to fix headers and footers in Word after importing the ODT file For more information please see KB0128 in the Jutoh help Setting the outline style The outline style is ODT specific and defines default document wide outline information Each outline level 1 10 specifies a paragraph style for a chapter heading by default Heading 1 Heading 2 and so on and various formatting options for a numbered heading including a prefix for the number e g Chapter and a suffix for the number e g a space There is only one outline style called Outline and you can edit it from the Page tab of the Book 214 Section Properties dialog The formatting options will affect how the chapter title appears at the start of a chapter and also any chapter field that you put in a header or footer Creating a table of contents If you have created an advanced table of contents in oth
384. re are spanned columns Jutoh will generate code to indicate to the other table cells which all the appropriate header cells are If you have header cells that outside the main header rows you can mark them as such individually using the Cell headers control in the table properties dialog 8 The aside tag It s important for a disabled person to know what parts of the content are part of the main flow and which are not The HTMLS aside tag caters for this and for text boxes Jutoh lets you indicate in the box properties dialog whether it is an aside or a normal block You can configure footnotes to use asides by checking the configuration options Popup footnotes and Hide footnotes You an also insert aside tag objects manually if you wish Editing your project for accessibility To make best use of Jutoh s accessibility features you need to have a well defined set of styles that you apply consistently Have one heading style for chapters another for appendices and so on so Jutoh can apply a different Epub type for each kind Several heading styles can still use the same outline level e A consistent caption style will help Jutoh group images and tables and their captions within figure tags e Create character styles for strong and emphasised text and other phrase tags listed in the Tag drop down control in the Style Mapping dialog so Jutoh can insert the appropriate tags instead of just visual formatti
385. recreated when you update the book Or you may need to add extra pages blank or otherwise for a print book Or perhaps you need to include different audio or video media for different formats With Jutoh you can do all this without needing to split your project into different copies which can become a time consuming confusing mess There are several ways of creating conditional content suitable for different tasks or kinds of content but they all depend on the fact that you can have multiple configurations even for the same format You might have a Epub Sample configuration that creates an ebook containing the first couple of chapters of your book So to create your sample you just select Epub Sample and press Compile The different values of options in your configurations will determine how the book is created These are the different methods available to you for changing the book without editing content each time e Tagging section and media documents e Tagging chunks of content Specifying string variables in your content e Specifying paragraph styles to include or omit Let s look at each of these Tagging whole section and media documents To include or exclude whole section documents you can specify tags arbitrary names in each document and then tell your configurations whether to include or exclude documents matching these tags Let s say you wanted to be able to create a sample book in Epub format Cre
386. rently supported by Kindle You can use the style mapping facility to map styles to phrase tags such as em and strong in Epub 2 Epub 3 and Mobipocket Epub 3 and Jutoh Epub 3 uses HTMLS5 and some additional Epub specific constructs to provide semantic markup that ereaders can use to orientate users with a range of abilities Given that time available for editing documents is usually in short supply Jutoh tries to automate as 193 much as possible in particular relying on using a well planned and consistently used set of styles in your project If this doesn t describe your project please take the time to create named paragraph styles for headings images captions and so on and apply them to your book Some forethought should save a lot of time in the long run Here are the accessibility features that Jutoh currently supports 1 Epub type The epub type attribute Epub type in Jutoh can be associated with many elements including the document body section tags links headings and so on A range of values allows meaning to be assigned to elements Jutoh allows editing the Epub type in the Advanced tab of various property dialogs and also in the document properties Multiple space separated types can be specified 2 Section tags Use of the section tag gives hierarchy and an Epub type to components of a book chapter allowing easier navigation Section tags often but not always contain a single
387. ressressene 217 vii Tagging chunks of cota lucene daarcasieds estdatedishds cantabcendastathavatag Untmedien tees 221 Specifying string variables in your Contents cii 0 arises skies ued recheck eral heer aia 222 Specifying conditional paragraph les acia da is a a da ini dais 222 Managing multiple CONTISULA ION venias lira e eee 222 SUM a 223 Chapter 242A dy ane E govdassesestescastvnccsadstonaesdeeescessedoshadsesdasesabescondesdasecsesnecsastaeeesnss 224 Emb dding fonts A A A ia 224 Embeddins ml star 225 Embedding DE A ARA A AS 226 Setting a background AMAA OSs oes cele ats vest secag sade poe toca tecedauiteiaah gests ste pelle cade a nada shoisiealenih salatmusotoawasetths 227 Understand PACA A A AA a 227 A AN 228 A TOMA AL RAT 0O 8A cs a Aecuden ER A EE veka ode E E EEA 229 How to format SIT CL A A AAA E 229 How t add an ISBN to your Do0KS msc sand tec obecuaves iebisapeduaseaaweties 230 Removing underlining from links in HTML based formMatS ooooconincnncinocnocononcnnnconcnonncnonccnonccnnncannns 231 J t h and EP b A E Nu 232 A AN 232 Chapter 25 Troubleshooting Your Bo0k oooooooonocnoonccnonncnocanononanononononocononocnnononcnononcncnoncccccnccononnnos 233 is A A ANT aae aa Uae aT psa ang aE oN 233 DV ULAR SEROUS A Seed saci una eva A A A 233 UIC SOLS noh ea a tis aoueseuta susgcecneueeus a 237 A AAA E A O A Vetus E YA 239 CODES A a a 243 Plato IS A ri 243 Smashwords A Gaon causes Ques Ee a E 243 WTS CEO Sirens O 244
388. result by specifying column widths and row heights using the table formatting commands and the Table Properties dialog Specifying the size of a single cell may have an impact on the row or column size depending on whether it changes the maximum row or column size If you wish cells to calculate their size from their content you can specify zero in the column width and row height commands or in the Columns page of the Table Properties dialog or by clearing width and height settings in Cell Properties You can specify whether cells should wrap their text break the text into lines in the Spacing page of the Table Properties dialog This may be overridden if there is not enough space to show an unbroken line of text You should generally specify padding for cells that is the space between the content and the border of the cell Otherwise the table will looked cramped Specify padding in the Spacing page of the Table Properties dialog or in the Cell Properties dialog Specifying minimum and maximum sizes for cells in Cell Properties won t have an effect in the editor but ereaders may use these values To understand more about the relationship between content padding and borders refer to Appendix C The Jutoh Box Model If you have specified absolute sizes for cells or tables in centimetres quite likely after importing from a word processor file you may find the tables are too large for small ereader displays or they are not in
389. riant CereVoice Heather English Scotland Volume Pitch Test text Testing text to speech settings Test Text to Speech Edit Custom Pronunciations Reset Speech Settings Help Jutoh s speech preferences Jutoh directly accesses some speech engines through their Application Programming Interface Microsoft SAPI Apple Speech Manager and for other speech engines it invokes an external process eSpeak Cepstral CereVoice When narrating text in the editor or generating speech audio files Jutoh converts the project content to files in the format required by the currently selected speech engine For Microsoft SAPI SAPI XML files are created and for CereVoice and Cepstral SSML files are created For Apple Speech Manager text with embedded commands is created The Microsoft SAPI and Apple speech engines come with built in voices but you can buy more if you wish The third party speech engines eSpeak CereVoice and Cepstral can be accessed either by the operating system s speech engine interface SAPI or Apple Speech Manager or using their own system usually based on SSML and generally providing more flexibility than the operating system s facilities For example with some engines you can specify a pitch contour for a sentence or phrase when using SSML but not when using SAPI On the other hand with a system like SAPI you can switch between different voices and different underlying speech engines in the same do
390. rminated with another tag containing the same name preceded by a slash or by self terminating the same tag with a slash If you miss out a tag terminator you will get an error message Tags can be nested where appropriate 296 Tags can have attributes in the form name value and you can add comments between lt gt tags And that s about it for the basic XML syntax Jutoh s formatting language is all couched in this syntax Constructs These are the constructs you can use in Xi if You can use if to test for a condition and then execute alternate commands You can add two or three elements between the start and end if tags cond a condition then a sequence of commands and optionally else for an alternative sequence of commands if the test fails For example lt if gt lt cond gt lt and gt lt variable eq name FormatAsList value 1 gt lt variable eq name Type value Article gt lt and gt lt cond gt lt then gt lt write gt lt text value An article in a list gt lt write gt lt then gt lt else gt lt write gt lt text value Not an article or not a list gt lt write gt lt else gt lt if gt The condition here contains an and which takes two boolean expressions you can also use or not eq neq variable eq variable neq and variable The latter takes a name attribute and returns a value that you can use in a condition There are attributes in the write comma
391. roperties e An image has transparency which is not supported by most ereaders Pre rendering the object will allow transparency to work and is appropriate for decorative images e An image does not need to be magnified and merging it with the background may reduce file size especially if the original image was provided at a high resolution e A text object needs to be rendered precisely in advance and it s hard to predict final text layout when using actual text The book must be delivered with text in special fonts but those fonts cannot be embedded in the file for copyright or other reasons The quality of rendering depends on the resolution of the background image and if it s an image object the object s original image resolution For example if the background image resolution is much greater than the page size text will be rendered at a relatively high quality because it will be scaled up and drawn onto a large background image Note that images are currently not pre rendered with any specified borders or margins text objects are rendered without full justification and are subject to the visual restrictions of the editor so any CSS customisation won t show Any hyperlinks will not work Also if there is no background image no pre rendering is done and pre rendered objects will not show on the page at all Font size and dimension units Currently position and size of pages and objects should be expressed in pixels
392. rted to ems for Epub and HTML see Options in Project Properties for the scaling value Note that Mobipocket doesn t register spacing that s less than 25 tenths of a mm so if spacing isn t what you expected go back and check the values Line spacing is specified in multiples of single line spacing for example 1 2 Don t be tempted to simply leave a blank paragraph to get inter paragraph spacing some reader software may ignore this and it will be very hard to change your project if you decide to use less or no inter paragraph spacing The exception to this is the title page and other cases where you need more than the usual spacing but even here it s best to use a special style for each kind of vertical space so you only need one blank paragraph at a time Indentation First and subsequent line indentation for the left margin can be specified in a style again under Indents amp Spacing in the style editor So a hanging indent can be achieved by specifying say 0 for the first line indent and 60 for the normal indent where the values are in tenths of a millimetre You can also specify the right indent though it s rare to need to do that Again the value is specified in tenths of a millimetre Don t use tabs for indentation Tabs are ignored in HTML based formats Alignment Paragraph alignment left right centred justified can be specified in the Indents amp Spacing tab in the style editor or via the
393. ry different and it cannot do a perfect job So if you import from HTML you may need to edit the styles or replace them Alternatively you can clear the option Import basic CSS from HTML Epub and have Jutoh use a small number of styles for headings and 244 paragraphs e Unexpected automatic styles When importing from DOCX or ODT you may be surprised to find a lot of automatic styles in your document where they did not appear to be automatic when edited in your word processor This is because the word processor may hide the fact you have applied ad hoc styling and show you the base style Jutoh simply shows the automatic style names and this can reveal an inconsistently formatted document Ad hoc and inconsistent styles can also give rise to frustration when splitting the file in the New Project Wizard and creating an advanced table of contents because it s hard to specify how Jutoh will search for headings when they are formatted differently throughout the document Some of this can be smoothed over by using wildcards to match against variants of a base style but it s always better to start with a clean consistent document e Missing images If images don t make it from your DOCX or ODT file Jutoh may not have been able to handle this particular image type You will need to paste or insert the images separately If you are importing from HTML the images may not have been in the correct path as specified within the HTML
394. s Times New Roman This will use DejaVu Sans Times New Roman for the font family wherever Times New Roman is found in style definitions and content The ebook reader will fall back on Times New Roman if it can t find the embedded font DejaVu Sans You can specify multiple font substitutions by separating them with semicolons 224 Or as a convenience you can use Format Insert Embedded Fonts which will take you through a wizard for the above steps allowing you to select multiple fonts that may belong to the same family If you have multiple font files for a single font family for example regular bold and bold italic variants you can use the same font family name in all of these font documents for example DejaVu Serif and specify the italic style and weight properties in each font document as in the following DejaYuSerif BoldItalic Embedded Font Embed Family Deja u Serif Import File File name fonts DejaYuSerif BoldItalic ttf Export File Media type Font truetype v Style italic v Weight bold v Description 4 f Sansation_Bold f DejavuSerif f DejaYuSerif BoldItalic Font document Jutoh will generate the appropriate CSS so that the viewer can use the correct font file for each combination of italic style and weight If font embedding isn t working at first check that the font family specified in the font document is identical to the font name you use within styles or within your font substitutions Ot
395. s a comma separated list of attributes to give the content written by this command The attributes can be a combination of strong emphasis underline caps smallcaps superscript and subscript Jutoh will add a suitable style to the currently active style sheet style the name of a character style to assign to the content written by this command The style should exist already Note that you can also use attributes and style with individual text and variable tags that you place within the write command Using variables The following variables are available e All fields in the current bibliography item with a first upper case letter and remaining lower case letters e Number the position of the item in the bibliography e FormatAsList 1 if the project is formatting the items as a true list and 0 otherwise e PersonSeparator the text to insert between person names By default this is a semicolon but you can set it in the template You can also set arbitrary variables Fields that contain person names can be referenced in various ways by appending a dot and a keyword to the name e Field name surname the surname of the first person Field name surnames the surnames of all people separated by the value of PersonSeparator e Field name forenames the forenames of the first person 298 Field name surnamefirst the full name of the first person surname first Field name surnamelast the full name of the firs
396. s amp Spacing Bullets Tabs Advanced Description Style for body text with an indented first line More properties Custom CSS C Use custom CSS P_Body_Text_First_Indent font family Times New Roman serif font size 1 00em text align justify margin top 0 00em margin bottom 0 50em marginteft 0 00em margin right 0 00em text indent 0 00em You can supply a CSS style definition above that will be used in XHTML based formats such as epub overriding the usual settings The style editor Advanced page CSS customisation is described in detail later in this chapter Editing character styles To edit a character style first view all character styles by selecting Character styles in the drop down box under the style list then select a style and click Edit The character style editor has a Style page 136 CHAPTER 12 WORKING WITH STYLE SHEETS similar to the paragraph style editor but without the Next style field and a Font page No other attributes apply to character styles Editing list styles To edit a list style first view all list styles by selecting List styles in the drop down box under the style list then select a style and click Edit The list style editor has Style Font Indents amp Spacing and List Style pages Style Font Indents amp Spacing List Style Advanced List level 1 Font for Level Symbol Choose Symbol Fon
397. s we describe how to create and manipulate tables In Chapter 15 Working With Boxes we describe how to use text boxes to highlight or group content In Chapter 16 Working With Tag Objects we describe how you can use use extra markup to enhance your book If your needs are simple you can skip this chapter In Chapter 17 Adding Narration To Your Book we see how audio files can be synchronised with your content to create narrated books In Chapter 18 Creating Fixed Layout Books we describe the details of creating fixed layout books particularly useful for children s picture books or books containing a lot of pictures In Chapter 19 Adding Interactivity To Your Book we look at the use of form objects for adding interaction in conjunction with JavaScript code In Chapter 20 Making Your Books Accessible we see how you can make your book more accessible to disabled readers when creating Epub 3 files In Chapter 21 Working with Text To Speech we describe how you can mark up content to produce more accurate audio files using the text to speech facilities in Jutoh In Chapter 22 Formatting for Print we explain how you can create print ready OpenDocument files using Jutoh In Chapter 23 Conditional Formatting we explain how you can use Jutoh s facilities for creating different ebook output depending on format distributor or other criteria without needing to maintain different versions of your project In Chapter 24 Adva
398. s no choice of which cell borders are shown Jutoh includes both KF7 and KF8 formatting 156 for Kindle files so most Kindles will show full table formatting Kindle for iOS is less capable when rendering tables than other KF8 Kindle apps and devices Cell widths cannot be specified as percentages and the table width attribute is not recognised However it does recognise the min width attribute so when generating Mobipocket files Jutoh adds a min width attribute to the table Adobe Digital Editions doesn t handle absolute cell size very well so cell size is converted to CSS minimum size properties unless a minimum size has been explicitly set This should still work across all ereaders but you can switch it off via the Use minimum size for cells onfiguration option Repeated table headers and footers are not supported by most readers and Adobe Digital Editions does not rearrange the headers and footers from the standard HTML syntax defined at the start of the table to be at the actual top and bottom of the table On the other hand for Jutoh s HTML output Firefox and Internet Explorer printing does the right thing and places headers and footers on each page Because of the lack of support for headers and footers in ereaders they are switched off by default in all configurations You can switch them on using the Table headers and footers configuration option Adobe Digital Editions has a unique problem when rendering large tables In
399. s provided including these paragraph styles Normal Body Text Body Text First Indent Heading 1 Heading 2 Heading 3 Heading 4 Comment stripped out of all generated books Headers Footers HTML output verbatim to HTML based formats Centre and Right You can edit the attributes visual characteristics such as indent or font of all styles and add your own 132 Be careful when deleting styles though since your book may not work correctly if styles that it uses are missing Jutoh will warn you about this and you can then add them back or replace the styles in the offending paragraphs By default the dialog shows the paragraph styles You can view the character styles list styles box styles or all styles at once by using the drop down control under the style list You can also edit styles from the Formatting Palette by right clicking on a style and selecting Edit Editing paragraph styles To edit the attributes of a selected style click on Edit The style dialog will be shown for paragraphs it will look like this Style Font Indents amp Spacing Bullets Tabs Advanced Style Body Text Based on Normal Next style Paragraph style dialog Style page The Style page shows the name of the style the base or parent style from which the style inherits and an optional next style that indicates what style will be
400. s to refine that description even further into a sentence or two you can use when you meet people and they ask about your book The latest evidence suggests that word of mouth is one of the most important drivers of ebook sales Word of mouth begins with a conversation be it virtual or in real life When people ask you what your book is about you need to have an answer ready Even better have several answers ready to suit the sort of person you are talking to 239 Never apologise for your book be bold and talk it up Share the passion you felt in writing it Don t say Oh it s just a romance novel say It s a love story inspired by a set of old letters I found in a thrift shop It made me cry when I was writing it Don t say It s a rehash of some research I did on stress but It s a book about how you can manage your stress levels Now I am not saying this is easy It isn t Writers are naturally shy and retiring and like to hide behind a wall of comforting text But to get people to know your book exists you have to have a pithy description at your finger tips Practice saying in private and aloud My book is about Refine what you say Evolve it into a neat phrase that you can say as easily as your name Books and blogs on pitching and log lines for the screenwriting industry have lots of helpful hints on expressing the idea of a thing in a succinct and appealing way Step 3 Find your
401. s very useful if you have a large number of tabs open Note that under the special Content folder you should only create Book Section documents Any other sort of document will be ignored including folders Creating and deleting documents If you import an existing document Jutoh will already contain one or more book section documents However you may wish to create further documents or you may wish to create a project from scratch consisting of several chapters When you create a document where it goes depends on what document is currently selected If you have selected a folder it will be added as a child of the folder Otherwise it will be created as a sibling of the selected folder You can use one of the following methods for creating a new document 1 Click items on the Document menu 2 Use a keyboard shortcut such as Ctrl Alt B to create a book section 3 Click on the document button on the toolbar and choose an item from the drop down menu The document button looks like this _ 2 Most frequently you ll be choosing Book Section from the menu 4 Right click in the project hierarchy and select New Document from the menu Now choose your document type and title in the New Document dialog that shows 5 Auto paste by copying some data in another application twice in quick succession Windows only Now click on the title of the new document and enter the new page title You can delete a document by selecting in the pro
402. s you define any number of cover designs You might wish to experiment with several alternatives or you might use different covers to target different ebook vendors In that case you d have several configurations with a different cover name assigned to the Cover design property in each configuration You can manage your cover designs in the Cover tab of Project Properties they are listed in the drop down control Initially you will have just one cover design called Default Cover You can add delete and rename designs using the buttons under the drop down list Cover display on different devices On Kindle the book will start at the first main page and you ll have to page back to see the cover There is nothing that can be done to change this behaviour On iBooks you ll see the cover in the virtual bookshelf and the first page shown will be the cover unless you have specified an alternative first page by using a document guide type Other ereaders may or may not show the cover as the first page Summary You now know how to add a cover to your project from an existing design or from scratch using the built in cover designer Next we ll tackle the topic of configurations the mechanism Jutoh uses to allow you maximum control over each individual file format or ebook platform that you re targeting 74 Chapter 9 Understanding Configurations gt IO Ebook publishers often have slightly different requirements even if the
403. se when read as individual pages iBooks does not currently support viewing single pages in portrait orientation the whole spread is shown If you don t like the default simulated crease down the middle of the double page spread you can switch this off by clearing the Show binder configuration option Using a regular reflowable project as a fixed layout book If you are using reflowable book section documents and have a single image per page you can make this into a fixed layout book without using fixed layout page documents Enable the Fixed layout configuration option and also set the pixel size of your images in Page width and Page height Switch off Generate table of contents in your configuration to prevent a reflowable page being included Jutoh will now mark the book as fixed layout and the single image per page will be used to fill the page This can be especially convenient if you wish to import from a document containing a lot of images or a set of HTML files This technique may not work on iBooks Faking fixed layout using a reflowable project You may wish to take advantage of the wider distribution of reflowable books compared with fixed layout Some aggregators redistributors may not accept fixed layout books and Amazon may refuse to serve fixed layout books to Kindle for iPad for unknown reasons since iPad for iOS is perfectly capable of displaying them To fake a fixed layout book using only reflowable layout fo
404. set when you press return on a style of this kind For example a heading style might have a next style of Body Text so you don t have to change the style manually back to Body Text after writing a heading The Font page lets you adjust font related attributes that will apply to the whole paragraph 133 CHAPTER 12 WORKING WITH STYLE SHEETS Indents amp Spacing Bullets Tabs Advanced Arial Unicode MS Batang BatangChe DFKai SB Font style Font weight Underlinina C Colour _ Bg colour cone v one v Lone m Strikethrough m Capitals m Small capitals m Superscript m Subscript m Right toteft m Suppress hyphenation ABCDEFGabcdefg 12345 Paragraph style dialog Font page In the example above no font attributes are actually set but the the style will inherit any attributes from the parent style A paragraph style or at least its parent needs to have the size set 12 means normal text size and also the font name which should usually be kept to something simple such as Times New Roman Arial or Helvetica or Courier New The next page is Indents amp Spacing which deals with indentation line and paragraph spacing and also text alignment whether a page break will be inserted in front of the paragraph and the outline level an optional indication of heading depth you can ignore this 134 Style Font
405. signing up with a vendor service that serves a link to your book only after payment has been received How to get content into Jutoh You can can create a blank project add book section sections and type away Or you can import existing content This is best done when you first create the project You can import a folder containing multiple text and HTML documents one file per book section or you can import a single file containing one of these formats plain text DOCX ODT HTML or Epub Note that Jutoh has a different internal representation from any of the formats it can import and so it won t preserve the document formatting 100 This varies according to format With HTML and Epub import Jutoh will read just a basic level of CSS styling and you may need to do further style and content editing after import depending on the complexity of the original CSS and HTML The preferred import format is DOCX Microsoft Word XML or ODT Open Document Text You can convert a variety of word processing formats such as DOC to DOCX or ODT simply by opening them in OpenOffice org a free download and saving as DOCX or ODT Most style information from the DOCX or ODT document will be preserved If you have an older version of Word that doesn t support DOCX you can download the Microsoft Office Compatibility Pack for Word Excel and PowerPoint File Formats which at the time of writing can be downloaded from www microsoft com en us downl
406. so quick to respond to technical support requests and even if you haven t yet bought a copy of Jutoh we re happy to discuss your needs We wish you the best of luck in the exciting world of ebook publishing 263 Glossary _4 gt IOD Ad hoc styling This is the application of a combination of individual attributes such as bold centering and so on to an existing span of text or paragraph without defining those attributes as part of a named style The result of using ad hoc styling is the creation of automatic styles uniquely named styles and when used widely problems in maintaining consistency or applying certain Jutoh features such as table of content creation that search for specific named styles Minimize ad hoc styling by editing and applying existing named styles and creating new ones Ad hoc styling can also be referred to as local or direct styling Application You can appy styles to paragraphs and text spans and lists This means giving your content some formatting attributes such as centering or bold It is best to apply named styles from the style sheet Asset An asset in Jutoh terminology is a fragment of HTML used either as a template to help Jutoh write a book section HTML file or as some other part that is inserted into the template Assets are associated both with individual documents and with the project as a whole A document s assets can be edited using Format Asset Editor
407. sponse Your customer service is amazing Kristine K xl Preface E gt OSE Bring on the revolution The publishing world is currently in turmoil largely thanks to the freedoms and opportunities that ebooks bring Simultaneously freeing consumers from the physical realities of print and paper and freeing authors from the gatekeeper mentality that has held back much good content as well as less literary output to be sure the ebook phenomenon has just hit the mainstream now that ebook reader gadgets have become practical and affordable Kindles Kobos and a huge variety of tablets have become popular Christmas presents and each year will see more choice on offer To join the revolution authors and publishers need to provide ebooks in essentially two popular formats Epub and Mobipocket Kindle Other formats such as PDF are sometimes used for creating ebooks but PDFs play less well on reader hardware and cannot be reformatted to adapt to reader constraints While Jutoh can help with creating PDFs we will concentrate on the two standard ebooks formats To some extent creating an Epub or a Kindle file is a black art You ll find blogs and forums full of advice on using obscure XML and HTML markup You ll read about the hoops people are jumping through to get this or that formatting correct on iBooks or Kindle or Nook You may see advice on editing XML to create a table of contents before adding it to an Epub zip file For the u
408. st about writing the raw material ts always around me totally free waiting to be fashioned into something new No one else can create exactly what I can create Only 1 can choose the elements either from my mind or from the real world and put them together imio just Viewing the ebook in Adobe Digital Editions If you want to compile a Mobipocket file for the Kindle store select the Mobipocket configuration and again press Compile You need to have downloaded installed and configured kindlegen for this to work see Appendix A Installing Jutoh and Appendix B Configuring Jutoh Press Launch and if you have installed a Mobipocket viewer application such as Kindle for PC or Mac or Kindle Previewer for PC it will launch to show your ebook You can verify that the files have been generated by clicking on the Files tab in the Control Panel You can select a file and then click Folder if you want to see where the file is on your disk Note that it s important to use separate configurations to generate books in different formats because a configuration has settings that optimizes the book for each format For example if you are distributing to both iTunes Epub and Amazon Mobipocket use the supplied configurations individually don t set multiple formats for the same configuration unless you are very sure of what you are doing Summary Ta da You have imported content from a file and compiled an ebook In the next chapte
409. stall Kindlegen Help Me Install Kindle Previewer o come ip Configuring Jutoh helper applications When configuring the Java checker applications you can use APPDIR to denote the folder in which the Jutoh application is found You need to specify a full Java command such as java jar SAPPDIRS epubcheck 1 1 epubcheck 1 1 jar For the Kindlegen compiler specify the full path of the Kindlegen executable on Windows and Mac and just kindlegen on Linux If you re not sure how to install or configure Kindlegen you can click on Help Me Install Kindlegen in the Preferences dialog under Helpers or in the Setup Wizard The Kindlegen Installation dialog will help you either download and install Kindlegen or install Kindlegen from a manually downloaded Kindlegen archive On Windows the Setup Wizard will also help you download install and configure Kindle Previewer for Jutoh which is much easier than doing it by hand Text to speech configuration If you wish to generate speech files using Jutoh or have Jutoh read the current document you can 277 select a text to speech engine in the Speech page of the Preferences dialog Normally you choose Microsoft SAPI on Windows and the Apple Speech Manager on Mac but you can also choose the CereVoice or Cepstral engines if you have appropriate voices installed and eSpeak is another option On Linux only CereVoice Cepstral and eSpeak are available In the Spee
410. styles by selecting Box styles or All styles in the drop down control Then select the image or box and double click on the box style in the palette If the current editing position is inside a text box but nothing is selected the style will be applied to the text box If the current editing position is not inside a text box and nothing is selected double clicking the box style will create a new box with this style You can also force text box creation instead of style application by holding down the control key or on Mac command key while double clicking TIP If the content of your box is formatted strangely check the paragraph style for the paragraph containing the box Set the style for the paragraph to something innocuous such as Normal so the box doesn t pick up unwanted attributes Text box compatibility in ebook readers Text boxes should work well in most ereaders Older Kindle ereaders supporting only KF7 Kindle DX mode in Kindle Previewer will not show boxes unless you use the configuration option Emulate boxes using tables since KF7 implements tables better than it does boxes Adobe Digital Editions has a unique problem when rendering large boxes as it also does with tables In order to support centred boxes in ADE the CSS attribute display inline block must be used However boxes with this attribute do not span multiple pages the part of the box that isn t displayed on the first page will simpl
411. t Peia LI O9 Bullet Alignment Standard bullet name Left standard cirde Listlevel 1 Duis pharetra consequat dui Nullam vitae justo id mauris lobortis interdum a List level 2 Duis pharetra consequat dui Nullam vitae justo id mauris lobortis interdum Listlevel 3 Duis pharetra consequat dui Nullam vitae justo id mauris lobortis interdum o cancel Helo List Style page List styles work on the principle that lists can potentially be nested with different bullet or numbering styles depending on the level depth of the list When you are editing an actual list in the Jutoh editor pressing the Tab or Shift Tab keys will increase or decrease the level of the current paragraph in the list On the List Style page click on List level to edit a different level up to 10 and then adjust the 137 CHAPTER 12 WORKING WITH STYLE SHEETS attributes to be shown for that level The attributes listed on the Spacing sub page will be merged with the attributes on the Indents amp Spacing page Various bullet styles can be defined but it s best to keep it as simple as possible because not all book formats and readers allow complex bullets For bulleted lists it s best to keep with a Standard bullet style and then select from the pre defined bullet types in the Standard bullet name dropdown Even this may be ignored by the ebook reader if it chooses to use its ow
412. t Hy O Play Stop Preview Source Generate al Objects Profiles Profiles Default Speech Profile More Formats A Generate speech WAY files Generate speech MP3 files Speech MP3 bit rate auto Speech source format auto Keep source files E Speech archive Generate speech archive Generate portable archive Voice properties Speech engine auto Speech voice auto x The default profile Q Searc gt The Profiles tab in the Formatting Palette To add more profiles click on the More button and then on Add From the More menu you can delete profiles and move them up and down in the list and there are menu commands for setting the global speech and MP3 generation settings which are used when the corresponding profile settings are set to auto The available profile properties are described in detail in Appendix F Speech Profile Reference Speech markup You can annotate the content in your project so that regular formats such as Epub and Kindle are untouched but text to speech generation is improved You can add pronunciations for specific words pauses pitch and voice changes and more Because there are different speech standards and implementations markup may or may not be respected in a particular context of engine and voice usage 202 Markup is achieved using the speech and pause objects or tags in HTML terminology The principles of tags are described in Chapter 16 Working With Tag Objects Spe
413. t Performance Research report Sound recording Technical documentation Thesis Unpublished Web site How to edit and use formatting templates Each project can have one or more formatting templates however only one can be active at a time You can create edit delete import and export formatting templates from the Formatting Templates tab under Project Properties Indexes Bibliography It s easy to test a template in the Formatting Template dialog edit the test data and press Test to see the formatted item 299 APPENDIX D THE BIBLIOGRAPHIC FORMATTING LANGUAGE Test This Template Default Formatting Template Type Template XML Shortname ANTH2000 lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt po l lt xi version 1 0 0 0 gt Corporate author Anthemion Software lt Use the new variable Id so we can change it easily gt lt set name Id value of Number gt lt set name PersonSeparator value and gt lt A catch all formatting clause gt lt write if variable neq FormatAsList value 1 gt lt variable name Ia gt lt text value gt Show all properties lt write gt Output lt write if variable set Title attributes emphasis gt lt variable name Title gt 1 My Excerpt Anthemion Software 2000 Edinburgh lt write gt lt write if variable set Sook gt lt text value gt lt variable name Book gt lt write gt
414. t is nested in the project instead of heading style check Use document depth Table title Table title style Link style Editing level Style for formatting this level Matching style for this level Build options Table of Contents TOC Heading URL 1 Max heading level 1 6 3 TOC Entry 1 Heading 1 Add at least one entry per section Overwrite existing text Table of Contents _ Use document depth not heading level lt Back Cancel Table of Contents Wizard generation preferences page Let s explain the options presented here Table title specifies the text of the title that will be inserted in the table of contents Table title style lets you choose the paragraph style that will be used to format the table of contents title Link style specifies the character style that will be used to format the linked entries in the table Max heading level lets you choose the maximum number of levels that will appear in the NavMap and table of contents If you check Overwrite existing text the default the whole table of contents page will be replaced when regenerating it Usually this is what you want but you might want to clear this option if you have entered extra text that you want to keep and you want to manually edit out the old entries later Add at least one entry per section determines whether Jutoh will add an entry for a section even if it didn t match any headings Usually
415. t is similar to a text document allowing styled text editing but has its own property editor dialog with options relating to Epub generation and inclusion within an ebook depending on format Fixed layout page document A fixed layout page document represents a page or double page spread in a fixed layout project Text document A text document lets the user type a text note This is useful for storing information that shouldn t be in the book itself such as planning notes for your book or a list of corrections to be applied or maybe to keep track of the sites to which the book has been submitted Typically you 1l add these under the Scraps folder Folder document The folder document allows you to group your documents as you wish For example you might have a Web Links folder and a My Photos folder Note that while folder documents are particularly suited to containing further documents in fact any document may contain children Don t create folder documents under your book Content folder this may only contain book section documents Image document Use these to store images that won t appear in the book perhaps for research purposes You can create an image document from an image on the clipboard with Edit Paste New Scrap CtrI Alt V Or you can create a new image document and then paste the image into it with Ctrl V or Edit Paste You can also resize the image and use a different format from the default format PN
416. t may simply be a limitation of the format Paragraph spacing doesn t work Mobipocket KF7 doesn t recognise spacing dimensions of less than 25 tenths of millimetre when the configuration option Use relative scaling is checked so check the numbers in the style dialog or clear Use relative scaling in your Mobipocket configuration Also check that the paragraph in question has a named not automatic style and then examine its style definition in Project Properties It may have a base style that is providing some of the attributes if those properties are not defined in the actual style Another problem might be that you are using blank lines to space paragraphs out Don t do that Use named styles with the appropriate after paragraph and before paragraph spacing Occasional use of blank lines is permitted though especially on the title page Unexpected page break in large paragraphs Some readers don t cope elegantly with large paragraphs and break them early leaving large amounts of space before the end of the page This is related to widows and orphans handling You can try a combination of breaking up large paragraphs and adding this custom CSS to the Jutoh project body widows 1 orphans 1 all on one line or on multiple lines it doesn t matter which See Chapter 13 Working With Style Sheets CSS customisation for how to add custom CSS to the style sheet file that Jutoh generates Justification problems In your
417. t person surname last e Field name surnamesfirst the full names of all people surname first Field name surnameslast the full names of all people surname last The following fields are available in the standard Jutoh database template Not all of them will be used for a given source type Abbreviated case number Address Album title Annotation Artist Author Book author Book title Broadcaster Broadcast title Case number Chapter City Compiler Composer Conductor Conference name Corporate author Counsel Country Region Court Custom citation Day Day accessed Department Director DOI Edition Editor Institution Internet site title Interviewee Interviewer Inventor Issue Journal Medium Month Month accessed Note Number of volumes Organisation Pages Patent number Patent type Performer Producer Production company Publisher Publication title Publication type Recording number Reporter Report type Series Short name Short title Standard number State Province Station Theater Title Translator Type University URL User defined 1 User defined 2 User defined 3 User defined 4 User defined 5 Version Volume Writer Year Year accessed These are the source types set using the Type field Art Article Article in conference proceedings Book Book excerpt Brochure Case Conference proceedings Dissertation Electronic source Email Film In collection Interview Journal Miscellaneous Paten
418. te The Shortcut Editor dialog You can specify the primary and or secondary shortcut key combinations and whether the shortcut should appear on the Favourites menu see below If the shortcut is a symbol shortcut for inserting one or more text characters you can also type the text in the Symbol field or select it from a grid of Unicode symbols by clicking Insert Symbol Global shortcuts are saved to the file shortcuts dat in the application settings folder see Jutoh Files for details so another way of resetting command shortcuts is to delete this file before running Jutoh Favourites Another way to save time is to enable the Favourites button on the editor toolbar right click on the toolbar and select Customise or use the View Customise Toolbars command and select the Text Section toolbar Now click on the Favourites Y button you will be asked if you want to edit the favourites If you answer Yes you will be shown the shortcut editor Select a command style or symbol that you want to be on your list of favourites and check the Favourite control Press OK to dismiss all dialogs and click on Favourites Y You will now be shown a menu containing the commands styles and symbols you chose as follows 282 APPENDIX B CONFIGURING JUTOH Car Batch Compile Code Span Alt Ctrl 5 Body Text Alt Ctrl 3 Body Text First Indent Alt Ctrl 4 Caption Heading 1 Heading 2 Heading 3 Heading 4 Item Alt Shift
419. te copy twice in any application Auto paste interval in milliseconds 1000 E Group auto pasted documents by date The Projects Preferences page If you want to allow Jutoh to have several projects open simultaneously rather than close the previous project when opening another check View multiple projects If you want Jutoh to create a backup before editing a project check Create backup file when project is opened You can also change auto save frequency and whether to auto paste information into a new document when copying twice in quick succession in another application Windows only Using Edit Document Preferences you can change the auto saving and tab creation behaviour of classes of document For example you can specify that book section documents should reuse a single tab instead of spawning a new tab for each document It s fairly unlikely you ll want to change these settings The Project Maintenance button shows a dialog for cleaning up a project In this dialog you can 290 APPENDIX B CONFIGURING JUTOH e Delete troublesome documents without opening them e Delete individual records in the project database in particular orphan documents that are no longer in the project index this occasionally happens when Jutoh is closed unexpectedly e Compact a project that has been fragmented by much document creation and deletion It is recommended that you back up your project before doing
420. th errors that Jutoh itself spots Assuming Java has been installed checking will either give a clean bill of health or will show errors that have been identified in the Epub These errors are listed in the Error Window at the bottom of Jutoh the same window that Jutoh will use for general errors that 1t finds during compilation Log Errors Xx There were 2 errors for JutohBook epub at 23 02 2014 15 36 11 Double click on an error for more information pubCheck OPS toc ncx 1483 91 auto bookmark table of contents 14 fragment identifier is not defined in OPS s Tip The bookmark was not found or EpubCheck stopped parsing the file containing the bookmark producing a LD O The Error Window If you click on an error you can see part of a tip underneath the list To see more click on the information button next to the message For example 234 CHAPTER 25 TROUBLESHOOTING YOUR BOOK ERROR EpubCheck OP S toc ncx 1483 91 auto _bookmark_table_of_contents 14 fragment identifier is not defined in OP S section 0024 html The bookmark was not found or EpubCheck stopped parsing the file containing the bookmark producing a spurious missing identifier message For example a duplicate identifier within the same XHTML file can cause EpubCheck to stop finding further bookmarks Check the file containing the bookmark right before the bookmark mentioned in the first of these errors You may be able to fix
421. the structure of the document and the identifiers that specify the timing for that content You can look at the generated files by using Book Examine and clicking on the smil file s You can test the book using Readium add on for the Chrome browser or on iBooks or a Kobo device or app if you have created a fixed layout book On some systems you can click on or touch a region of content to start reading immediately from that point Summary We ve seen how we can add audio files and synchronise them with book content with a little help from the third party audio editor Audacity For iBooks we can only use narration in fixed layout books so let s look at that next 172 Chapter 18 Creating Fixed Layout Books IO This chapter shows you how to create fixed layout books using the new Fixed Layout document type and various configuration settings that are specific to this kind of book The fixed layout sample You can use the supplied sample Birds jutoh available via the Help Browse Samples command in conjunction with this chapter The sample shows a book fixed in landscape orientation with image and text objects laid onto an image background The pages are edited as double page spreads rather than left and right pages Some of the graphics are pre rendered onto the page background when compiling to allow transparency It compiles as an Books fixed layout book and as a Kindle KF8 fixed layout book with automatic
422. the list For some Epub and Kindle devices you can specify a custom bullet image for lists This is how 1 Add a media document with a bitmap e g media bulletl png 2 Edit or create a list style and in the List Style tab click on Bitmap for the bullet style and enter or select the media document path under Standard bullet name e g media bullet1 png 3 Format a list item with this style Unlike regular images inserted into Jutoh resource images are not converted to JPEG automatically so the type you add is the type that will be output to the ebook Therefore you need to use types that are known to work with the targeted ereader these are usually PNG GIF and JPEG You will need to experiment with bullet bitmap size since they render at different sizes on different ereaders but you could try around 14x14 pixels Editing box styles You can edit size floating mode margins and border attributes for box styles for more information see the description of the picture property dialog in Chapter 10 Working With Pictures Creating new styles To create a new style click on New and choose from paragraph character list style or box style 139 Paragraph style name My New Stylel Description _ Use custom CSS You can supply a CSS style definition above that will be used in XHTML based formats such as epub overriding the usual settings Copy from Normal Cancel New style dialog Enter
423. the proportion originally intended relative to the display width It can be better to use percentages and you can apply this to all tables boxes and images when exporting ebooks by checking the Replace absolute widths configuration option Jutoh will use the paper size and left and right margins defined in the configuration or the parent object s width if it s an absolute value to calculate a percentage width for a given object width 155 About table borders When creating a table with borders you may wonder if you need to add every border of every cell given that the side of one cell can act as the side of an adjacent cell You can actually do either supply all borders or just the ones necessary to give the desired effect Jutoh s Table Properties dialog works on the assumption that the minimum possible number of borders will be applied The crucial setting is Collapse borders in the Table Properties dialog if checked the borders will be merged so you will only see one border for any given cell edge not two adjacent borders HTML based formats and ODT all understand collapsed borders You can edit borders using the Table Properties dialog which lets you specify borders for the whole table or a group of cells or you can edit them for an individual cell via the Cell Properties dialog click on Cell on the context menu Another issue that can be slightly confusing is that a table can have an overall border in addition to cell b
424. the way text to speech works for particular configurations In Appendix G Alphabet Description Reference we describe the XML based language for describing lexicon alphabets for use in the lexicon editor Conventions and terms used in this book The convention Menu Command such as View Preferences indicates a menu and the command on that menu The notation Ctrl S refers to holding down the control key while pressing the S key On Mac you can interpret this as Command S Where we refer to right clicking if you re on a Mac this action will be performed by control clicking since there s only one mouse button The terms compiling building and generating an ebook all refer to the same act of creating an ebook from the information in your project A context menu is the menu you get when right clicking or control clicking on a Mac or pressing the context menu button on a Windows keyboard Document is a general term for each separate item that can appear in a Jutoh project outline whether it s a chapter of your book an embedded font an audio file or any other supported document type Book section refers to a specific kind of document in which you can edit text and graphics it can contain a chapter a title page a table of contents or any individual part of a book This may sometimes be abbreviated to section A dialog is a window that opens in response to some command or condition usually but not always it ne
425. then the Configurations tab 230 7 Click on the Mobipocket configuration and scroll down to the String Tables group 8 Select Kindle in the Project string table property 9 Click on the Epub configuration and scroll down to the String Tables group 10 Select iBooks in the Project string table property 11 Click on the Metadata tab and enter ISBN into the Identifier field 12 Press OK Now when you select a configuration a different string table will be used and the ISBN variable will be filled in with the value of ISBN in the appropriate string table If you have different editions of your book with the same format for example a Mobipocket file you put on your web site and one that you upload to Kindle you can just add another configuration taking care to set the format property correctly and a string table to go with it So you can have as many configurations as you have sites that you upload to You can use the string table to change other things in your metadata and if you check the Replace strings in content configuration property your book pages For more information on string tables see Chapter 14 Working with String Tables Removing underlining from links in HTML based formats There is no provision in Jutoh for specifying this level of detail so it needs to be done using custom CSS You can add CSS either globally if you want no underscores throughout or per section To add it globally go to
426. thing seems to have changed When all else fails Don t forget to use the Search Help field in the Jutoh toolbar to search for keywords This searches the application help and also a knowledge base with over a hundred short articles that answer specific questions without having to wade through all of the documentation If you still can t figure out what is going wrong with your book do contact us see the Support page for contact details preferably sending your Jutoh project or a suitable sample and a detailed description of the problem You never know it might be a bug in Jutoh in any case we want to help you fix your problem if nothing in this chapter has helped You can also join the anthemion writingtools mailing list and raise the issue there Don t suffer in silence Summary This chapter has armed you with the knowledge and tools to correct errors that you may encounter as you create your books In the next chapter we describe specific ebook formats and distribution platforms 247 Chapter 26 Understanding Ebook Formats and Platforms IO In the Introduction we looked briefly at the ebook formats that Jutoh supports either directly such as Epub or indirectly such as PDF In this chapter we ll go into more detail about these formats and also describe the major distribution platforms that you may wish to use for selling your ebooks Formats Epub Epub is a free and open standard for reflowable ebooks mai
427. this document JavaScript code timings for synchronising narration with content and further properties for specifying an Epub type for Epub 3 ebooks JavaScript event handlers and more 60 Previewing your work You can view your entire ebook by pressing Compile and then Launch to show the book in the default viewer application However this can be slow if you just want to see the results of a small change So instead you can use Book Preview Section Alt and Jutoh will show the HTML of the current book section in your web browser having written the HTML and relevant resources to a temporary folder see the screenshot below This won t be exactly as the book will appear in various ereaders but it will be close Use a separate browser window sized appropriately and placed in front of your regular browser window so the preview doesn t interfere with your normal web browsing ae CreatingEbooksUsingJutoh Jutoh 2 Plus Chapter 3 The Jutoh User Interface a tel File Edit Format Tools Document Book View Help DBeeas e x 0 O New Open Sa Edit Cover Compile Chek Launch Previous Next Docu s Organa X Chapter 3 The Jutoh User Interface Naat pac Projects Favourites Explorer C Ai D file C Users JULIAN 1 AppData Local Temp Build JutohB 2 Y E From the Horse s Mouth A EE Apps CQ CamStudio Tutorial Plimus am iPlayer 3 Google Translate fH Mobile Insuran
428. tic styles are missing you can normally trigger their recreation by reapplying the styles either to the existing content or to some dummy content that you subsequently delete Overuse of ad hoc automatic styles Yes I m about to repeat the point I made above in case you missed it Jutoh won t warn you about this but if you have used a lot of ad hoc formatting either in the file you imported or within Jutoh you may find it very hard to get consistent formatting and to change the formatting later Ad hoc styling leads to automatic styles generated style names containing symbols which have long names and make it hard to understand and improve document formatting Create and use named styles whenever possible In particular use consistent heading styles that reflect the structure of your document Heading 1 Heading 2 and so on so that Jutoh can deduce a table of contents You can use custom shortcuts and favourites or the Formatting Palette to make this quick and painless 239 Indentation doesn t work Don t use spaces for indents since they will be ignored use named paragraph styles with indentation Apply styles with the drop down style control on the editor toolbar or with Format Styles or via the context menu For example use the Body Text First Indent style in the style sheet that Jutoh creates Also Mobipocket KF7 has poor indentation support no right indent and fixed indentation size so i
429. ting it by emitting capital letters and shrinking the text Adobe Digital Editions and some other ereaders do not support font variant but all ereaders will do a reasonable job using small caps emulation so by default emulation is used To use font variant instead clear the Emulate small caps configuration option For those ereaders that support it for example Kindle readers iBooks and the Azardi software font variant is a superior method since it renders real capitals larger than the lower case letters However if you re targeting multiple ereaders emulation is safer If you wish to add small caps to the first few words of your chapters there s a handy option in the Document Cleanup dialog accessed from the Book menu to do just that Before using it you ll need to create a Small Caps character style How to add an ISBN to your books Some platforms require you to supply an ISBN for your ebooks For example to get your books into the premium Smashwords catalogue you need an ISBN for each ebook This needs to be separate for each book edition paperbacks hardbacks and distinct ebook editions for different platforms all need separate ISBNs You can buy a set of ISBNs from the relevant agency in the UK it s Nielsen or you can see if your ebook publisher such as Smashwords can supply ISBNs Having got your ISBN where do you put it Go to the metadata in Project Properties just click on the Edit button on the toolbar
430. tive natural language pronunciation equivalent to the SSML sub element Non SSML implementations are provided by simply substituting the provided text The specified property value is natural language text that is used instead of the text enclosed by the speech object To specify a phonetic pronunciation use the Phoneme property Note that this property cannot be supported for Epub 3 because there is no corresponding property or attribute in the Epub 3 specification and replacing the text in advance of rendering it would remove content that is valid for a visual document Alphabet Supported for Epub 3 SSML SAPI Apple This specifies the alphabet used in the Phoneme property examples are x microsoft sapi x sampa ipa Note that when generating for SAPI the only legitimate value is x microsoft sapi For the Apple Speech manager the alphabet must be apple You can also use a comma separated list of alphabets as explained in the Phoneme description Content after Supported for All formats 301 Inserts text after the content at this point Note that this affects all formats including Epub Kindle and ODT to make it format specific when used in styles create muliple style sheets with different style properties and specify the style sheet to use in the configuration option Style sheet Content before Supported for All formats Inserts text in front of the content at this point Note that this affects all formats including Ep
431. to a mixture of Epub 3 and SSML Where possible these will be translated into the currently selected format Note that you can also define speech markup in ordinary paragraph and character styles via the Advanced tab of the style editor For example you could set the property Content before in a heading style to insert the word Heading in front of each chapter heading For this not to interfere with other formats you may wish to create multiple style sheets and specify which one to use in the Style sheet configuration options For more about the speech properties that you can use in markup please see Appendix E Speech Markup Reference If you find you are wanting quick access to the Speech tab and also other tabs such as Styles you can show them alongside each other by dragging a tab to one of the four edges of the formatting palette In this screenshot the Styles tab has been dragged to the right hand edge of the palette 204 Palette x 4 Favourites Speech Clips gt Styles A gt E S da i Play Stop Preview Source Generate HEADERS Objects Profiles Heading 1 Edit Object Previous Heading 2 Speech Object Next Heading 3 Pause Object Verbose display Haning Pronunciation Heading 5 A Heading 6 Click on a speech object to see its properties and use Next and Previous a e y to navigate between objects Normal paragraph style Select text and click Speech Object or ormal tex Pause Object to add markup Space after
432. to show a large bold font in the editor this exact formatting won t show in the ebook Press OK to dismiss the Drop Caps editor and now click on Properties to show the Drop Caps property dialog Check Use custom CSS and paste in this text C Drop Caps overflow hidden line height 90 height 0 75em font size 280 margin right 0 075em float left This should replace the existing text if you used a different name for the Drop Caps style make sure it s reflected in the name after the dot in the CSS Now press OK OK again and in the editor select the first letter of your paragraph and apply Drop Caps to it You can do this with right click or control click on Mac Styles scroll to the bottom of the menu click on Character Styles choose Drop Caps Now when you compile the Epub and show it in say Adobe Digital Editions you should see something approximating a drop caps In Kindle it 11 be shown as a large letter just not dropped You may need to tweak the CSS to work better with your choice of font sizes How to format small caps Small capitals can be applied to a named style or directly to text via the Font tab of the style editor For 229 convenience you could add a character style called Small Caps that just has this attribute defined When generating Epub and Mobipocket ebooks Jutoh can generate small caps either by using the official font variant CSS attribute or by emula
433. toh styles CSS works very differently from Jutoh styles so there can never be an exact conversion You can either clean up the content and styles after import or you 40 can clear the option Import basic CSS from HTML Epub and specify the styles for the first and subsequent paragraphs after each heading This way you can use import as a kind of cleanup mechanism to convert complex HTML to a simple Jutoh project and then back to HTML Epub Mobipocket Jutoh will attempt to read any images in the HTML Footnotes and alphabetical indexes will be imported as standard HTML implemented using links since HTML does not define these explicitly If you need these to be preserved use DOCX or ODT import 66 99 Where an HTML link defines both an anchor and a reference in the same a tag a bookmark symbol is generated just before the linked content since Jutoh can t handle both simultaneously This will be generated as an empty bookmark followed by the linked content Epub You can specify an Epub as a single file in the New Project Wizard Since Epub files contain HTML the same import restrictions apply as for HTML However Jutoh will be able to recreate the structure of the Epub accurately and will use the metadata it finds in the Epub Importing into an existing project You can still import from text HTML DOCX ODT and Epub at any time after initially creating your project using the File Import command However you will not be
434. troduction to Ebooks and Jutoh Cover Compile Chapter 1 Introduct and Jutoh In this chapter we explore ebook formats and expl onto virtual shelves We ll take a look at how you g use alongside Jutoh Til o oe fne Pa sassoc md The clickable section title Basic content editing When you click on a book section in the project outline or create a new book section with Document Add Book Section Document you are presented with the Jutoh editor You can use this just to review the content in your book or you can edit the text graphics and formatting Many of the editing keystrokes will be familiar from other editors though there will be some differences Here are the more important keyboard and mouse operations Use the arrows to navigate a character or line at a time Hold down the control key to move a word at a time Use Page Up and Page Down to move up and down a page at a time Home and End move to the beginning and end of the line respectively hold down the control key command key on Mac to move to the start or end of the whole section Use Shift Enter to insert a line break character within a paragraph Use this sparingly if at all since it can be confusing to edit paragraphs containing line breaks Hold down shift with a navigation key to select content you can use Ctrl A to select all text in a section Use double click to select a word and drag the mouse to select a region of text Several
435. tted as a list 124 The citation options are pertinent to the display of citation items as referenced throughout the content rather than formatting for the bibliography section You can specify the citation character style By default the Citation style doesn t apply any formatting but you can edit the style to have your own formatting such as superscript or you can specify a different style For the citation format text specify text containing field keywords such as SHORT NAME YEAR and the special keyword NUMBER for the position in the bibliography You can also add an optional prefix and suffix for the citation for example brackets If the citation shows authors specify a separator to use for multiple authors When specifying author fields in the formatting description you can append an operation to the name in order to change the way the names are formatted for example AUTHOR SURNAMES Here are the keywords you can use e SURNAME the surname of the first person e SURNAMES the surnames of all people separated by the value of the person separator field e FORENAMES the forenames of the first person e SURNAMEFIRST the full name of the first person surname first e SURNAMELAST the full name of the first person surname last e SURNAMESFIRST the full names of all people surname first e SURNAMESLAST the full names of all people surname last If you have imported citations from a file and want to us
436. turous you can explore Jutoh s form objects which allow addition of input controls for adding interactivity in conjunction with JavaScript code Jutoh also supports synchronisation of narration with book content These features are supported by only a few ereaders at present The book creation lifecycle These are roughly the steps involved in creating and distributing an ebook 1 Create a project importing an existing file if you have one Edit the book content metadata and cover Choose a configuration approximately equivalent to the format and compile the ebook 2 3 4 Check the file for errors for example using using EpubCheck 5 If there are errors shown by step 4 go to step 2 6 Preview the file manually If there are errors go to step 2 7 Upload to one or more web sites 8 Publicise 9 Bask in the adulation of your readers Steps to 5 are supported directly by Jutoh As you can see there are elements of both file conversion and editing in Jutoh If you re really lucky you could import a file and find there s nothing to do except generate the ebook Or you can create a project from scratch and do all your editing in Jutoh which is what I m doing for this book More usually you ll import some work you have already done and massage the book in Jutoh until you re happy with it going around the loop between items 2 and 6 You re likely to want to improve the presentation of the book by tweakin
437. tyle name is retained in your book first reset the existing character styling for the selected text using Format Text Reset Formatting Automatic styles If you apply direct or ad hoc styling that is apply attributes such as bold centring paragraph spacing and so on directly without choosing a named style with those attributes then Jutoh will construct an automatic style with those attributes You can tell an automatic style by the presence of symbols in the name for example Normal Centre Alignment Automatic styles are stored in each section document not in the editable style sheet so they won t be visible except in the drop down style control If you import from a DOCX Word or ODT OpenDocument Text file you may find a lot of your content is unexpectedly formatted with automatic styles If this is the case your original document also had automatic styles but your word processor hid this by showing only the basic style name in the drop down style control It s becoming a familiar refrain in this book but avoid use of automatic styles whenever possible When you need to apply formatting consider if you can create a named style for this purpose such as Centred Picture or Picture Caption If you change your mind about the details of formatting later you can then simply edit the named style rather than dozens hundreds or even thousands of occurrences of the formatting throughout your document
438. u insert index entries throughout your book The items in the index are linked to the appropriate position in the book Insert index entries by selecting some text for the entry and using the Format Insert Links Index Entry menu command Or you can leave the text unselected and type the entry in the Index Entry dialog Type Normal v Entry Cat istKey Animal 2nd Key Mammal See Index Entry dialog When you press OK the index entry will be inserted and shown as this symbol 116 index To edit the entry simply click on the symbol You can create a multi level index by filling in the Key 1 and Key 2 fields These represent a category and a sub category and will be written with suitable indentation in the index section For example if you fill in the Entry Key 1 and Key 2 fields with Cat Animal and Mammal respectively you would get Animal Mammal Cat in the index The Entry field is always the final most specific item The index section is not created until you instruct Jutoh to do so via the Index Properties page or the Book Update command In the following screen shot two index entries have been added Cat and Dog each with Animal and Mammal keys The items are linked back to their original position in the document if there are multiple locations for the same index entry linked numbers are shown instead following each entry Index Two index entries If you
439. ual cues as you can with a conventional document it s a good idea to briefly describe what the listener is about to hear 6 Use alternative text and table title description If you provide alternative text for an image using the image properties editor it will be spoken in place of the image giving at least some idea of what surrounding text may be referring to Similarly a table s title and description may help clarify the layout of the table before the data is read and prepare the listener for it Summary In this chapter we have learned how to improve text to speech creation and make speech archives that other people can use to create their own audio files Next we will investigate the ways in which you can prepare your books for PDF file creation including for print on demand 210 Chapter 22 Formatting For Print 9C SNE This chapter describes how you can optimise your books so that it can generate files suitable for print as well digital consumption Introduction Jutoh can help create printed books via its export of OpenDocument Text ODT files An ODT file can be used with other software to create a PDF file perhaps to send to a print on demand service such as Lulu or Amazon s CreateSpace You can use a program such as LibreOffice to open the ODT file and save as a Word file or export to PDF Creating a PDF from Jutoh can be as quick as selecting the OpenDocument configuration pressing Compile pressing Launc
440. ub Kindle and ODT to make it format specific when used in styles create muliple style sheets with different style properties and specify the style sheet to use in the configuration option Style sheet Cue Supported for Epub 3 SSML Provides the ability to uniquely identify elements with an aural sound For example url audio bong mp3 The value consists of either one item or two space separated items supply an extra value null to avoid repetition of the value after the element Language Supported for Epub 3 SSML SAPI An optional language abbreviation such as en or en GB to give a hint to the speech system about what language is in use for the content enclosed in the object Pause Supported for Epub 3 SSML SAPI Apple The amount of pause in milliseconds that occurs before and after the element that it is applied to For example 50ms 50ms before and after or SOms Oms 50ms before and no pause after Use null to specify that one of the values should be absent You can use a pause object for this or a speech or span object or you can use it in a style Phoneme Supported for Epub 3 SSML SAPI Apple Specifies a phonetic pronounciation that should be used instead of the text contained within the object You must also provide a value for the Alphabet property Note that for SAPI the Alphabet property must be x microsoft sapi or the Phoneme property will be ignored except when using CereVoice see be
441. ublic Georgette Heyer wrote her first novel The Black Moth when she was seventeen in order to amuse her convalescent brother It was published in 1921 to instant success and ninety years later it has never been out of print A phenomenon even in her own lifetime to this day she is the undisputed queen of regency romance During ten years of research into Georgette Heyer s life and writing Jennifer Kloester has had unlimited access to Heyer s notebooks and private papers and the Heyer family records and exclusive access to several untapped archives of Heyer s early letters Engaging authoritative and meticulously researched Georgette Heyer Biography of a Bestseller offers a comprehensive insight into the life and writing of a remarkable and ferociously private woman All of these are between 150 and 190 words long and yet they all manage to say an awful lot about the book They are little masterpieces of copywriting and you should strive to create a little masterpiece for your own book It is not easy but it is worth taking the time to do because then you will have a ready made and persuasive description of your book readily to hand When writing try to remember what the reader is looking for and emphasise those elements In the case of a novel you want to suggest to them that this a good story with intriguing characters and lots of possibility for drama You will notice that both the novel descriptions contain questions the central
442. ubstring in the book text place an asterisk in front of the word to be found This is useful for replacing say co uk with dot co dot UK within domain names Note that custom pronunciations reside on the user s PC and are not saved with a project However they will still work for portable speech archives see below since the pronunciations are processed before saving the project documents to the archive Speech archives A speech archive is used to recreate speech using a text to speech system without needing the original content creator to generate a set of sound files This has the following advantages 1 A licence to distribute speech created using proprietary voices is not required since the end user is responsible for creating the files 2 The file is much smaller than a set of audio files 3 The end user can choose different voices text to speech engines speed and MP3 quality to suit his or her needs 4 Compared with a solution using Epub 3 or other format and software to render speech from it there is more flexibility in speech markup leading to potentially higher quality speech 5 Almost everyone has access to equipment that can play audio whereas Epub 3 and digital talking book files require specialised software or hardware The free demo version of Jutoh can be used by anyone to create audio from a speech archive Let s also consider the disadvantages compared with using an Epub 3 or Digital T
443. udio track may also enhance accessibility for disabled readers At present narration works with iBooks and Kobo for fixed layout books only some Epub 3 readers such as Readium will also handle narration for reflowable books You will need to set your configuration option Epub version to 3 Here s a procedure for adding narration you may choose to use different tools or ordering 1 Mark up your document with spans and identifiers 2 Add your audio files to the Jutoh project 3 Create a label file in the audio editor Audacity to mark up clip timings that correspond to span identifiers 4 In Jutoh document properties import the labels file to a timing set 5 Specify a character style for highlighting narrated content 6 Compile the project These tasks are described further below Step 1 Mark up your document with spans and identifiers Jutoh will need to match each segment of text with a clip in an audio file So first you need to mark up your document with span tags either manually using the Object Palette or automatically using the command Book Bulk Bookmark Management This can add spans around words and sentences complete with generated identifiers You can manually fix spans that haven t been placed correctly Use the Inspector Palette to view all the identifiers in the document both object Ids and bookmarks This is particularly useful when you re using paragraph identifiers which are not visi
444. ue gt lt variable name Book gt lt write gt lt write if variable set Author gt lt text value gt lt variable name Author surnamesfirst attributes strong gt lt write gt lt write if variable set Corporate author gt lt text value gt lt variable name Corporate author attributes strong gt lt write gt lt write if variable set Year gt lt text value gt lt variable name Year gt lt write gt lt write if variable set City gt lt text value gt lt variable name City gt lt write gt lt write if variable set URL gt lt text value gt lt variable name URL url name URL gt lt write gt lt write gt lt text value gt lt write gt lt finish gt lt xi gt If written in English the first few commands of this would be set a new d variable with the value of the Number variable Set the separator for writing names to and If the bibliography is not being formatted as a list write the value of d followed by a period and a space If the Title variable is set write its value in an italic font If the Book variable is set write a comma and then the value If the Author variable is set write a comma and then the names as Surnamel Forenames and Surname 2 Forenames2 in a bold font XML syntax is fairly simple there are tags enclosed with angle brackets such as write and set which must be te
445. uments in your project you will be offered a choice of lexicons or it will give you the chance to create a new lexicon document To edit an existing object click on the object or you can navigate betwen objects using Previous and Next in the Speech palette and press Edit to edit the current object To see all the speech objects in your document or project go to the Inspector tab in the Formatting Palette and choose Elements Here s a screenshot showing the Objects tab showing the properties of the object at the current caret position 203 Palette x 4 Inspector Favourites Speech Clips b gt HY A 0 Play Stop Preview Source Generate 4 Objects Profiles Edit Object Previous Speech Object Next Pause Object viWerbose dea Pronunciation Voice family Heather The Objects tab in the Speech palette Initially the speech objects will be displayed in the editor using just the object name i e speech Check Verbose display to show all the properties that have been set for the object This setting can also be changed via Preferences Highlighting You can add speech and pause objects and pronunciations from the Format Insert Speech menu and the context menu So you can also use the keyboard shortcuts associated with these commands and if necessary customise them Ideally we would use Epub 3 property syntax throughout However Epub 3 does not have as much expressive power as SSML so property values conform
446. urations will overwrite each other You may find that Kindlegen complains about the image file size if you have very large images This can be a problem if your image files are larger than the viewport and especially if Jutoh is stitching two images together to make a spread You can get Jutoh to resize the images when generating the book by specifying Maximum image width height in your configuration You can choose a size that eliminates the error message This currently only works if not splitting or merging pages Also be aware of the 650MB overall file size imposed on Amazon KDP uploads You can specify a cover image with the same aspect ratio as your page size but for the HTML cover page it may be better to switch off Generate cover page in your configuration and make your own cover page setting the guide type to cover via the document s properties The Kindle publishing guideliness recommend adding an HTML cover page whether automatically via Jutoh or explicitly but at present it will result in two covers being shown the image and the page So you may decide to switch off HTML cover page generation to avoid that Note that there are some problems when displaying fixed layout books on the Kindle Paperwhite and possibly other e ink Kindle devices e Image objects may be displayed at the wrong size if using magnified regions Workarounds include switching off region magnification via the configuration option Auto region magn
447. ut ebook has a set number of pages and each page has a layout that cannot be altered by adjusting font size or other variables in contrast with a reflowable ebook A fixed layout book will be scaled to fit the display and there may be flexibility about whether double page spreads or single pages are displayed depending on device orientation This style suits certain kinds of book such as children s picture books photography books and comics The main variants of fixed layout file format are Epub 3 Kindle KF8 and iBooks Jutoh supports the creation of fixed layout books Metadata The description of the book such as title author publication date and so on Metadata is edited in the first tab of the Project Properties dialog Mobipocket file This is the native file format for Amazon s Kindle books and uses the MOBI or PRC file extension Mobipocket files are created either using Mobipocket Creator or in Jutoh s case using Amazon s kindlegen application which takes a subset of the Epub format as input The Mobipocket KF7 file format is not as capable as Epub but Kindle is the single most popular ebook platform by some margin The KF8 format supercedes the less capable KF7 format and is equivalent to Epub 2 in most respects ODT file Short for OpenDocument Text file this is the native format of OpenOffice org which is a free download and can be used as a converter between Jutoh and other popular word processor file for
448. utes are defined in the paragraph If you choose a particular attribute such as font name then only that attribute will be applied when you press OK If your span of text has a particular attribute such as colour you can clear that attribute by clearing the checkbox or choosing none or clearing the control value depending on the attribute in question If you want to remove all formatting for a span of text then you can use Format Text Reset Text Formatting instead of the font dialog You can select the text whose formatting is to be cleared or you can click within the formatted text and Jutoh will remove the surrounding formatting If there is no 45 CHAPTER 6 EDITING AND FORMATTING CONTENT character formatting at this position Jutoh will remove the paragraph s direct formatting Formatting paragraphs As per spans of text paragraphs should be formatted using named styles if possible which we ll cover below But if you need to apply direct formatting you can use the command Format Paragraph Font Indents 8 Spacing Bullets Tabs Advanced Alignment Indentation tenths of a mm Spacing tenths of a mm O Left Left Before a paragraph 40 O Right Left first line Justified e Indeterminate _ Page break Qutline level C Avoid page break before paragraph C Avoid page break after paragraph Right A Duis pharetra consequat dui Cum sociis natoque
449. utoh so that when you click on Launch you have a choice of Default Kindle for PC Mac if you have installed it or Kindle Previewer Unfortunately this won t work on Mac because Amazon haven t yet implemented file name passing on this platform but we can take credit for persuading Amazon to at least add it for the Windows version You can install Nook and Kobo desktop applications to preview your Epubs though they don t co operate well with Jutoh and you ll have to open books directly in these tools In my view they re pigs to use for local files and are geared towards getting you to part with money for books in their catalogues So you may be content to use Adobe Digital Editions to preview your work If you are distributing your book on Smashwords the Meatgrinder application that runs when you submit the book may give you some information about the quality of formatting in your book Finally of course you can get a variety of ebook reader hardware as they re getting ever cheaper and test your files on these When using external reader applications alongside Jutoh such as Kindle for PC be aware 246 that if the book is open in that application Jutoh may not be able to create it again until you quit the book or close the application Also you should delete the book from the application s library before launching it again because quite often you can end up looking at the old version of the book and wondering why no
450. utoh the default or you can use this wizard for advanced control of the contents page and NavMap in partiodar taking entries from headings in the content and not just the section titles Leave it to Jutoh Jutoh wil create NavMap entries from section titles and a contents page if you have enabled this setting In this mode the Table of Contents wil not appear in your project only in the generated book Create contents with Jutoh s heip Jutoh wil create the contents by scanning your document headings Clear the checkbox below to use the current entries instead Y Recreate contents by scanning documents Y Create a contents page Table of Contents Gets conta page in your book aleticay on avec made Table of Contents Wizard first page To create an advanced table of contents with both a NavMap and a separate table of contents page check Create contents with Jutoh s help and also Recreate contents by scanning documents and Create a contents page In the next wizard page we specify the settings that Jutoh will used when finding headings in the document 109 Table of Contents Generation Preferences Choose how the table of contents will be generated from your book content Specify the heading styles that will be used to find the headings For example you might want to find all paragraphs with Heading 1 style for the first level in your table of contents If you wish to use document depth the level at which i
451. vMap NCX Meatgrinder will look either for section headings starting with Chapter or a linked table of contents You can create an advanced table of contents using Jutoh and Meatgrinder will happily use that for its own table of contents and NavMap EpubCheck failure This may be a genuine error but sometimes the whole Meatgrinder conversion process fails even when Jutoh is capable of creating perfect Epub files directly You 243 may have to wait until Smashwords fixes the bug though you can try removing any complex formatting lists seem to be a particular problem Sometimes the bug is with EpubCheck itself Unfortunately without an EpubCheck pass you won t be able to submit your book to the Premium Catalog which includes distribution by Apple File too large There is a Smashwords file limit of 5MB at the time of writing so if your ebook is too large consider reducing the quality of your images or even deleting some If your images are originally in a format other than JPEG or were pasted from the clipboard you can use the Image quality setting in your configuration but if you inserted JPEG images you will need to replace each image Kindle errors e Hyperlinks within the same section don t work This seems to be a quirk of the Kindle Paperwhite If you are using footnotes ensure you enable Endnotes mode in Project Properties Indexes Footnotes amp Endnotes so the link and target are in different documents i
452. ve selected style sheets one or more with B Save When importing stylesheets will replace any existing style sheets of the same name Please note that these are not CSS style sheets they are Jutoh specific binary files You will be warned if you attempt to import a regular css file Finding and replacing styles You can search for paragraphs with particular named styles and replace them with other styles using the Find and Replace dialog available from Edit Find Ctrl F 143 Find Replace with Replace Replace All Options _ Match case _ Match whole words only Match accents _ Use regular expressions Additional criteria Find Paragraph style Body Text First Indent Replace with Paragraph style Body Text The Find and Replace dialog Click on More gt gt if the extra options aren t currenly shown Then click Add and choose a paragraph style for each of the Find and Replace with criteria You can use asterisks in the style to find so for example the string Body Text will match against Body Text Body Text First Indent and also automatic styles derived from Body Text styles such as Body Text Centre Alignment Style substitutions You can replaces styles on a per configuration basis by using the Paragraph style substitutions configuration property For example a value of Normal Normal Justified will temporarily replace all instances of Normal with
453. well or because you love the very idea of France all that style and elegance If the first think Living in France all you need to know notes from an expat or if you don t know France that well except through research and imagination you can go the I Heart France route and explore the style and culture of the country Chances are that people who also love France in the same way may be interested in reading your wonderfully romantic love story set in their favourite country Both of these approaches give you plenty of angles for blogging participating in relevant forums and generally getting the word out there Step 4 Build a platform Get yourself known online Gather a tribe The word is that traditional publishers are making it a 260 stipulation that newly signed authors already have a blog or are at least prepared to start one Others are suggesting that their existing authors get onto Twitter For an indie author an online presence of some description is even more essential The good news is that nowadays you don t need an elaborate or expensive website with flashing graphics In fact I would advise strongly against a static classic web page that is difficult to maintain and update What you need is a simple dynamic site where you can talk about your special subject and hopefully create some interest about your writing Fortunately there are lots of free very easy to use blogging platforms that make the process
454. with no graphics Generate HTB generates a wxWidgets Help file a simple zipped HTML based format Generate MP3 generates MP3 files if you select a suitable voice engine and install the LAME MP3 encoder in Preferences MP3 Generate HTML generates a series of XHTML files Book navigation controls can be enabled via properties in the Navigation category below Cover Design This category gives you control over the way Jutoh generates the cover design and cover page for your book e Cover design specifies the cover design to be used in this configuration Cover page background colour specifies an optional background colour for the XHTML page that contains the cover Epub only This RGB value should contain six hexadecimal digits two digits per colour To edit the colour double click on the property name or click on the button You might like to provide a background colour chosen from the cover image for filling in the area around the image Generate cover page check to generate an XHTML cover page for the book Not recommended for Mobipocket Expand cover to fit page check to have the cover expand to the page height the default Include cover in NavMap check to include the cover in the navigation map not recommended Exclude cover from reading order check to hide the cover from the linear reading order 79 linear no in the spine recommended If this option is checked the cover page may not
455. wnload the third party kindlegen command ine tool If in doubt simply leave the selections as they are Initial formats V Epub V Mobipocket LV OpenDocument v Text Step 2 Project Location page Enter Lena into Your project name If you wish you can change the location in Project folder You can use an existing Jutoh project as a template if you wish but you can leave the Use template option unchecked for this example Press Next Step 3 Layout Choice This page lets you choose between a reflowable ebook and a fixed layout ebook Most of the time you will choose Normal reflowable book CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED Layout Choice Choose whether to create a normal reflowable book such as a novel or self help book or a fixedtayout book such as a children s picture book You can import from an existing document into a reflowable book but not into a fixedtayout book Portrait and landscape v 512 px Page Templates 800 px 20 px New Project Step 3 Layout Choice page Leave these options as they are and press Next Step 4 Import Options This page is for specifying various details about the import You don t need to change the defaults for this example 10 CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED Y Resize images to max 80 ES pixels wide Y Remove any page breaks Import encoding Unicode 8 bit UTF 8 Style options 8 Create standard style sheet Use style sheet template
456. ws above click on Download and Install to get Jutoh to perform the whole process automatically 268 This will help you install Amazon s Kindlegen helper application to your machine so that Jutoh can create Kindle books To install Kindlegen automatically click on Download and Install Or download the Kindlegen archive file from the Amazon site and save it to your hard disk Then dick Browse to choose the file you downloaded Specify where you want Kindlegen installed and dick on Install Current Kindlegen version 2 90 Latest Kindlegen version 2 90 Get Kindlegen from Amazon Kindlegen archive This is the file you downloaded from Amazon Installation folder C Kindlegen Browse This is a folder that the Kindlegen files will be copied to It should be a new folder Kindlegen Installation dialog If Download and Install doesn t work for any reason download the zip file manually click Browse to set the location of the zip file and click Install If you wish to install Kindlegen manually instead perform the following installation steps Download the zip file from www amazon com kindlepublishing and unarchive it into a suitable folder such as c Kindlegen Then set the path of the kindlegen program in the Helpers page of the Preferences dialog An example path might be c Kindlegen kindlegen exe If Kindlegen isn t working within Jutoh first check that the path in the Helpers dialog refers to a file that ex
457. ws aspects of your document such as all the bookmarks or all the images e Favourites shows favourite shortcuts for styles or menu commands For more information see Appendix B Configuring Jutoh Getting help There are various ways to get help in Jutoh The help window containing the Jutoh manual is shown when you click on the Help button on the toolbar or type CtrI H or use the menu command Help Contents Use the same command to close it again The help window shows in the main window if you want to close it maximize it to take up the whole main window area or unpin it to show it as a separate window use the buttons at the top right of the help window circled in red in the picture below If you ve maximized it you can use the same button to restore it back to its normal size You can drag an unpinned help window back to the main window by moving it until a blue rectangle appears near the edge of the main window and then dropping it The help window itself has controls for showing or hiding the help contents changing the text size and navigating around the help 21 CHAPTER 3 THE JUTOH USER INTERFACE File Edit Format Tools Document Book View Help D e UE RR x gt o O New Save Edit Cover Compile Check Launch Previous Help RE eo B7I Be Contents Index OOOO a A gt E bookmarks v v a El 7 Home Upalevel Previous Next a n KB0003 How to improve document formatting e B poa ina K See als
458. y be lost To work around this conundrum set the configuration property Maximum box words for inline block to the number of words above which you consider a text box to be large and in danger of being rendered across page boundaries The default is 200 words Boxes larger than this size will omit the display inline block attribute to favour correct rendering across pages over centring Centring should work correctly on most other ereaders without the need for this attribute since we also use margin left auto margin right auto to implement centring A problem with the case when display inline block is not used is that a text box will not automatically shrink to fit its content If you do not care about ADE compatibility you can set Box word threshold for inline block to a large number so that it always uses display inline block Otherwise you can make sure that when a text box needs to be narrower than the surrounding text you give it an explicit width such as 50 Note that if you have the configuration option Maximum box words for inline block set to a non zero value the generated HTML box may have an extra paragraph tag around it in order to support centring and shrink to fit Set the option to zero to ensure that a box that is alone in a paragraph is not enclosed within an outer paragraph which can cause problems in some situations including unexpected text sizes 162 By default text boxes are stripped of their he
459. you have an existing image you wish to use you can specify this in the New Project Wizard by selecting Use existing file in the Cover page and browsing for an image file Or after you have created the project start editing the cover within Project Properties and click Create From Image File You can then choose a file to use 70 Using the cover designer In the Cover tab in Project Properties click on Edit Cover Design This will show cover designer dialog shown below A design comprises a list of rectangular objects which are drawn from the top one first to the bottom one last and so later objects will partially obscure earlier objects The first object is always called Background and defines the overall size and the background colour or texture Objects tone Add Text Rename Title Author Add Image Delete Add Box TIL Publisher Y Enabled Size amp Position Background Text X position 0 Centre Y position 120 Absolute Width Percentage Height 250 Absolute Relative to none Templates Preview Y Auto update Show outlines OK Cancel Help The Cover Designer dialog Typically a design might have four other objects one for making a label area against the background and three more for placing the title author name and publisher name Add a new object with Add Text Add Image or Add Box They all add an object but set up the initial values in different ways for
460. ysical edition on the cover e Limit embedded images to 2 million pixels and don t use text in images if at all possible For further information see the file iBookstoreAssetGuide pdf available if you have an iTunes Connect account Barnes amp Noble Nook Barnes amp Noble uses the Epub format for their range of Nook devices and apps you can get your books on their site via Smashwords or directly from their Publt publication site at pubit barnesandnoble com The Publt site contains formatting and submission guidelines Nook readers are popular in the USA and came to the UK in late 2012 These are some of the guidelines mentioned on the Publt site e The page margins should be set at 30 pixels on the top and sides with 20 pixels on the bottom In Jutoh these can be set in your configuration for example HTML left margin Embedded fonts are allowed but discouraged due to the extra size and licensing issues e A Title Page is mandatory e The Copyright page should show the ebook ISBN Cover image sizes range between 500x600 to 600x730 When generating for Nook switch off Generate iBooks XML in your Epub configuration or the file may be rejected The Nook doesn t honour the text guide type and so it is not possible to specify the first page when the reader first opens the book 254 Your ebook cover when viewed inside the book will have margins around it this is due to the fact that the No
461. ze that s targeted at a particular device s aspect ratio Devices with different aspect ratios will still show the book but with more unused display Most devices will scale the book to the largest size that fits the display so the absolute size is not as crucial as the aspect ratio In most cases you will probably choose Portrait and landscape Click on Browse to choose from some predefined sizes you can also add your own for use later Specify a margin if you are going to add text and image objects to your pages and you want to have them snap to within a margin You can change these settings later per project and per page Finally choose how many pages to create initially You can add more later Click Next to move to the Cover wizard page then Finish to create the project Editing pages When you first click on a page in the project you will see a blank page The first thing is to assign the image you want to show as the background to the whole page It can be a higher resolution than the page size in this case it will allow scaling and zooming without so much loss of detail The following picture illustrates a typical session 177 CHAPTER 18 CREATING FIXED LAYOUT BOOKS File Edit Format Layout Tools Document Book View Help z g 8 El aje IAS E L 2 Save Edit Cover Compile Check Launch Previous Next Documents Home Options Help X Page2 B B Content Title Page Contents T E Page 1 JJ Page type

Chapter 1

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents